WO2024024691A1 - Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, pattern-forming method, and production method for electronic device - Google Patents

Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, pattern-forming method, and production method for electronic device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024024691A1
WO2024024691A1 PCT/JP2023/026881 JP2023026881W WO2024024691A1 WO 2024024691 A1 WO2024024691 A1 WO 2024024691A1 JP 2023026881 W JP2023026881 W JP 2023026881W WO 2024024691 A1 WO2024024691 A1 WO 2024024691A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
sensitive
radiation
general formula
acid
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2023/026881
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
修平 山口
孝太郎 高橋
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Publication of WO2024024691A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024024691A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/039Macromolecular compounds which are photodegradable, e.g. positive electron resists
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/20Exposure; Apparatus therefor

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, a pattern forming method, and an electronic device manufacturing method. More specifically, the present invention relates to an ultra-microlithography process applicable to the manufacturing process of ultra-LSI (Large Scale Integration) and high-capacity microchips, the manufacturing process of nanoimprint molds, the manufacturing process of high-density information recording media, and the like; The present invention relates to actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin compositions, actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive films, pattern forming methods, and electronic device manufacturing methods that can be suitably used in other photofabrication processes.
  • ultra-microlithography process applicable to the manufacturing process of ultra-LSI (Large Scale Integration) and high-capacity microchips, the manufacturing process of nanoimprint molds, the manufacturing process of high-density information recording media, and the like.
  • the present invention relates to actinic ray
  • Patent Documents 1 and 2 describe resist compositions containing aromatic dicarboxylic acid salts having multiple phenolic hydroxyl groups.
  • the resist compositions described in Patent Documents 1 and 2 have problems in that they are inferior in density dependence, line width roughness (LWR) performance, and defect suppression performance.
  • the density dependence refers to the sensitivity when forming a certain pattern (for example, a 1:1 line-and-space pattern with a line width of 50 nm) when the exposure amount around the area where the pattern is formed is small (sparse). It refers to the property that there is a difference between sensitivity D and sensitivity B when the exposure amount around the area where the pattern is formed is large (when the exposure is dense). Poor density dependence means that D/B, which is the ratio of the above sensitivity, is large (for example, D/B is 1.99 or more), and excellent density dependence means that D/B is small. (For example, D/B is less than 1.99).
  • LWR performance refers to the ability to reduce the LWR of a pattern.
  • Defect suppression performance refers to performance that can suppress the occurrence of defects.
  • the present inventors have discovered that the above problem can be solved by the following configuration. Although the reason why the above problems can be solved by the present invention is not completely clear, the present inventors assume that it is because the resin (A) and the salt (B) have excellent compatibility. .
  • An actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition containing a resin (A) containing a group that decomposes and increases polarity by the action of an acid, and a salt (B),
  • the resin (A) has at least one repeating unit selected from the group consisting of a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (S1) and a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (S2), and a repeating unit having a polar group.
  • the salt (B) is an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, which is a compound represented by the following general formula (T1).
  • Ra 1 to Ra 3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group.
  • La 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • Ra 4 to Ra 6 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aromatic heterocyclic group, an aralkyl group, or an alkenyl group. Two of Ra 4 to Ra 6 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • Ra 0 represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aromatic heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a halogen atom, or a cyano group.
  • the plurality of Ra 0s may be the same or different.
  • Two of Ra 1 to Ra 3 , La 1 and Ra 0 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • na represents an integer from 0 to 4.
  • ma represents an integer from 0 to 2.
  • Ra 7 to Ra 9 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group.
  • La 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • Ara represents an aromatic ring group.
  • Ra 10 to Ra 12 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aromatic heterocyclic group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkyloxy group, or an alkenyl group. At least two of Ra 10 to Ra 12 may be bonded to each other to form a ring. At least one of Ra 9 to Ra 12 may bind to Ara.
  • Arb represents an aromatic ring.
  • the above aromatic ring may have a substituent.
  • Q represents an acid residue.
  • the anion in general formula (T1) is a conjugate base of an acid with a pKa of -1 to 9.
  • Rb 1 represents -OH, -ORb 2 , -NRb 3 Rb 4 , -SH, or -SRb 5 , and multiple Rb 1 's may be the same or different.
  • Rb 2 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or an acyl group.
  • Rb 3 and Rb 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or an acyl group.
  • Rb 5 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or an acyl group. At least two of Rb 2 to Rb 5 may be bonded to each other to form a ring. When Arb has a substituent, the above substituent and at least one of Rb 2 to Rb 5 may be bonded to form a ring.
  • Lb 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Lb 1 may be combined with Rb 1 to form a ring by substituting a hydrogen atom contained in Rb 1 . Lb 1 may be bonded to at least one of Rb 2 to Rb 5 to form a ring. When Arb has a substituent, the substituent and Lb 1 may be combined to form a ring.
  • p represents an integer from 2 to 5.
  • G m+ represents an m-valent organic cation.
  • m represents an integer of 1 or more.
  • S3 The actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to [1], wherein the repeating unit having a polar group is a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (S3).
  • R 101 , R 102 and R 103 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group.
  • R 102 may combine with Ar A to form a ring, in which case R 102 represents a single bond or an alkylene group.
  • L A represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • Ar A represents an aromatic ring group.
  • k represents an integer from 1 to 5.
  • the salt (C) is a compound different from the above salt (B) and contains a salt (C) that generates an acid upon irradiation with actinic rays or radiation, and the above salt (C) has a group that is decomposed by the action of the acid.
  • the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to any one of [1] to [5].
  • [7] The actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to [6], wherein the salt (C) is a compound represented by the following general formula (U1).
  • L represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • A represents a group that decomposes under the action of an acid.
  • n represents an integer from 1 to 5.
  • X represents an n+1-valent linking group.
  • M + represents a sulfonium ion or an iodonium ion.
  • L, A, n, and M + represent the same meanings as L, A, n, and M + in general formula (U1), respectively.
  • a pattern forming method comprising a developing step of developing the exposed resist film using a developer.
  • a method for manufacturing an electronic device including the pattern forming method according to [10].
  • the present invention it is possible to provide an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition that is excellent in density dependence, LWR performance, and defect suppression performance. Further, the present invention can provide an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, a pattern forming method, and an electronic device manufacturing method using the above-mentioned actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing an exposure area when determining sensitivity D when the exposure amount around a pattern forming area is small (sparse) in evaluation of density dependence.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing an exposure area when determining sensitivity B when the exposure amount around a region forming a pattern is large (in a dense case) in evaluation of density dependence.
  • active rays or “radiation” include, for example, the bright line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays typified by excimer lasers, extreme ultraviolet (EUV), X-rays, soft X-rays, and electron It means a line (EB: Electron Beam) or the like.
  • light means actinic rays or radiation.
  • exposure refers not only to exposure to the bright line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays typified by excimer lasers, extreme ultraviolet rays, X-rays, and EUV, but also to electron beams and ion beams, unless otherwise specified. It also includes drawing using particle beams such as beams.
  • " ⁇ " is used to include the numerical values described before and after it as a lower limit value and an upper limit value.
  • (meth)acrylate represents at least one of acrylate and methacrylate.
  • (meth)acrylic acid represents at least one of acrylic acid and methacrylic acid.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw), number average molecular weight (Mn), and degree of dispersion (also referred to as molecular weight distribution) (Mw/Mn) of the resin are determined using a GPC (Gel Permeation Chromatography) apparatus (HLC manufactured by Tosoh Corporation).
  • GPC Gel Permeation Chromatography
  • the notation that does not indicate substituted or unsubstituted includes a group containing a substituent as well as a group having no substituent.
  • alkyl group includes not only an alkyl group without a substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
  • organic group refers to a group containing at least one carbon atom.
  • monovalent substituents are preferred. Examples of the substituent include monovalent nonmetallic atomic groups excluding hydrogen atoms, and can be selected from the following substituents T, for example.
  • substituent T examples include halogen atoms such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine; alkoxy groups such as methoxy, ethoxy and tert-butoxy; cycloalkyloxy; phenoxy and p-tolyloxy groups; Aryloxy groups; alkoxycarbonyl groups such as methoxycarbonyl and butoxycarbonyl groups; cycloalkyloxycarbonyl groups; aryloxycarbonyl groups such as phenoxycarbonyl groups; acyloxy groups such as acetoxy, propionyloxy and benzoyloxy groups; acetyl Acyl groups such as benzoyl, isobutyryl, acryloyl, methacryloyl and methoxalyl groups; sulfanyl groups; alkylsulfanyl groups such as methylsulfanyl and tert-butylsulfanyl groups; phenylsulfanyl groups; alkyls
  • substituent T when these substituents can further have one or more substituents, the further substituent is a group having one or more substituents selected from the above-mentioned substituents (for example, a monoalkylamino group). , dialkylamino group, arylamino group, trifluoromethyl group, etc.) are also included as examples of the substituent T.
  • the direction of bonding of the divalent groups described is not limited unless otherwise specified.
  • Y in the compound represented by the formula "X-Y-Z" is -COO-
  • Y may be -CO-O- or -O-CO- Good too.
  • the above compound may be "X-CO-O-Z" or "X-O-CO-Z”.
  • acid dissociation constant refers to pKa in an aqueous solution, and specifically, it is a value based on Hammett's substituent constant and a database of known literature values using the following software package 1. is the value obtained by calculation. All pKa values described herein are values calculated using this software package.
  • Software package 1 Advanced Chemistry Development (ACD/Labs) Software V8.14 for Solaris (1994-2007 ACD/Labs).
  • pKa can also be determined by molecular orbital calculation method.
  • a specific method for this includes a method of calculating H 2 + dissociation free energy in an aqueous solution based on a thermodynamic cycle.
  • the H + dissociation free energy can be calculated, for example, by DFT (density functional theory), but various other methods have been reported in the literature, and the method is not limited to this. .
  • DFT density functional theory
  • there is a plurality of software that can perform DFT and one example is Gaussian 16.
  • pKa refers to a value obtained by calculating a value based on Hammett's substituent constant and a database of known literature values using software package 1, as described above. If calculation is not possible, a value obtained by Gaussian 16 based on DFT (density functional theory) is adopted.
  • pKa refers to "pKa in aqueous solution” as described above, but if pKa in aqueous solution cannot be calculated, “pKa in dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO) solution” is adopted. shall be.
  • solid content means a component that forms an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, and does not include a solvent. Furthermore, if the component forms an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, it is considered to be a solid content even if the component is liquid.
  • the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition of the present invention (also referred to as “composition of the present invention”) comprises a resin (A) containing a group that decomposes and increases polarity by the action of an acid, and a salt (B). ), wherein the resin (A) is composed of a repeating unit represented by general formula (S1) and a repeating unit represented by general formula (S2).
  • the salt (B) is an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin containing at least one repeating unit selected from the group consisting of a repeating unit having a polar group, and the salt (B) is a compound represented by the general formula (T1). It is a composition.
  • the composition of the present invention is typically a resist composition, and may be a positive resist composition or a negative resist composition.
  • the composition of the present invention may be a resist composition for alkaline development or an organic solvent development resist composition.
  • the composition of the present invention may be a chemically amplified resist composition or a non-chemically amplified resist composition.
  • the composition of the present invention is typically a chemically amplified resist composition.
  • Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive films can be formed using the composition of the present invention.
  • the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film formed using the composition of the present invention is typically a resist film.
  • the resin (A) contained in the composition of the present invention is a resin containing a group (also referred to as an "acid-decomposable group") that decomposes and increases polarity under the action of an acid.
  • the resin (A) is an acid-decomposable resin, and when an alkaline developer is typically used as the developer in the pattern forming method using the composition of the present invention, a positive pattern is preferably used. When an organic developer is used as the developer, a negative pattern is suitably formed.
  • An acid-decomposable group is typically a group that decomposes under the action of an acid to produce a polar group.
  • the acid-decomposable group preferably has a structure in which a polar group is protected by a group that leaves by the action of an acid (leaving group).
  • the polarity of the resin (A) increases due to the action of an acid, so that its solubility in an alkaline developer increases and its solubility in an organic solvent decreases.
  • the resin (A) contains at least one repeating unit selected from the group consisting of the repeating unit represented by the general formula (S1) and the repeating unit represented by the general formula (S2). At least one repeating unit selected from the group consisting of the repeating unit represented by general formula (S1) and the repeating unit represented by general formula (S2) is preferably a repeating unit having an acid-decomposable group.
  • Ra 1 to Ra 3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group.
  • La 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • Ra 4 to Ra 6 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aromatic heterocyclic group, an aralkyl group, or an alkenyl group. Two of Ra 4 to Ra 6 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • Ra 0 represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aromatic heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a halogen atom, or a cyano group.
  • the plurality of Ra 0s may be the same or different.
  • Two of Ra 1 to Ra 3 , La 1 and Ra 0 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • na represents an integer from 0 to 4.
  • ma represents an integer from 0 to 2.
  • Ra 7 to Ra 9 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group.
  • La 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • Ara represents an aromatic ring group.
  • Ra 10 to Ra 12 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aromatic heterocyclic group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkyloxy group, or an alkenyl group. At least two of Ra 10 to Ra 12 may be bonded to each other to form a ring. At least one of Ra 9 to Ra 12 may bind to Ara.
  • Ra 1 to Ra 3 in general formula (S1) each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group.
  • the alkyl groups of Ra 1 to Ra 3 may be either linear or branched.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 5, more preferably 1 to 3.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the cycloalkyl group of Ra 1 to Ra 3 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 3 to 20, more preferably 5 to 15.
  • Examples of the cycloalkyl group for Ra 1 to Ra 3 include monocyclic cycloalkyl groups such as a cyclopentyl group and a cyclohexyl group, and polycyclic groups such as a norbornyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, and an adamantyl group.
  • a cycloalkyl group is preferred.
  • Examples of the halogen atom of Ra 1 to Ra 3 include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom, with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom being preferred.
  • the alkyl group contained in the alkoxycarbonyl group of Ra 1 to Ra 3 may be either linear or branched.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group contained in the alkoxycarbonyl group is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 5, more preferably 1 to 3.
  • La 1 in general formula (S1) represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • divalent linking groups include carbonyl group (-CO-), -O-, -S-, -SO-, -SO 2 -, amide group (-CONR-), and sulfonamide group (-SO 2 NR-), an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, an alkenylene group, and a linking group in which a plurality of these are linked.
  • Each of the above R represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group, and the organic group is preferably an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, or a combination thereof.
  • La 1 is preferably a single bond or -COO-, and more preferably a single bond.
  • Ra 4 to Ra 6 in general formula (S1) each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aromatic heterocyclic group, an aralkyl group, or an alkenyl group.
  • the alkyl groups of Ra 4 to Ra 6 may be either linear or branched.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 6.
  • the methylene group contained in the alkyl group of Ra 4 to Ra 6 may be replaced with at least one of -CO- and -O-.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the cycloalkyl group of Ra 4 to Ra 6 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 3 to 20, more preferably 5 to 15.
  • Examples of the cycloalkyl group for Ra 4 to Ra 6 include monocyclic cycloalkyl groups such as a cyclopentyl group and a cyclohexyl group, and polycyclic groups such as a norbornyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, and an adamantyl group.
  • a cycloalkyl group is preferred.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aryl group of Ra 4 to Ra 6 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 10.
  • the most preferred aryl group for Ra 4 to Ra 6 is a phenyl group.
  • the aralkyl group of Ra 4 to Ra 6 is preferably a group in which one hydrogen atom in the alkyl group of Ra 4 to Ra 6 described above is substituted with an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms (preferably a phenyl group), For example, a benzyl group and the like can be mentioned.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkenyl group of Ra 4 to Ra 6 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 2 to 5, more preferably 2 to 4.
  • As the alkenyl group for Ra 4 to Ra 6 a vinyl group is preferred.
  • the aromatic heterocyclic group of Ra 4 to Ra 6 preferably contains at least one heteroatom selected from the group consisting of a sulfur atom, a nitrogen atom, and an oxygen atom.
  • the number of heteroatoms contained in the aromatic heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 5, more preferably 1 to 3.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aromatic heterocyclic group is not particularly limited, but is preferably from 2 to 20, more preferably from 3 to 15.
  • the aromatic heterocyclic group may be monocyclic or polycyclic.
  • Examples of the aromatic heterocyclic group of Ra 4 to Ra 6 include thienyl group, furanyl group, benzothienyl group, dibenzothienyl group, benzofuranyl group, pyrrole group, oxazolyl group, thiazolyl group, pyridyl group, isothiazolyl group, thiadiazolyl group. Examples include groups.
  • Two of Ra 4 to Ra 6 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • the group formed by bonding two of Ra 4 to Ra 6 to form a ring is preferably a cycloalkyl group.
  • the above-mentioned cycloalkyl group is a monocyclic cycloalkyl group such as a cyclopentyl group or a cyclohexyl group, or a polycyclic cycloalkyl group such as a norbornyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, or an adamantyl group.
  • An alkyl group is preferred, and a monocyclic cycloalkyl group having 5 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferred.
  • one of the methylene groups constituting the ring may be replaced with a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom, a group containing a hetero atom such as a carbonyl group, or a vinylidene group.
  • one or more of the ethylene groups constituting the cycloalkane ring may be replaced with a vinylene group.
  • -C(Ra 4 )(Ra 5 )(Ra 6 ) in general formula (S1) is preferably a leaving group, and -COO-C(Ra 4 )(Ra 5 )(Ra 6 ) is an acid It is preferable that -C(Ra 4 )(Ra 5 )(Ra 6 ) is eliminated by the action of , thereby producing a carboxyl group.
  • Ra 0 in general formula (S1) represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aromatic heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a halogen atom, or a cyano group.
  • the alkyl group of Ra 0 may be either linear or branched.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 5, more preferably 1 to 3.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the cycloalkyl group of Ra 0 is not particularly limited, but is preferably from 3 to 20, more preferably from 5 to 15.
  • Examples of the cycloalkyl group for Ra 1 to Ra 3 include monocyclic cycloalkyl groups such as a cyclopentyl group and a cyclohexyl group, and polycyclic groups such as a norbornyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, and an adamantyl group.
  • a cycloalkyl group is preferred.
  • Examples of the halogen atom with Ra 0 include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom, with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom being preferred.
  • the alkyl group contained in the alkoxy group of Ra 0 may be either linear or branched.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group contained in the alkoxy group is not particularly limited, but is preferably from 1 to 5, more preferably from 1 to 3.
  • the alkyl group that may be contained in the acyloxy group of Ra 0 may be either linear or branched.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group that can be contained in the acyloxy group of Ra 0 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 5, more preferably 1 to 3.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aryl group that can be contained in the acyloxy group of Ra 0 is not particularly limited, but is preferably from 6 to 20, more preferably from 6 to 10.
  • a phenyl group is most preferable.
  • the alkyl group contained in the alkoxycarbonyl group of Ra 0 may be either linear or branched.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group contained in the alkoxycarbonyl group is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 5, more preferably 1 to 3.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aryl group of Ra 0 is not particularly limited, but is preferably from 6 to 20, more preferably from 6 to 10.
  • a phenyl group is most preferred.
  • the aralkyl group with Ra 0 is preferably a group in which one hydrogen atom in the alkyl group with Ra 0 described above is substituted with an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms (preferably a phenyl group), such as a benzyl group, etc. Can be mentioned.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkenyl group of Ra 0 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 2 to 5, more preferably 2 to 4.
  • As the alkenyl group with Ra 0 a vinyl group is preferable.
  • the aromatic heterocyclic group with Ra 0 preferably contains at least one heteroatom selected from the group consisting of a sulfur atom, a nitrogen atom, and an oxygen atom.
  • the number of heteroatoms contained in the aromatic heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 5, more preferably 1 to 3.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aromatic heterocyclic group is not particularly limited, but is preferably from 2 to 20, more preferably from 3 to 15.
  • the aromatic heterocyclic group may be monocyclic or polycyclic.
  • Examples of the aromatic heterocyclic group with Ra 0 include thienyl group, furanyl group, benzothienyl group, dibenzothienyl group, benzofuranyl group, pyrrole group, oxazolyl group, thiazolyl group, pyridyl group, isothiazolyl group, thiadiazolyl group, etc. Can be mentioned.
  • na represents an integer of 0 to 4, preferably an integer of 0 to 2, more preferably 0 or 1, and even more preferably 0.
  • ma represents an integer from 0 to 2, preferably represents 0 or 1, and more preferably represents 0.
  • the aromatic ring in general formula (S1) is benzene when ma represents 0, naphthalene when ma represents 1, and anthracene when ma represents 2.
  • repeating unit represented by general formula (S1) are shown below, but are not limited thereto.
  • Ra 7 to Ra 9 in general formula (S2) each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group.
  • the explanations, specific examples, and preferred ranges for Ra 7 to Ra 9 are the same as the explanations, specific examples, and preferred ranges for Ra 1 to Ra 3 in general formula (S1) described above.
  • La 2 in general formula (S2) represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the explanation, specific example, and preferred range for La 2 are the same as the explanation, specific example, and preferred range for La 1 in the general formula (S1) described above.
  • Ara in general formula (S2) represents an aromatic ring group.
  • the aromatic ring group of Ara is preferably an arylene group, more preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, even more preferably an arylene group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms, and a phenylene group or a naphthylene group. is particularly preferable, and most preferably a phenylene group.
  • Ra 10 to Ra 12 in general formula (S2) are each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aromatic heterocyclic group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkyloxy group, or , represents an alkenyl group.
  • the alkyl group of Ra 10 to Ra 12 may be either linear or branched.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 5, more preferably 1 to 3.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the cycloalkyl group of Ra 10 to Ra 12 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 3 to 20, more preferably 5 to 15.
  • Examples of the cycloalkyl group for Ra 10 to Ra 12 include monocyclic cycloalkyl groups such as a cyclopentyl group and a cyclohexyl group, and polycyclic groups such as a norbornyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, and an adamantyl group.
  • a cycloalkyl group is preferred.
  • the alkyl group contained in the alkoxy group of Ra 10 to Ra 12 may be either linear or branched.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group contained in the alkoxy group is not particularly limited, but is preferably from 1 to 5, more preferably from 1 to 3.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the cycloalkyl group contained in the cycloalkyloxy group of Ra 10 to Ra 12 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 3 to 20, more preferably 5 to 15.
  • the cycloalkyl group contained in the cycloalkyloxy group of Ra 10 to Ra 12 includes monocyclic cycloalkyl groups such as cyclopentyl group and cyclohexyl group, as well as norbornyl group, tetracyclodecanyl group, and tetracyclododecanyl group. , and polycyclic cycloalkyl groups such as adamantyl groups are preferred. It may be either linear or branched.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group contained in the alkoxy group is not particularly limited, but is preferably from 1 to 5, more preferably from 1 to 3.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aryl group of Ra 10 to Ra 12 is not particularly limited, but is preferably from 6 to 20, more preferably from 6 to 10.
  • the most preferred aryl group for Ra 10 to Ra 12 is a phenyl group.
  • the aralkyl group of Ra 10 to Ra 12 is preferably a group in which one hydrogen atom in the alkyl group of Ra 10 to Ra 12 described above is substituted with an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms (preferably a phenyl group), For example, a benzyl group and the like can be mentioned.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkenyl group of Ra 10 to Ra 12 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 2 to 5, more preferably 2 to 4.
  • a vinyl group is preferred.
  • the aromatic heterocyclic group of Ra 10 to Ra 12 preferably contains at least one heteroatom selected from the group consisting of a sulfur atom, a nitrogen atom, and an oxygen atom.
  • the number of heteroatoms contained in the aromatic heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 5, more preferably 1 to 3.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aromatic heterocyclic group is not particularly limited, but is preferably from 2 to 20, more preferably from 3 to 15.
  • the aromatic heterocyclic group may be monocyclic or polycyclic.
  • Examples of the aromatic heterocyclic group of Ra 10 to Ra 12 include thienyl group, furanyl group, benzothienyl group, dibenzothienyl group, benzofuranyl group, pyrrole group, oxazolyl group, thiazolyl group, pyridyl group, isothiazolyl group, thiadiazolyl group. Examples include groups.
  • Ra 10 to Ra 12 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • the group formed by bonding Ra 10 to Ra 12 to form a ring is preferably a cycloalkyl group.
  • the above-mentioned cycloalkyl group is a monocyclic cycloalkyl group such as a cyclopentyl group or a cyclohexyl group, or a polycyclic cycloalkyl group such as a norbornyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, or an adamantyl group.
  • An alkyl group is preferred, and a monocyclic cycloalkyl group having 5 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferred.
  • one of the methylene groups constituting the ring may be replaced with a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom, a group containing a hetero atom such as a carbonyl group, or a vinylidene group.
  • one or more of the ethylene groups constituting the cycloalkane ring may be replaced with a vinylene group.
  • Ra 10 to Ra 12 is an alkoxy group, and one of Ra 10 to Ra 12 is an alkoxy group, and the other two are a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, or an aryl group. It is more preferable that
  • -C(Ra 10 )(Ra 11 )(Ra 12 ) in general formula (S2) is preferably a leaving group, and -OC(Ra 10 )(Ra 11 )(Ra 12 ) is an acid It is preferable that -C(Ra 10 )(Ra 11 )(Ra 12 ) is eliminated by the action of , thereby producing a hydroxy group (this hydroxy group is a phenolic hydroxyl group because it is bonded to Ara).
  • repeating unit represented by general formula (S2) are shown below, but are not limited thereto.
  • the content of repeating units selected from the group consisting of repeating units represented by general formula (S1) and repeating units represented by general formula (S2) is 5% relative to all repeating units in resin (A). It is preferably mol% or more, more preferably 10 mol% or more, and even more preferably 15 mol% or more.
  • the content of the repeating unit selected from the group consisting of the repeating unit represented by the general formula (S1) and the repeating unit represented by the general formula (S2) is based on the total repeating units in the resin (A). , is preferably 70 mol% or less, more preferably 60 mol% or less, and even more preferably 50 mol% or less.
  • the number of repeating units selected from the group consisting of the repeating unit represented by the general formula (S1) and the repeating unit represented by the general formula (S2) contained in the resin (A) may be one type or two or more types. . When two or more types are included, the total content is preferably within the above-mentioned preferred content range.
  • the repeating unit having a polar group contained in the resin (A) will be explained.
  • the repeating unit having a polar group may be a repeating unit different from the repeating unit selected from the group consisting of the repeating unit represented by the general formula (S1) and the repeating unit represented by the general formula (S2) described above. preferable.
  • Examples of the polar group of the repeating unit having a polar group include a hydroxyl group, a lactone group, a sultone group, a lactam group, an imide group, an amide group, a sulfonamide group, a carbonate group, a urethane group, a urea group, a nitrile group, a sulfoxide group, Examples include sulfonyl groups.
  • the polar group may be an acid group.
  • the polar group is preferably a hydroxyl group or a lactone group, more preferably an aromatic hydroxyl group, and even more preferably a phenolic hydroxyl group.
  • the repeating unit containing a polar group is preferably a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (S3).
  • the repeating unit having a polar group is preferably a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (S3).
  • R 101 , R 102 and R 103 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group.
  • R 102 may combine with Ar A to form a ring, in which case R 102 represents a single bond or an alkylene group.
  • L A represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • Ar A represents an aromatic ring group.
  • k represents an integer from 1 to 5.
  • R 101 , R 102 and R 103 in general formula (S3) each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group.
  • the explanation, specific examples and preferred ranges of R 101 , R 102 and R 103 are the same as the explanation, specific examples and preferred ranges of Ra 1 to Ra 3 in general formula (S1) described above.
  • Ar A in general formula (S3) represents an aromatic ring group, more specifically represents a (k+1)-valent aromatic ring group.
  • the divalent aromatic ring group when k is 1 is, for example, an arylene group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms such as a phenylene group, tolylene group, naphthylene group, anthracenylene group, or a thiophene ring, a furan ring, a pyrrole ring,
  • a divalent aromatic ring group containing a hetero ring such as a benzothiophene ring, a benzofuran ring, a benzopyrrole ring, a triazine ring, an imidazole ring, a benzimidazole ring, a triazole ring, a thiadiazole ring, and a thiazole ring is preferred.
  • the above aromatic ring group may have a substituent.
  • Specific examples of (k+1)-valent aromatic ring groups when k is an integer of 2 or more include (k-1) arbitrary hydrogen atoms removed from the above-mentioned specific examples of divalent aromatic ring groups. The following groups are mentioned.
  • the (k+1)-valent aromatic ring group may further have a substituent.
  • Substituents that the (k+1)-valent aromatic ring group may have are not particularly limited, but include, for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, n-butyl group, sec-butyl group, hexyl group, - Alkyl groups such as ethylhexyl, octyl and dodecyl; alkoxy groups such as methoxy, ethoxy, hydroxyethoxy, propoxy, hydroxypropoxy and butoxy; aryl groups such as phenyl; and the like.
  • Ar A preferably represents an aromatic ring group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, and more preferably represents a benzene ring group, a naphthalene ring group, or a biphenylene ring group.
  • LA in general formula (S3) represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group represented by L A is not particularly limited, but includes, for example, -COO-, -CONR 64 -, an alkylene group, or a group formed by combining two or more of these groups.
  • R 64 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
  • the alkylene group is not particularly limited, but alkylene groups having 1 to 8 carbon atoms such as methylene group, ethylene group, propylene group, butylene group, hexylene group, and octylene group are preferable.
  • R 64 represents an alkyl group
  • examples of the alkyl group include methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, n-butyl group, sec-butyl group, hexyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, octyl group, and dodecyl group.
  • Examples include alkyl groups having 20 or less carbon atoms, such as groups, and alkyl groups having 8 or less carbon atoms are preferred.
  • the repeating unit represented by general formula (S3) preferably has a hydroxystyrene structure. That is, it is preferable that Ar A represents a benzene ring group. k preferably represents an integer of 1 to 3, more preferably 1 or 2.
  • repeating unit represented by general formula (S3) are shown below, but are not limited thereto.
  • the content of the repeating unit having a polar group in the resin (A) is not particularly limited, but is preferably 20 mol% or more, and 30 mol% or more based on the total repeating units in the resin (A). More preferably, it is 40 mol% or more. Further, the content of the repeating unit having a polar group is preferably 90 mol% or less, more preferably 85 mol% or less, and 80 mol% or less based on the total repeating units in the resin (A). It is more preferable that
  • the number of repeating units having polar groups contained in the resin (A) may be one or two or more. When two or more types are included, the total content is preferably within the above-mentioned preferred content range.
  • the resin (A) may have a repeating unit (hereinafter also referred to as "unit Y") having at least one type selected from the group consisting of a lactone group, a sultone group, and a carbonate group. It is also preferable that the unit Y does not have an acid group such as a hydroxyl group or a hexafluoropropanol group.
  • the lactone group or sultone group may have a lactone structure or a sultone structure.
  • the lactone structure or sultone structure is preferably a 5- to 7-membered ring lactone structure or a 5- to 7-membered ring sultone structure.
  • 5- to 7-membered ring lactone structures are fused with other ring structures to form a bicyclo or spiro structure, or 5- to 7-membered sultone structures to form a bicyclo or spiro structure. More preferred is a structure in which another ring structure is condensed.
  • the descriptions in [0120] to [0134] of International Publication No. 2022/024928 can be incorporated as a reference.
  • the resin (A) contains at least one repeating unit selected from the group consisting of a repeating unit represented by general formula (S1) and a repeating unit represented by general formula (S2), and a repeating unit having a polar group. However, in addition to these, other repeating units may also be included.
  • the resin (A) may contain, as other repeating units, repeating units having acid-decomposable groups other than those mentioned above.
  • the acid-decomposable group is preferably a group that is decomposed by the action of an acid to produce a polar group.
  • the above polar group is preferably an alkali-soluble group, such as a carboxy group, phenolic hydroxyl group, fluorinated alcohol group, sulfonic acid group, phosphoric acid group, sulfonamide group, sulfonylimide group, (alkylsulfonyl) (alkylcarbonyl) Methylene group, (alkylsulfonyl)(alkylcarbonyl)imide group, bis(alkylcarbonyl)methylene group, bis(alkylcarbonyl)imide group, bis(alkylsulfonyl)methylene group, bis(alkylsulfonyl)imide group, tris(alkylcarbonyl) ) methylene group, acidic groups such as tris(alkylsulfonyl)methylene groups, and alcoholic hydroxyl groups.
  • alkali-soluble group such as a carboxy group, phenolic hydroxyl group, fluorinated alcohol group,
  • Examples of the leaving group that leaves by the action of an acid include groups represented by formulas (Y1) to (Y4).
  • Formula (Y1) -C(Rx 1 )(Rx 2 )(Rx 3 )
  • Formula (Y3) -C(R 36 )(R 37 )(OR 38 )
  • Rx 1 to Rx 3 each independently represent an alkyl group (linear or branched chain), a cycloalkyl group (monocyclic or polycyclic), an aryl group (monocyclic or polycyclic), an aralkyl group (linear or branched), or an alkenyl group (linear or branched). Note that when all of Rx 1 to Rx 3 are alkyl groups (linear or branched), it is preferable that at least two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 are methyl groups.
  • Rx 1 to Rx 3 each independently represent a linear or branched alkyl group, and Rx 1 to Rx 3 each independently represent a linear alkyl group. is more preferable.
  • Two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 may be bonded to each other to form a ring (which may be monocyclic or polycyclic).
  • the alkyl group for Rx 1 to Rx 3 an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms such as a methyl group, ethyl group, n-propyl group, isopropyl group, n-butyl group, isobutyl group, and t-butyl group is preferable. .
  • Examples of the cycloalkyl group for Rx 1 to Rx 3 include monocyclic cycloalkyl groups such as cyclopentyl group and cyclohexyl group, and polycyclic groups such as norbornyl group, tetracyclodecanyl group, tetracyclododecanyl group, and adamantyl group.
  • a cycloalkyl group is preferred.
  • the aryl group for Rx 1 to Rx 3 is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms, such as a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, an anthryl group, and the like.
  • the aralkyl group of Rx 1 to Rx 3 is preferably a group in which one hydrogen atom in the alkyl group of Rx 1 to Rx 3 described above is substituted with an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms (preferably a phenyl group), For example, a benzyl group and the like can be mentioned.
  • a benzyl group and the like can be mentioned.
  • the alkenyl group for Rx 1 to Rx 3 a vinyl group is preferred.
  • the ring formed by bonding two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 is preferably a cycloalkyl group.
  • the cycloalkyl group formed by combining two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 is a cyclopentyl group or a monocyclic cycloalkyl group such as a cyclohexyl group, or a norbornyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, or a tetracyclododecanyl group. or a polycyclic cycloalkyl group such as an adamantyl group, and a monocyclic cycloalkyl group having 5 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferable.
  • the cycloalkyl group formed by bonding two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 is, for example, a group in which one of the methylene groups constituting the ring has a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom, a hetero atom such as a carbonyl group, or a group in which one of the methylene groups constituting the ring has a hetero atom such as a carbonyl group, or May be substituted with a group. Further, in these cycloalkyl groups, one or more of the ethylene groups constituting the cycloalkane ring may be replaced with a vinylene group.
  • the group represented by formula (Y1) or formula (Y2) is, for example, an embodiment in which Rx 1 is a methyl group or an ethyl group, and Rx 2 and Rx 3 are bonded to form the above-mentioned cycloalkyl group. is preferred.
  • R 36 to R 38 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group.
  • R 37 and R 38 may be combined with each other to form a ring.
  • monovalent organic groups include alkyl groups, cycloalkyl groups, aryl groups, aralkyl groups, and alkenyl groups. It is also preferable that R 36 is a hydrogen atom.
  • the alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, and aralkyl group may include a group having a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom and/or a hetero atom such as a carbonyl group.
  • one or more methylene groups are replaced with a group having a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom and/or a hetero atom such as a carbonyl group.
  • R 38 may be bonded to another substituent in the main chain of the repeating unit to form a ring.
  • the group formed by bonding R 38 and another substituent of the main chain of the repeating unit to each other is preferably an alkylene group such as a methylene group.
  • Ar represents an aromatic ring group.
  • Rn represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, or an aryl group.
  • Rn and Ar may be bonded to each other to form a non-aromatic ring.
  • Ar is more preferably an aryl group.
  • the resin (A) contains a repeating unit (hereinafter also referred to as unit may have.
  • the ⁇ repeat unit having neither an acid-decomposable group nor an acid group but a fluorine atom, a bromine atom, or an iodine atom> referred to herein means the ⁇ repeat unit having a lactone group, sultone group, or carbonate group> described below.
  • ⁇ repeating unit having a photoacid generating group> means the ⁇ repeat unit having a lactone group, sultone group, or carbonate group> described below.
  • a repeating unit represented by formula (C) is preferable.
  • L 5 represents a single bond or an ester group.
  • R 9 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom.
  • R10 may have a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, a cycloalkyl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, a fluorine atom or an iodine atom. Represents an aryl group or a group combining these.
  • repeating units having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom are shown below.
  • the content of unit X is preferably 0 mol% or more, more preferably 5 mol% or more, and even more preferably 10 mol% or more, based on all repeating units in the resin (A). Moreover, the upper limit thereof is preferably 50 mol% or less, more preferably 45 mol% or less, and even more preferably 40 mol% or less, based on all repeating units in the resin (A).
  • the total content of repeating units containing at least one of a fluorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom is preferably 10 mol% or more based on all repeating units of the resin (A). , more preferably 20 mol% or more, still more preferably 30 mol% or more, particularly preferably 40 mol% or more.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is, for example, 100 mol% or less based on all repeating units of the resin (A).
  • the repeating unit containing at least one of a fluorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom includes, for example, a repeating unit having a fluorine atom, a bromine atom, or an iodine atom and an acid-decomposable group, a fluorine atom, a bromine atom, and a repeating unit having an acid-decomposable group.
  • Examples include repeating units having an atom or an iodine atom and an acid group, and repeating units having a fluorine atom, a bromine atom, or an iodine atom.
  • the resin (A) is a repeating unit having a group that generates an acid upon irradiation with actinic rays or radiation (preferably an electron beam or extreme ultraviolet rays) (hereinafter also referred to as a "photoacid generating group") as a repeating unit other than the above. It may have.
  • the repeating unit having a photoacid generating group include a repeating unit represented by formula (4).
  • R 41 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • L 41 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • L 42 represents a divalent linking group.
  • R 40 represents a structural moiety that decomposes upon irradiation with actinic rays or radiation to generate an acid in the side chain. Examples of repeating units having a photoacid generating group are shown below, but the invention is not limited thereto.
  • examples of the repeating unit represented by formula (4) include repeating units described in paragraphs [0094] to [0105] of JP2014-041327A and paragraphs of International Publication No. 2018/193954. Examples include the repeating units described in [0094].
  • the content of the repeating unit having a photoacid generating group is preferably 1 mol% or more with respect to all repeating units in the resin (A), More preferably 5 mol% or more. Further, the upper limit thereof is preferably 40 mol% or less, more preferably 35 mol% or less, and even more preferably 30 mol% or less, based on all repeating units in the resin (A).
  • the resin (A) may have a repeating unit represented by the following formula (V-1) or the following formula (V-2).
  • the repeating units represented by the following formulas (V-1) and (V-2) are preferably repeating units different from the above-mentioned repeating units.
  • R 6 and R 7 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an amino group, a halogen atom, an ester group (-OCOR or -COOR: R is the number of carbon atoms 1 to 6 alkyl groups or fluorinated alkyl groups), or carboxyl groups.
  • the alkyl group is preferably a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • n 3 represents an integer from 0 to 6.
  • n 4 represents an integer from 0 to 4.
  • X 4 is a methylene group, an oxygen atom, or a sulfur atom.
  • the repeating units represented by formula (V-1) or (V-2) are illustrated below. Examples of the repeating unit represented by formula (V-1) or (V-2) include the repeating unit described in paragraph [0100] of International Publication No. 2018/193954.
  • the resin (A) preferably has a high glass transition temperature (Tg) from the viewpoint of suppressing excessive diffusion of generated acid or pattern collapse during development.
  • Tg is preferably greater than 90°C, more preferably greater than 100°C, even more preferably greater than 110°C, and particularly preferably greater than 125°C.
  • Tg is preferably 400°C or less, more preferably 350°C or less.
  • Tg of a repeating unit the glass transition temperature (Tg) of a polymer such as resin (A) (hereinafter referred to as "Tg of a repeating unit" is calculated by the following method.
  • the Tg of a homopolymer consisting only of each repeating unit contained in the polymer is calculated by the Bicerano method.
  • the mass ratio (%) of each repeating unit to all repeating units in the polymer is calculated.
  • the Tg at each mass ratio is calculated using Fox's formula (described in Materials Letters 62 (2008) 3152, etc.), and these are summed to determine the Tg (° C.) of the polymer.
  • the Bicerano method is described in Prediction of polymer properties, Marcel Dekker Inc, New York (1993). Calculation of Tg by the Bicerano method can be performed using polymer physical property estimation software MDL Polymer (MDL Information Systems, Inc.).
  • the resin (A) In order to increase the Tg of the resin (A) (preferably to make the Tg higher than 90° C.), it is preferable to reduce the mobility of the main chain of the resin (A).
  • methods for reducing the mobility of the main chain of resin (A) include the following methods (a) to (e). (a) Introduction of a bulky substituent to the main chain (b) Introduction of multiple substituents to the main chain (c) Introduction of a substituent that induces interaction between the resins (A) near the main chain ( d) Main chain formation with a cyclic structure (e) Connection of the cyclic structure to the main chain It is preferable that the resin (A) has a repeating unit whose homopolymer Tg is 130° C. or higher.
  • the type of repeating unit whose homopolymer Tg is 130°C or higher is not particularly limited, and any repeating unit whose homopolymer Tg calculated by the Bicerano method is 130°C or higher may be used. Note that, depending on the type of functional group in the repeating units represented by formulas (A) to (E) described below, the repeating units correspond to homopolymer Tg of 130° C. or higher.
  • An example of a specific means for achieving the above (a) is a method of introducing a repeating unit represented by the formula (A) into the resin (A).
  • R A represents a group containing a polycyclic structure.
  • R x represents a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, or an ethyl group.
  • a group containing a polycyclic structure is a group containing a plurality of ring structures, and the plurality of ring structures may or may not be condensed.
  • Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by formula (A) include those described in paragraphs [0107] to [0119] of International Publication No. 2018/193954.
  • An example of a specific means for achieving the above (b) is a method of introducing a repeating unit represented by the formula (B) into the resin (A).
  • R b1 to R b4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an organic group, and at least two or more of R b1 to R b4 represent an organic group.
  • the types of other organic groups are not particularly limited.
  • at least two or more of the organic groups have three or more constituent atoms excluding hydrogen atoms. It is a substituent.
  • Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by formula (B) include those described in paragraphs [0113] to [0115] of International Publication No. 2018/193954.
  • An example of a specific means for achieving the above (c) is a method of introducing a repeating unit represented by the formula (C) into the resin (A).
  • R c1 to R c4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an organic group, and at least one of R c1 to R c4 has a hydrogen bonding property within 3 atoms from the main chain carbon.
  • a group containing an atom in order to induce interaction between the main chains of the resin (A), it is preferable to have hydrogen atoms capable of hydrogen bonding within 2 atoms (closer to the main chain).
  • Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by formula (C) include those described in paragraphs [0119] to [0121] of International Publication No. 2018/193954.
  • An example of a specific means for achieving the above (d) is a method of introducing a repeating unit represented by the formula (D) into the resin (A).
  • Cyclic represents a group forming a main chain with a cyclic structure.
  • the number of atoms constituting the ring is not particularly limited.
  • Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by formula (D) include those described in paragraphs [0126] to [0127] of International Publication No. 2018/193954.
  • An example of a specific means for achieving the above (e) is a method of introducing a repeating unit represented by the formula (E) into the resin (A).
  • Re each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group.
  • the organic group include an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, and an alkenyl group, which may have a substituent.
  • Cyclic is a cyclic group containing backbone carbon atoms. The number of atoms contained in the cyclic group is not particularly limited. Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by formula (E) include those described in paragraphs [0131] to [0133] of International Publication No. 2018/193954.
  • the resin (A) may have a repeating unit having at least one type of group selected from a lactone group, a sultone group, a carbonate group, a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, and an alkali-soluble group.
  • Examples of the repeating unit having a lactone group, sultone group, or carbonate group that the resin (A) has include the repeating units described in ⁇ Repeating unit having a lactone group, sultone group, or carbonate group> described above.
  • the preferable content is also as explained above in ⁇ Repeating unit having lactone group, sultone group, or carbonate group>.
  • the resin (A) may have a repeating unit having a hydroxyl group or a cyano group. This improves substrate adhesion and developer affinity.
  • the repeating unit having a hydroxyl group or a cyano group is preferably a repeating unit having an alicyclic hydrocarbon structure substituted with a hydroxyl group or a cyano group.
  • the repeating unit having a hydroxyl group or a cyano group preferably does not have an acid-decomposable group. Examples of the repeating unit having a hydroxyl group or a cyano group include those described in paragraphs [0081] to [0084] of JP-A No. 2014-098921.
  • the resin (A) may have a repeating unit having an alkali-soluble group.
  • the alkali-soluble group include a carboxyl group, a sulfonamide group, a sulfonylimide group, a bissulfonylimide group, and an aliphatic alcohol group substituted with an electron-withdrawing group at the ⁇ position (for example, a hexafluoroisopropanol group). , carboxyl group is preferred.
  • the resin (A) contains a repeating unit having an alkali-soluble group, resolution in contact hole applications increases. Examples of the repeating unit having an alkali-soluble group include those described in paragraphs [0085] and [0086] of JP-A-2014-098921.
  • the resin (A) has an alicyclic hydrocarbon structure and may have repeating units that are not acid-decomposable. This can reduce the elution of low molecular weight components from the resist film into the immersion liquid during immersion exposure.
  • repeating units having an alicyclic hydrocarbon structure and not showing acid decomposability include 1-adamantyl (meth)acrylate, diamantyl (meth)acrylate, tricyclodecanyl (meth)acrylate, or cyclohexyl (meth)acrylate. Examples include repeating units derived from acrylates.
  • the resin (A) may have a repeating unit represented by formula (III) that does not have either a hydroxyl group or a cyano group.
  • R 5 represents a hydrocarbon group having at least one cyclic structure and having neither a hydroxyl group nor a cyano group.
  • Ra represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or two groups of -CH 2 -O-Ra.
  • Ra 2 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an acyl group. Examples of the repeating unit represented by formula (III) having neither a hydroxyl group nor a cyano group include those described in paragraphs [0087] to [0094] of JP-A No. 2014-098921.
  • the resin (A) may have repeating units other than the above-mentioned repeating units.
  • the resin (A) has a repeating unit selected from the group consisting of a repeating unit having an oxathian ring group, a repeating unit having an oxazolone ring group, a repeating unit having a dioxane ring group, and a repeating unit having a hydantoin ring group. You may do so. Specific examples of repeating units other than the above-mentioned repeating units are illustrated below.
  • the resin (A) contains various repeating structural units for the purpose of adjusting dry etching resistance, standard developer suitability, substrate adhesion, resist profile, resolution, heat resistance, sensitivity, etc. It may have.
  • all of the repeating units are derived from a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond. It is preferable to be composed of repeating units. In particular, it is also preferable that all of the repeating units are composed of (meth)acrylate repeating units. When all of the repeating units are composed of (meth)acrylate repeating units, all of the repeating units are methacrylate repeating units, all of the repeating units are acrylate repeating units, and all of the repeating units are methacrylate. Either a type repeating unit or an acrylate type repeating unit can be used, and it is preferable that the acrylate type repeating unit accounts for 50 mol% or less of the total repeating units.
  • Resin (A) can be synthesized according to conventional methods (eg, radical polymerization).
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin (A) is preferably 30,000 or less, more preferably 1,000 to 30,000, even more preferably 3,000 to 30,000, as a polystyrene equivalent value determined by GPC method. Particularly preferred is 5,000 to 15,000.
  • the degree of dispersion (molecular weight distribution, Pd, Mw/Mn) of the resin (A) is preferably 1 to 5, more preferably 1 to 3, even more preferably 1.2 to 3.0, and 1.2 to 2.0. is particularly preferred. The smaller the degree of dispersion, the better the resolution and resist shape, the smoother the sidewalls of the resist pattern, and the better the roughness.
  • the content of the resin (A) is preferably 40.0 to 99.9% by mass, and 60.0 to 90.0% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition of the present invention. is more preferable.
  • the resin (A) may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total content is within the above-mentioned preferred content range.
  • Salt (B) is a compound represented by the following general formula (T1).
  • the salt (B) may be a compound (photoacid generator) that generates an acid upon irradiation with actinic rays or radiation, or may not be a photoacid generator, but upon irradiation with actinic rays or radiation, A compound that generates an acid with a pKa of -1 to 9 is preferable.
  • Salt (B) can function as an acid diffusion control agent in the case of a salt of an acid that is a relatively weak acid with respect to the acid generated from a photoacid generator (for example, salt (C) described below). .
  • the acid diffusion control agent traps the acid generated from the photoacid generator (for example, salt (C) described below) etc. during exposure, and prevents the reaction of the acid-decomposable resin in the unexposed area due to the excess generated acid. Acts as a quencher.
  • the photoacid generator for example, salt (C) described below
  • Arb represents an aromatic ring.
  • the above aromatic ring may have a substituent.
  • Q represents an acid residue.
  • the anion in general formula (T1) is a conjugate base of an acid with a pKa of -1 to 9.
  • Rb 1 represents -OH, -ORb 2 , -NRb 3 Rb 4 , -SH, or -SRb 5 , and multiple Rb 1 's may be the same or different.
  • Rb 2 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or an acyl group.
  • Rb 3 and Rb 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or an acyl group.
  • Rb 5 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or an acyl group. At least two of Rb 2 to Rb 5 may be bonded to each other to form a ring. When Arb has a substituent, the above substituent and at least one of Rb 2 to Rb 5 may be bonded to form a ring.
  • Lb 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Lb 1 may be combined with Rb 1 to form a ring by substituting a hydrogen atom contained in Rb 1 . Lb 1 may be bonded to at least one of Rb 2 to Rb 5 to form a ring. When Arb has a substituent, the substituent and Lb 1 may be combined to form a ring.
  • p represents an integer from 2 to 5.
  • G m+ represents an m-valent organic cation. m represents an integer of 1 or more.
  • the molecular weight of the compound represented by general formula (T1) is preferably 3000 or less, more preferably 2000 or less, and even more preferably 1000 or less.
  • the lower limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 100 or more.
  • Arb in general formula (T1) represents an aromatic ring.
  • the number of carbon atoms as ring members contained in the aromatic ring is preferably 4 to 20, more preferably 5 to 15, and even more preferably 6 to 10.
  • the aromatic ring may be an aromatic hydrocarbon ring or an aromatic heterocycle, but is preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon ring. Examples of the aromatic hydrocarbon ring include a benzene ring, a naphthalene ring, an anthracene ring, etc., with a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring being preferred, and a benzene ring being more preferred.
  • the aromatic heterocycle is preferably an aromatic heterocycle containing at least one heteroatom selected from the group consisting of a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom, and an oxygen atom.
  • Lb 1 and Rb 1 are bonded to the aromatic ring represented by Arb
  • the aromatic ring represented by Arb may further have a substituent in addition to these.
  • substituents include organic groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, such as alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, alkynyl groups, cycloalkyl groups, and aryl groups.
  • Rb 1 in general formula (T1) represents -OH, -ORb 2 , -NRb 3 Rb 4 , -SH, or -SRb 5 .
  • Rb 2 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or an acyl group.
  • Rb 3 and Rb 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or an acyl group.
  • Rb 5 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or an acyl group.
  • the alkyl group represented by Rb 2 to Rb 5 may be either linear or branched.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is not particularly limited, but is preferably from 1 to 10, more preferably from 1 to 5.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aryl group represented by Rb 2 to Rb 5 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 10.
  • a phenyl group or a naphthyl group is preferable, and a phenyl group is more preferable.
  • the alkyl group that may be contained in the acyl group represented by Rb 2 to Rb 5 may be either linear or branched.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group that may be contained in the acyl group is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aryl group that can be contained in the acyl group represented by Rb 2 to Rb 5 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 10.
  • the aryl group that may be included in the acyl group is preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group, and more preferably a phenyl group.
  • Rb 1 is preferably -OH, -NH 2 or -SH. It is particularly preferred that at least one of Rb 1 is -OH.
  • Lb 1 in general formula (T1) represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group is preferably an organic linking group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an ether group, a thioether group, a carbonyl group, or a combination thereof, such as an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, an alkenylene group, an alkynylene group, or an arylene group. etc.
  • p in general formula (T1) represents an integer of 2 to 5, preferably represents an integer of 2 to 4, and more preferably represents 2 or 3.
  • Q in general formula (T1) represents an acid residue.
  • the acid residue is represented by a carboxylate anion group (-COO - ), a sulfonate anion group (-SO 3 - ), or a sulfonamide group (-N - -SO 2 R N1 .
  • R N1 is an organic group represents an alkyl group, a fluoroalkyl group, and an aryl group are preferable, and a carboxylate anion group is more preferable.
  • the anion in general formula (T1) (the anion represented by general formula (T1A) below) is a conjugate base of an acid with a pKa of -1 to 9, and a conjugate base of an acid with a pKa of 0 to 7.
  • the pKa of the conjugate acid of the anion represented by the general formula (T1A) is -1 to 9, preferably 0 to 7, and more preferably 1 to 6.
  • Arb, Q, Rb 1 , Lb 1 and p represent the same meanings as Arb, Q, Rb 1 , Lb 1 and p in general formula (T1), respectively.
  • anion in general formula (T1) anion represented by general formula (T1A)
  • T1A anion represented by general formula (T1A)
  • G m+ in general formula (T1) represents an m-valent organic cation.
  • m represents an integer of 1 or more, preferably an integer of 1 to 3, more preferably 1 or 2, even more preferably 1.
  • the organic cation of G m+ is not particularly limited.
  • a sulfonium cation, an iodonium cation, or an ammonium cation is preferable.
  • Examples of the organic cation include a cation represented by formula (ZaI) (hereinafter also referred to as "cation (ZaI)"), or a cation represented by formula (ZaII) (hereinafter also referred to as "cation (ZaII)"). is more preferable.
  • R 201 , R 202 , and R 203 each independently represent an organic group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the organic group as R 201 , R 202 , and R 203 is preferably 1 to 30, more preferably 1 to 20.
  • Two of R 201 to R 203 may be combined to form a ring structure, and the ring may contain an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an ester group, an amide group, or a carbonyl group.
  • Examples of the group formed by combining two of R 201 to R 203 include an alkylene group (for example, a butylene group and a pentylene group), and -CH 2 -CH 2 -O-CH 2 -CH 2 -. Can be mentioned.
  • Preferred embodiments of the organic cation in formula (ZaI) include cation (ZaI-1), cation (ZaI-2), cation (ZaI-3b), and cation (ZaI-4b), which will be described later.
  • the cation (ZaI-1) is an arylsulfonium cation in which at least one of R 201 to R 203 in the above formula (ZaI) is an aryl group.
  • the arylsulfonium cation all of R 201 to R 203 may be an aryl group, or some of R 201 to R 203 may be an aryl group, and the remainder may be an alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group.
  • R 201 to R 203 is an aryl group, and the remaining two of R 201 to R 203 may be combined to form a ring structure, and an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or an ester group may be present in the ring. , an amide group, or a carbonyl group.
  • the group formed by combining two of R 201 to R 203 includes, for example, one or more methylene groups substituted with an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an ester group, an amide group, and/or a carbonyl group. and alkylene groups such as butylene, pentylene, and -CH 2 -CH 2 -O-CH 2 -CH 2 -.
  • Arylsulfonium cations include triarylsulfonium cations, diarylalkylsulfonium cations, aryldialkylsulfonium cations, diarylcycloalkylsulfonium cations, and aryldicycloalkylsulfonium cations.
  • the aryl group contained in the arylsulfonium cation is preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group, and more preferably a phenyl group.
  • the aryl group may be an aryl group having a heterocyclic structure having an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom, or the like. Examples of the heterocyclic structure include a pyrrole residue, a furan residue, a thiophene residue, an indole residue, a benzofuran residue, and a benzothiophene residue.
  • the arylsulfonium cation has two or more aryl groups, the two or more aryl groups may be the same or different.
  • the alkyl group or cycloalkyl group that the arylsulfonium cation has as necessary is a linear alkyl group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms, a branched alkyl group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms, or a branched alkyl group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms.
  • a cycloalkyl group is preferred, and a methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, n-butyl group, sec-butyl group, t-butyl group, cyclopropyl group, cyclobutyl group, or cyclohexyl group is more preferred.
  • substituents that the aryl group, alkyl group, and cycloalkyl group of R 201 to R 203 may have include an alkyl group (for example, having 1 to 15 carbon atoms) and a cycloalkyl group (for example, having 3 to 15 carbon atoms).
  • aryl group for example, 6 to 14 carbon atoms
  • alkoxy group for example, 1 to 15 carbon atoms
  • cycloalkylalkoxy group for example, 1 to 15 carbon atoms
  • halogen atom for example, fluorine and iodine
  • a hydroxyl group for example, a carboxyl group, an ester group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an alkylthio group, or a phenylthio group.
  • the above-mentioned substituent may further have a substituent if possible, and it is also preferable that the above-mentioned alkyl group has a halogen atom as a substituent to become a halogenated alkyl group such as a trifluoromethyl group. It is also preferable that the above substituents form an acid-decomposable group by any combination.
  • the acid-decomposable group is intended to be a group that is decomposed by the action of an acid to produce a polar group, and preferably has a structure in which the polar group is protected with a group that is eliminated by the action of an acid.
  • the cation (ZaI-2) is a cation in which R 201 to R 203 in the formula (ZaI) each independently represent an organic group having no aromatic ring.
  • the aromatic ring also includes an aromatic ring containing a heteroatom.
  • the carbon number of the organic group having no aromatic ring as R 201 to R 203 is preferably 1 to 30, more preferably 1 to 20.
  • R 201 to R 203 are each independently preferably an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an allyl group, or a vinyl group, and a linear or branched 2-oxoalkyl group, a 2-oxocycloalkyl group, or An alkoxycarbonylmethyl group is more preferred, and a linear or branched 2-oxoalkyl group is even more preferred.
  • the alkyl group and cycloalkyl group of R 201 to R 203 are, for example, a linear alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms or a branched alkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms (for example, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group). , butyl group, and pentyl group), and cycloalkyl groups having 3 to 10 carbon atoms (eg, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, and norbornyl group).
  • R 201 to R 203 may be further substituted with a halogen atom, an alkoxy group (eg, having 1 to 5 carbon atoms), a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, or a nitro group. It is also preferable that the substituents R 201 to R 203 each independently form an acid-decomposable group by any combination of substituents.
  • the cation (ZaI-3b) is a cation represented by the following formula (ZaI-3b).
  • R 1c to R 5c each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an alkylcarbonyloxy group, a cycloalkyl group.
  • R 6c and R 7c each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (eg, t-butyl group, etc.), a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an aryl group.
  • R x and R y each independently represent an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a 2-oxoalkyl group, a 2-oxocycloalkyl group, an alkoxycarbonylalkyl group, an allyl group, or a vinyl group. It is also preferable that the substituents of R 1c to R 7c and R x and R y each independently form an acid-decomposable group by any combination of substituents.
  • R 1c to R 5c , R 5c and R 6c , R 6c and R 7c , R 5c and R x , and R x and R y may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • the rings may each independently contain an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a ketone group, an ester bond, or an amide bond.
  • the above-mentioned ring include an aromatic or non-aromatic hydrocarbon ring, an aromatic or non-aromatic heterocycle, and a polycyclic condensed ring formed by combining two or more of these rings.
  • the ring include a 3- to 10-membered ring, preferably a 4- to 8-membered ring, and more preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring.
  • Examples of the group formed by combining any two or more of R 1c to R 5c , R 6c and R 7c , and R x and R y include alkylene groups such as a butylene group and a pentylene group.
  • the methylene group in this alkylene group may be substituted with a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom.
  • the group formed by bonding R 5c and R 6c and R 5c and R x is preferably a single bond or an alkylene group.
  • Alkylene groups include methylene and ethylene groups.
  • R 1c to R 5c , R 6c , R 7c , R x , R y , and any two or more of R 1c to R 5c , R 5c and R 6c , R 6c and R 7c , R 5c and R x , and the ring formed by bonding R x and R y to each other may have a substituent.
  • the cation (ZaI-4b) is a cation represented by the following formula (ZaI-4b).
  • R13 is a group containing a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (e.g., a fluorine atom, an iodine atom, etc.), a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group, a halogenated alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a carboxyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, or a cycloalkyl group (cycloalkyl It may be a group itself or a group partially containing a cycloalkyl group). These groups may have substituents.
  • a halogen atom e.g., a fluorine atom, an iodine atom, etc.
  • R14 is a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom (e.g., a fluorine atom and an iodine atom), an alkyl group, a halogenated alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an alkylcarbonyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group, a cycloalkylsulfonyl group, or a cycloalkyl group.
  • each R 14 independently represents the above group such as a hydroxyl group.
  • R 15 each independently represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, or a naphthyl group.
  • Two R 15s may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • the ring skeleton may contain a heteroatom such as an oxygen atom or a nitrogen atom.
  • two R 15s are alkylene groups and are preferably bonded to each other to form a ring structure.
  • the ring formed by bonding the alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, naphthyl group, and two R 15s to each other may have a substituent.
  • the alkyl groups of R 13 , R 14 and R 15 may be linear or branched.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 10.
  • the alkyl group is preferably a methyl group, ethyl group, n-butyl group, or t-butyl group. It is also preferable that each substituent of R 13 to R 15 and R x and R y each independently form an acid-decomposable group by any combination of substituents.
  • R 204 and R 205 each independently represent an aryl group, an alkyl group, or a cycloalkyl group.
  • the aryl group for R 204 and R 205 is preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group, and more preferably a phenyl group.
  • the aryl group of R 204 and R 205 may be an aryl group having a heterocycle having an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom, or the like.
  • Examples of the skeleton of the aryl group having a heterocycle include pyrrole, furan, thiophene, indole, benzofuran, and benzothiophene.
  • the alkyl group and cycloalkyl group of R 204 and R 205 include a linear alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms or a branched alkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms (for example, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, butyl group, pentyl group), or a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms (eg, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, or norbornyl group).
  • the aryl group, alkyl group, and cycloalkyl group of R 204 and R 205 may each independently have a substituent.
  • substituents that the aryl group, alkyl group, and cycloalkyl group of R 204 and R 205 may have include an alkyl group (e.g., carbon number 1 to 15), a cycloalkyl group (e.g., carbon number 3 to 15), an aryl group (eg, carbon number 6 to 15), an alkoxy group (eg, carbon number 1 to 15), a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, and a phenylthio group.
  • the substituents of R 204 and R 205 each independently form an acid-decomposable group using any combination of substituents.
  • the content of the salt (B) is preferably 0.1% by mass or more, more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and even more preferably 1.0% by mass or more, based on the total solid content of the composition of the present invention. .
  • the content of the salt (B) is preferably 30.0% by mass or less, more preferably 20.0% by mass or less, and even more preferably 15.0% by mass or less, based on the total solid content of the composition of the present invention.
  • Salt (B) may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total content is within the above-mentioned preferred content range.
  • the composition of the present invention may contain a compound (impurity) produced by oxidizing the salt (B).
  • a compound (impurity) produced by oxidizing the salt (B) include compounds having a quinone structure.
  • the content of the impurities is preferably 1.0% by mass or less, more preferably 0.1% by mass or less, and even more preferably 0.01% by mass or less, based on the total solid content of the composition of the present invention.
  • composition of the present invention may contain other components in addition to the resin (A) and the salt (B).
  • the composition of the present invention may contain a salt (C) which is a compound different from the above-mentioned salt (B) and which generates an acid upon irradiation with actinic rays or radiation.
  • the pKa of the acid generated from the salt (C) upon irradiation with actinic rays or radiation is preferably smaller than the pKa of the conjugate acid of the anion of the salt (B).
  • the absolute value of the difference between the pKa of the acid generated from the salt (C) and the pKa of the conjugate acid of the anion of the salt (B) is preferably 0.1 or more and less than 20, and preferably 1 or more and less than 15.
  • the salt (C) may be in the form of a low molecular compound or may be incorporated into a part of the polymer (for example, the resin (A)). Further, a form of a low molecular compound and a form incorporated into a part of a polymer (for example, resin (A)) may be used together.
  • the molecular weight of the salt (C) is preferably 3000 or less, more preferably 2000 or less, even more preferably 1000 or less. The lower limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 100 or more.
  • the salt (C) is incorporated into a part of the polymer, it may be incorporated into a part of the resin (A) or into a resin different from the resin (A).
  • Examples of the salt (C) include a compound represented by "G 1 + X - " (onium salt), and preferably a compound that generates an organic acid upon exposure to light.
  • Examples of the organic acids include sulfonic acids (aliphatic sulfonic acids, aromatic sulfonic acids, camphorsulfonic acids, etc.), carboxylic acids (aliphatic carboxylic acids, aromatic carboxylic acids, aralkylcarboxylic acids, etc.), carbonylsulfonylimide acid, bis(alkylsulfonyl)imidic acid, and tris(alkylsulfonyl)methide acid.
  • G 1 + represents an organic cation.
  • Specific examples and preferred ranges of the organic cation are the same as those of the organic cation represented by G m+ in the general formula (T1) above.
  • X ⁇ represents an organic anion.
  • the organic anion is not particularly limited, and includes mono- or divalent or higher-valent organic anions.
  • an anion having a significantly low ability to cause a nucleophilic reaction is preferable, and a non-nucleophilic anion is more preferable.
  • non-nucleophilic anions examples include sulfonic acid anions (aliphatic sulfonic acid anions, aromatic sulfonic acid anions, camphor sulfonic acid anions, etc.), carboxylic acid anions (aliphatic carboxylic acid anions, aromatic carboxylic acid anions, and aralkylcarboxylic acid anions), sulfonylimide anions, bis(alkylsulfonyl)imide anions, and tris(alkylsulfonyl)methide anions.
  • sulfonic acid anions aliphatic sulfonic acid anions, aromatic sulfonic acid anions, camphor sulfonic acid anions, etc.
  • carboxylic acid anions aliphatic carboxylic acid anions, aromatic carboxylic acid anions, and aralkylcarboxylic acid anions
  • sulfonylimide anions bis(alkylsulfonyl)imi
  • the aliphatic moiety in the aliphatic sulfonic acid anion and the aliphatic carboxylic acid anion may be a linear or branched alkyl group, or a cycloalkyl group, and may be a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. Alternatively, a branched alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms is preferable.
  • the alkyl group may be, for example, a fluoroalkyl group (which may have a substituent other than a fluorine atom and may be a perfluoroalkyl group).
  • the aryl group in the aromatic sulfonic acid anion and the aromatic carboxylic acid anion is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms, such as a phenyl group, a tolyl group, and a naphthyl group.
  • alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, and aryl group listed above may have a substituent.
  • Substituents are not particularly limited, but include, for example, nitro groups, halogen atoms such as fluorine atoms and chlorine atoms, carboxyl groups, hydroxyl groups, amino groups, cyano groups, alkoxy groups (preferably having 1 to 15 carbon atoms), alkyl groups ( (preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms), cycloalkyl group (preferably has 3 to 15 carbon atoms), aryl group (preferably has 6 to 14 carbon atoms), alkoxycarbonyl group (preferably has 2 to 7 carbon atoms), acyl group (preferably has 2 to 7 carbon atoms), (preferably has 2 to 12 carbon atoms), alkoxycarbonyloxy group (preferably has 2 to 7 carbon atoms), alkylthio group (preferably has 1 to 15 carbon atoms), alkylsulfonyl group (preferably has 1 to 15 carbon atoms), al
  • the aralkyl group in the aralkylcarboxylic acid anion is preferably an aralkyl group having 7 to 14 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the aralkyl group having 7 to 14 carbon atoms include benzyl group, phenethyl group, naphthylmethyl group, naphthylethyl group, and naphthylbutyl group.
  • Examples of the sulfonylimide anion include saccharin anion.
  • the alkyl group in the bis(alkylsulfonyl)imide anion and tris(alkylsulfonyl)methide anion is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • Substituents for these alkyl groups include halogen atoms, alkyl groups substituted with halogen atoms, alkoxy groups, alkylthio groups, alkyloxysulfonyl groups, aryloxysulfonyl groups, and cycloalkylaryloxysulfonyl groups, A fluorine atom or an alkyl group substituted with a fluorine atom is preferred.
  • the alkyl groups in the bis(alkylsulfonyl)imide anion may be bonded to each other to form a ring structure. This increases the acid strength.
  • non-nucleophilic anions include, for example, fluorinated phosphorus (eg, PF 6 ⁇ ), fluorinated boron (eg, BF 4 ⁇ ), and fluorinated antimony (eg, SbF 6 ⁇ ).
  • non-nucleophilic anions include aliphatic sulfonic acid anions in which at least the ⁇ -position of the sulfonic acid is substituted with a fluorine atom, aromatic sulfonic acid anions substituted with a fluorine atom or a group having a fluorine atom, and an alkyl group having a fluorine atom.
  • a bis(alkylsulfonyl)imide anion substituted with , or a tris(alkylsulfonyl)methide anion whose alkyl group is substituted with a fluorine atom is preferred.
  • perfluoroaliphatic sulfonate anions preferably having 4 to 8 carbon atoms
  • benzenesulfonate anions having a fluorine atom are more preferable, and nonafluorobutanesulfonate anions, perfluorooctanesulfonate anions, pentafluorobutanesulfonate anions, etc.
  • More preferred is benzenesulfonic acid anion or 3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)benzenesulfonic acid anion.
  • an anion represented by the following formula (AN1) is also preferable.
  • R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • the substituent is not particularly limited, but a group that is not an electron-withdrawing group is preferred.
  • groups that are not electron-withdrawing groups include hydrocarbon groups, hydroxyl groups, oxyhydrocarbon groups, oxycarbonyl hydrocarbon groups, amino groups, hydrocarbon-substituted amino groups, and hydrocarbon-substituted amide groups.
  • groups that are not electron-withdrawing groups -R', -OH, -OR', -OCOR', -NH 2 , -NR' 2 , -NHR', or -NHCOR' are preferable, each independently. .
  • R' is a monovalent hydrocarbon group.
  • Examples of the monovalent hydrocarbon group represented by R' include alkyl groups such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, and butyl; alkenyl groups such as ethenyl, propenyl, and butenyl; ethynyl Monovalent linear or branched hydrocarbon groups such as alkynyl groups, propynyl groups, butynyl groups; cyclopropyl groups, cyclobutyl groups, cyclopentyl groups, cyclohexyl groups, norbornyl groups, adamantyl groups, etc.
  • Cycloalkyl group monovalent alicyclic hydrocarbon group such as cycloalkenyl group such as cyclopropenyl group, cyclobutenyl group, cyclopentenyl group, and norbornenyl group; phenyl group, tolyl group, xylyl group, mesityl group, naphthyl group, methyl Aryl groups such as naphthyl group, anthryl group, and methylanthryl group; monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon groups such as aralkyl groups such as benzyl group, phenethyl group, phenylpropyl group, naphthylmethyl group, and anthrylmethyl group; Can be mentioned.
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently preferably a hydrocarbon group (preferably a cycloalkyl group) or a hydrogen atom.
  • L represents a divalent linking group.
  • each L may be the same or different.
  • the divalent linking group include -O-CO-O-, -COO-, -CONH-, -CO-, -O-, -S-, -SO-, -SO 2 -, alkylene group ( (preferably having 1 to 6 carbon atoms), a cycloalkylene group (preferably having 3 to 15 carbon atoms), an alkenylene group (preferably having 2 to 6 carbon atoms), and a divalent linking group that is a combination of a plurality of these. .
  • divalent linking groups include -O-CO-O-, -COO-, -CONH-, -CO-, -O-, -SO 2 -, -O-CO-O-alkylene group- , -COO-alkylene group-, or -CONH-alkylene group- is preferred, -O-CO-O-, -O-CO-O-alkylene group-, -COO-, -CONH-, -SO 2 - , or -COO-alkylene group- is more preferred.
  • a group represented by the following formula (AN1-1) is preferable. * a -(CR 2a 2 ) X -Q-(CR 2b 2 ) Y -* b (AN1-1)
  • * a represents the bonding position with R 3 in formula (AN1).
  • * b represents the bonding position with -C(R 1 )(R 2 )- in formula (AN1).
  • X and Y each independently represent an integer of 0 to 10, preferably an integer of 0 to 3.
  • R 2a and R 2b each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent. When a plurality of R 2a and R 2b exist, the plurality of R 2a and R 2b may be the same or different. However, when Y is 1 or more, R 2b in CR 2b 2 directly bonded to -C(R 1 )(R 2 )- in formula (AN1) is other than a fluorine atom.
  • Q is * A -O-CO-O-* B , * A -CO-* B , * A -CO-O-* B , * A -O-CO-* B , * A -O-* B , * A -S-* B , or * A - SO2- * B .
  • R 3 represents an organic group.
  • the above organic group is not particularly limited as long as it has one or more carbon atoms, and may be a linear group (e.g., a linear alkyl group) or a branched group (e.g., t-butyl group, etc.). (branched alkyl group) or a cyclic group.
  • the above organic group may or may not have a substituent.
  • the above organic group may or may not have a hetero atom (oxygen atom, sulfur atom, and/or nitrogen atom, etc.).
  • R 3 is preferably an organic group having a cyclic structure.
  • the above-mentioned cyclic structure may be monocyclic or polycyclic, and may have a substituent.
  • the ring in the organic group containing a cyclic structure is preferably directly bonded to L in formula (AN1).
  • the organic group having a cyclic structure may or may not have a hetero atom (oxygen atom, sulfur atom, and/or nitrogen atom, etc.), for example. Heteroatoms may be substituted for one or more of the carbon atoms forming the cyclic structure.
  • the organic group having a cyclic structure is preferably, for example, a hydrocarbon group having a cyclic structure, a lactone ring group, or a sultone ring group.
  • the organic group having a cyclic structure is preferably a hydrocarbon group having a cyclic structure.
  • the hydrocarbon group having a cyclic structure is preferably a monocyclic or polycyclic cycloalkyl group. These groups may have a substituent.
  • the above cycloalkyl group may be monocyclic (such as a cyclohexyl group) or polycyclic (such as an adamantyl group), and preferably has 5 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • lactone group and sultone group examples include structures represented by the above-mentioned formulas (LC1-1) to (LC1-21) and structures represented by the formulas (SL1-1) to (SL1-3). In either of these, a group formed by removing one hydrogen atom from the ring atoms constituting the lactone structure or sultone structure is preferable.
  • the non-nucleophilic anion may be a benzenesulfonic acid anion, preferably a benzenesulfonic acid anion substituted with a branched alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group.
  • an anion represented by the following formula (AN2) is also preferred.
  • o represents an integer from 1 to 3.
  • p represents an integer from 0 to 10.
  • q represents an integer from 0 to 10.
  • Xf represents a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, an alkyl group substituted with at least one fluorine atom, or an organic group having no fluorine atom.
  • the number of carbon atoms in this alkyl group is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 4.
  • the alkyl group substituted with at least one fluorine atom is preferably a perfluoroalkyl group.
  • Xf is preferably a fluorine atom or a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, more preferably a fluorine atom or CF 3 , and even more preferably both Xfs are fluorine atoms.
  • R 4 and R 5 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, an alkyl group, or an alkyl group substituted with at least one fluorine atom. When a plurality of R 4 and R 5 exist, each of R 4 and R 5 may be the same or different.
  • the alkyl group represented by R 4 and R 5 preferably has 1 to 4 carbon atoms. The above alkyl group may have a substituent.
  • a hydrogen atom is preferable as R 4 and R 5 .
  • L represents a divalent linking group.
  • the definition of L is synonymous with L in formula (AN1).
  • W represents an organic group containing a cyclic structure.
  • a cyclic organic group is preferred.
  • the cyclic organic group include an alicyclic group, an aryl group, and a heterocyclic group.
  • the alicyclic group may be monocyclic or polycyclic.
  • the monocyclic alicyclic group include monocyclic cycloalkyl groups such as a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, and a cyclooctyl group.
  • polycyclic alicyclic group examples include polycyclic cycloalkyl groups such as norbornyl group, tricyclodecanyl group, tetracyclodecanyl group, tetracyclododecanyl group, and adamantyl group.
  • polycyclic cycloalkyl groups such as norbornyl group, tricyclodecanyl group, tetracyclodecanyl group, tetracyclododecanyl group, and adamantyl group.
  • alicyclic groups having a bulky structure having 7 or more carbon atoms such as a norbornyl group, a tricyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, and an adamantyl group, are preferable.
  • Aryl groups may be monocyclic or polycyclic.
  • the aryl group include a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, a phenanthryl group, and an anthryl group.
  • the heterocyclic group may be monocyclic or polycyclic. Among these, when it is a polycyclic heterocyclic group, acid diffusion can be further suppressed.
  • the heterocyclic group may or may not have aromaticity. Examples of the aromatic heterocycle include a furan ring, a thiophene ring, a benzofuran ring, a benzothiophene ring, a dibenzofuran ring, a dibenzothiophene ring, and a pyridine ring.
  • non-aromatic heterocycle examples include a tetrahydropyran ring, a lactone ring, a sultone ring, and a decahydroisoquinoline ring.
  • the heterocycle in the heterocyclic group is preferably a furan ring, a thiophene ring, a pyridine ring, or a decahydroisoquinoline ring.
  • the above cyclic organic group may have a substituent.
  • substituents include alkyl groups (which may be linear or branched, preferably having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), cycloalkyl groups (monocyclic, polycyclic, and spirocyclic). any of them may be used, preferably 3 to 20 carbon atoms), aryl group (preferably 6 to 14 carbon atoms), hydroxyl group, alkoxy group, ester group, amide group, urethane group, ureido group, thioether group, sulfonamide group, and a sulfonic acid ester group.
  • the carbon constituting the cyclic organic group may be carbonyl carbon.
  • Examples of anions represented by formula (AN2) include SO 3 - -CF 2 -CH 2 -OCO-(L) q' -W, SO 3 - -CF 2 -CHF-CH 2 -OCO-(L) q ' -W, SO 3 - -CF 2 -COO- (L) q' -W, SO 3 - -CF 2 -CF 2 -CH 2 -CH 2 - (L) q -W, or SO 3 - - CF 2 -CH(CF 3 )-OCO-(L) q' -W is preferred.
  • L, q and W are the same as in formula (AN2).
  • q' represents an integer from 0 to 10.
  • an aromatic sulfonic acid anion represented by the following formula (AN3) is also preferable.
  • Ar represents an aryl group (such as a phenyl group), and may further have a sulfonic acid anion and a substituent other than the -(DB) group.
  • substituents include a fluorine atom and a hydroxyl group.
  • n represents an integer of 0 or more. n is preferably 1 to 4, more preferably 2 to 3, and even more preferably 3.
  • D represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group include an ether group, a thioether group, a carbonyl group, a sulfoxide group, a sulfone group, a sulfonic acid ester group, an ester group, and a group consisting of a combination of two or more thereof.
  • B represents a hydrocarbon group.
  • B is preferably an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, more preferably an isopropyl group, a cyclohexyl group, or an aryl group that may further have a substituent (such as a tricyclohexylphenyl group).
  • a disulfonamide anion is also preferred.
  • the disulfonamide anion is, for example, an anion represented by N - (SO 2 -R q ) 2 .
  • R q represents an alkyl group that may have a substituent, preferably a fluoroalkyl group, and more preferably a perfluoroalkyl group.
  • Two R q may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • the group formed by bonding two R q's to each other is preferably an alkylene group which may have a substituent, preferably a fluoroalkylene group, and more preferably a perfluoroalkylene group.
  • the alkylene group preferably has 2 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • non-nucleophilic anions include anions represented by the following formulas (d1-1) to (d1-4).
  • R 51 represents a hydrocarbon group (eg, an aryl group such as a phenyl group) which may have a substituent (eg, a hydroxyl group).
  • Z 2c represents a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms which may have a substituent (however, the carbon atom adjacent to S is not substituted with a fluorine atom).
  • the hydrocarbon group in Z 2c may be linear or branched, or may have a cyclic structure.
  • a carbon atom in the hydrocarbon group (preferably a carbon atom that is a ring member atom when the hydrocarbon group has a cyclic structure) may be a carbonyl carbon (-CO-).
  • Examples of the hydrocarbon group include a group having a norbornyl group which may have a substituent.
  • the carbon atom forming the norbornyl group may be a carbonyl carbon.
  • Z 2c —SO 3 ⁇ in formula (d1-2) is preferably different from the anions represented by formulas (AN1) to (AN3) above.
  • Z 2c is preferably other than an aryl group.
  • atoms at the ⁇ -position and ⁇ -position with respect to -SO 3 - are preferably atoms other than carbon atoms having a fluorine atom as a substituent.
  • the atom at the ⁇ -position and/or the atom at the ⁇ -position with respect to -SO 3 - is preferably a ring member atom in a cyclic group.
  • R 52 represents an organic group (preferably a hydrocarbon group having a fluorine atom), and Y 3 is a linear, branched, or cyclic alkylene group, arylene group, or It represents a carbonyl group, and Rf represents a hydrocarbon group.
  • R 53 and R 54 each independently represent an organic group (preferably a hydrocarbon group having a fluorine atom). R 53 and R 54 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • the organic anions may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the salt (C) has a group that is decomposed by the action of an acid.
  • the salt (C) is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (U1).
  • L represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • A represents a group that decomposes under the action of an acid.
  • n represents an integer from 1 to 5.
  • X represents an n+1-valent linking group.
  • M + represents a sulfonium ion or an iodonium ion.
  • X represents an n+1-valent linking group.
  • the linking group represented by Examples include OCO- and a combination of two or more of these groups.
  • the aliphatic group mentioned above is a group obtained by removing n hydrogen atoms from an alkyl group (which may be linear or branched, preferably having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms).
  • a group obtained by removing n hydrogen atoms from a cycloalkyl group (which may be monocyclic or polycyclic, preferably having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 5 to 10 carbon atoms) is preferable.
  • the above aliphatic group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the above substituent T.
  • the aliphatic group may have a heteroatom (eg, sulfur atom, oxygen atom, nitrogen atom, etc.) between carbon atoms.
  • the above aromatic group is an aryl group (preferably an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 18 carbon atoms).
  • the aryl group may also be an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms. Preferred. Specific examples of the aryl group include phenyl group, terphenyl group, etc.) from which n hydrogen atoms have been removed.
  • the above aromatic group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the above substituent T.
  • the aromatic group may have a heteroatom (eg, sulfur atom, oxygen atom, nitrogen atom, etc.) between carbon atoms.
  • X is an n+1-valent aromatic group.
  • n represents an integer of 1 to 5, preferably an integer of 1 to 3, more preferably 2 or 3, and even more preferably 3.
  • L represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group represented by L is not particularly limited, but includes, for example, an aliphatic group (which may be linear, branched, or cyclic), an aromatic group, -O-, -CO-, -COO -, -OCO-, and a combination of two or more of these groups.
  • the aliphatic groups mentioned above include alkylene groups (which may be linear or branched, preferably having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms), and cycloalkylene groups (monocyclic or polycyclic alkylene groups).
  • a cycloalkylene group having preferably 3 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 5 to 10 carbon atoms is preferred.
  • the above aliphatic group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the above substituent T.
  • the aliphatic group may have a heteroatom (eg, sulfur atom, oxygen atom, nitrogen atom, etc.) between carbon atoms.
  • the aromatic group is preferably an arylene group (preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms).
  • the above aromatic group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the above substituent T.
  • the aromatic group may have a heteroatom (eg, sulfur atom, oxygen atom, nitrogen atom, etc.) between carbon atoms.
  • L is an arylene group.
  • A represents a group that decomposes under the action of an acid.
  • the group that is decomposed by the action of an acid (acid-decomposable group) represented by A is not particularly limited, and includes, for example, the acid-decomposable groups described in the resin (A) above.
  • the acid-decomposable group preferably has a structure in which a polar group is protected with a group (leaving group) that decomposes and leaves under the action of an acid.
  • a polar group a carboxy group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, and an alcoholic hydroxyl group are preferable.
  • M + represents a sulfonium ion or an iodonium ion, and specific examples and preferred ranges are the same as those in the case where G m+ in general formula (T1) represents a sulfonium ion or an iodonium ion.
  • the salt (C) is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (U2).
  • L, A, n, and M + represent the same meanings as L, A, n, and M + in general formula (U1), respectively.
  • the salt (C) may be at least one selected from the group consisting of compounds (I) to (II).
  • Compound (I) is a compound having one or more of the following structural moieties X and one or more of the following structural moieties Y, and the following first acidic acid derived from the following structural moiety This is a compound that generates an acid containing the following second acidic site derived from the structural site Y below.
  • Structural moiety _ _ _ A structural site consisting of A 2 - and a cationic site M 2 + , and which forms a second acidic site represented by HA 2 upon irradiation with actinic rays or radiation
  • the above compound (I) satisfies the following condition I .
  • a compound PI obtained by replacing the cation moiety M 1 + in the structural moiety X and the cation moiety M 2 + in the structural moiety Y with H + in the compound (I) is The acid dissociation constant a1 derived from the acidic site represented by HA 1 is obtained by replacing the cationic site M 1 + with H + , and the acid dissociation constant a1 derived from the acidic site represented by HA 1 is obtained by replacing the cationic site M 2 + in the structural site Y with H + It has an acid dissociation constant a2 derived from the acidic site represented by HA 2 , and the acid dissociation constant a2 is larger than the acid dissociation constant a1.
  • compound (I) is, for example, an acid-generating compound having one of the first acidic sites derived from the structural site X and one of the second acidic sites derived from the structural site Y.
  • compound PI corresponds to "a compound having HA 1 and HA 2 ".
  • the acid dissociation constant a1 and the acid dissociation constant a2 of the compound PI are defined as, when the acid dissociation constant of the compound PI is determined, the compound PI is a "compound having A 1 - and HA 2 ".
  • compound (I) is, for example, an acid-generating compound having two of the first acidic sites derived from the structural site X and one of the second acidic sites derived from the structural site Y.
  • compound PI corresponds to "a compound having two HA 1 and one HA 2 ".
  • the acid dissociation constant when a compound having one HA 1 and one HA 2 becomes a compound having two A 1 - and one HA 2 corresponds to the acid dissociation constant a1 described above. .
  • the acid dissociation constant when "a compound having two A 1 - and one HA 2 " becomes "a compound having two A 1 - and A 2 - " corresponds to the acid dissociation constant a2.
  • compound PI when it has a plurality of acid dissociation constants derived from the acidic site represented by HA 1 , which is obtained by replacing the cation site M 1 + in the structural site X with H + , it has a plurality of acid dissociation constants.
  • the value of acid dissociation constant a2 is larger than the largest value of a1.
  • the acid dissociation constant when compound PI becomes "a compound having one A 1 - , one HA 1 , and one HA 2 " is aa
  • ab is the acid dissociation constant when a compound with one HA 2 becomes a compound with two A 1 - and one HA 2 , the relationship between aa and ab satisfies aa ⁇ ab. .
  • the acid dissociation constant a1 and the acid dissociation constant a2 are determined by the acid dissociation constant measurement method described above.
  • the above-mentioned compound PI corresponds to an acid generated when compound (I) is irradiated with actinic rays or radiation.
  • the structural sites X may be the same or different.
  • two or more of the above A 1 ⁇ and two or more of the above M 1 + may be the same or different.
  • the above A 1 - and the above A 2 - , and the above M 1 + and the above M 2 + may be the same or different, but the above A 1 - and the above A 2 - are preferably different from each other.
  • the difference (absolute value) between the acid dissociation constant a1 (the maximum value when there are multiple acid dissociation constants a1) and the acid dissociation constant a2 is preferably 0.1 or more, and 0.5 or more. More preferably, 1.0 or more is even more preferable.
  • the upper limit of the difference (absolute value) between the acid dissociation constant a1 (the maximum value when there is a plurality of acid dissociation constants a1) and the acid dissociation constant a2 is not particularly limited, but is, for example, 16 or less.
  • the acid dissociation constant a2 is preferably 20 or less, more preferably 15 or less.
  • the lower limit of the acid dissociation constant a2 is preferably ⁇ 4 or more.
  • the acid dissociation constant a1 is preferably smaller than the pKa of the conjugate acid of the anion of the salt (B).
  • the absolute value of the difference between the acid dissociation constant a1 and the pKa of the conjugate acid of the anion of the salt (B) is preferably 0.1 or more and less than 20, more preferably 1 or more and less than 15, particularly preferably 2 or more and less than 10.
  • the anionic moiety A 1 - and the anionic moiety A 2 - are structural moieties containing negatively charged atoms or atomic groups, for example, the formulas (AA-1) to (AA-3) and the formula (BB Examples include structural sites selected from the group consisting of -1) to (BB-6).
  • the anion moiety A 1 - is preferably one that can form an acidic moiety with a small acid dissociation constant, and more preferably one of the formulas (AA-1) to (AA-3), and the formula ( More preferably, it is either AA-1) or (AA-3).
  • the anionic moiety A 2 - is preferably one that can form an acidic moiety with a larger acid dissociation constant than the anionic moiety A 1 - , and should be one of formulas (BB-1) to (BB-6). is more preferred, and one of formulas (BB-1) and (BB-4) is even more preferred.
  • * represents the bonding position.
  • R A represents a monovalent organic group.
  • the monovalent organic group represented by R A is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a cyano group, a trifluoromethyl group, and a methanesulfonyl group.
  • the cationic site M 1 + and the cationic site M 2 + are structural sites containing positively charged atoms or atomic groups, such as monovalent organic cations.
  • the organic cation represented by G1 + mentioned above is mentioned, for example.
  • Compound (II) is a compound having two or more of the above structural sites It is a compound that generates an acid containing two or more sites and the above structural site Z.
  • Structural site Z nonionic site capable of neutralizing acids
  • HA 1 is obtained by replacing the cationic site M 1 + in the structural site X with H + .
  • the preferred range of the acid dissociation constant a1 derived from the acidic site represented by is the same as the acid dissociation constant a1 in the above compound PI.
  • compound (II) is, for example, a compound that generates an acid having two of the first acidic sites derived from the structural site X and the structural site Z
  • compound PII is a compound that generates an acid having two of the first acidic sites derived from the structural site X and the structural site Z.
  • the acid dissociation constant a1 is determined by the acid dissociation constant measurement method described above.
  • the above-mentioned compound PII corresponds to an acid generated when compound (II) is irradiated with actinic rays or radiation.
  • the two or more structural sites X may be the same or different.
  • the two or more A 1 ⁇ and the two or more M 1 + may be the same or different.
  • the nonionic site that can neutralize the acid in the structural site Z is not particularly limited, and for example, it must be a site that contains a group that can electrostatically interact with protons or a functional group that has electrons. is preferred.
  • the group capable of electrostatic interaction with protons or the functional group having electrons is a functional group having a macrocyclic structure such as a cyclic polyether, or a functional group having a lone pair of electrons that does not contribute to ⁇ conjugation. Examples include functional groups having a nitrogen atom.
  • a nitrogen atom having a lone pair of electrons that does not contribute to ⁇ conjugation is, for example, a nitrogen atom having a partial structure shown in the following formula.
  • Examples of partial structures of functional groups having groups or electrons that can electrostatically interact with protons include crown ether structures, aza crown ether structures, primary to tertiary amine structures, pyridine structures, imidazole structures, and pyrazine structures. Among these, primary to tertiary amine structures are preferred.
  • salt (C) Specific examples of the salt (C) are shown below, but the salt (C) is not limited thereto.
  • the content of the salt (C) is preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and 1.0% by mass based on the total solid content of the composition of the present invention.
  • the above is more preferable.
  • the content of salt (B) is preferably 50.0% by mass or less, more preferably 30.0% by mass or less, and even more preferably 25.0% by mass or less, based on the total solid content of the composition of the present invention.
  • Salt (C) may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total content is within the above-mentioned preferred content range.
  • the salt (B) can function as an acid diffusion control agent, but the composition of the present invention may further contain an acid diffusion control agent in addition to the salt (B).
  • the acid diffusion control agent is a quenching agent that traps the acid generated from the photoacid generator (for example, salt (C), etc.) during exposure and suppresses the reaction of the acid-decomposable resin in the unexposed area due to the excess generated acid. Acts as a char.
  • the type of acid diffusion control agent is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a basic compound (DA), a low molecular compound (DB) having a nitrogen atom and a group that is eliminated by the action of an acid, and actinic rays or radiation.
  • Examples include compounds (DC) whose ability to control acid diffusion decreases or disappears when irradiated with.
  • the compound (DC) is an onium salt compound (DD) of an acid that becomes a relatively weak acid with respect to the acid generated from a photoacid generator (for example, salt (C), etc.), and irradiation with actinic rays or radiation.
  • Examples include basic compounds (DE) whose basicity decreases or disappears due to Specific examples of basic compounds (DA) include those described in paragraphs [0132] to [0136] of International Publication No. 2020/066824; Specific examples of basic compounds (DE) that disappear include those described in paragraphs [0137] to [0155] of International Publication No.
  • the content of the acid diffusion control agent is 0.1 to 15% based on the total solid content of the composition of the present invention. 0% by mass is preferred, and 0.5 to 15.0% by mass is more preferred.
  • Acid diffusion control agents other than the salt (B) may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total content is within the above-mentioned preferred content range.
  • the composition of the present invention may further contain a hydrophobic resin different from the resin (A).
  • the hydrophobic resin is preferably designed so that it is unevenly distributed on the surface of the resist film, but unlike a surfactant, it does not necessarily have to have a hydrophilic group in the molecule, and it is necessary to uniformly mix polar and non-polar substances. does not have to contribute to Effects of adding a hydrophobic resin include controlling the static and dynamic contact angle of the resist film surface with water and suppressing outgassing.
  • the hydrophobic resin preferably has one or more of a fluorine atom, a silicon atom, and a CH3 partial structure contained in the side chain portion of the resin, and preferably has two or more of them. It is more preferable to have the above.
  • the hydrophobic resin preferably has a hydrocarbon group having 5 or more carbon atoms. These groups may be present in the main chain of the resin or may be substituted on the side chains. Examples of the hydrophobic resin include compounds described in paragraphs [0275] to [0279] of International Publication No. 2020/004306.
  • the content of the hydrophobic resin is preferably 0.01 to 20.0% by mass, and 0.1 to 20.0% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition of the present invention. 15.0% by mass is more preferred.
  • the hydrophobic resins may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total content is within the above-mentioned preferred content range.
  • the composition of the invention may also contain a surfactant.
  • a surfactant When a surfactant is included, a pattern with better adhesion and fewer development defects can be formed.
  • the surfactant is preferably a fluorine-based and/or silicon-based surfactant. Examples of the fluorine-based and/or silicon-based surfactants include the surfactants disclosed in paragraphs [0218] and [0219] of International Publication No. 2018/193954.
  • the content of the surfactant is preferably 0.0001 to 2.0% by mass, and 0.0005 to 2.0% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition of the present invention. It is more preferably 1.0% by mass, and even more preferably 0.1 to 1.0% by mass.
  • One kind of surfactant may be used, or two or more kinds of surfactants may be used. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total content is within the above-mentioned preferred content range.
  • the composition of the present invention contains a solvent.
  • the solvent consists of (M1) propylene glycol monoalkyl ether carboxylate, and (M2) propylene glycol monoalkyl ether, lactic acid ester, acetate ester, alkoxypropionic acid ester, chain ketone, cyclic ketone, lactone, and alkylene carbonate. It is preferable that at least one selected from the group is included. Note that the above solvent may further contain components other than components (M1) and (M2).
  • the above-mentioned solvent and the above-mentioned resin are combined from the viewpoint of improving the coating properties of the composition of the present invention and reducing the number of pattern development defects. Since the above-mentioned solvent has a good balance between the solubility, boiling point, and viscosity of the above-mentioned resin, it is possible to suppress unevenness in the thickness of the resist film and the generation of precipitates during spin coating. Details of component (M1) and component (M2) are described in paragraphs [0218] to [0226] of International Publication No. 2020/004306, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the content of components other than components (M1) and (M2) is preferably 5 to 30% by mass based on the total amount of the solvent.
  • the content of the solvent in the composition of the present invention is preferably determined so that the solid content concentration is 0.5 to 30% by mass, more preferably 1 to 20% by mass. In this way, the applicability of the composition of the present invention can be further improved.
  • the composition of the present invention includes a dissolution inhibiting compound, a dye, a plasticizer, a photosensitizer, a light absorber, and/or a compound that promotes solubility in a developer (for example, a phenol compound having a molecular weight of 1000 or less, or It may further contain an alicyclic or aliphatic compound containing a carboxyl group.
  • a dissolution inhibiting compound for example, a phenol compound having a molecular weight of 1000 or less, or It may further contain an alicyclic or aliphatic compound containing a carboxyl group.
  • dissolution-inhibiting compound is a compound with a molecular weight of 3000 or less that decomposes under the action of an acid and reduces its solubility in an organic developer.
  • the composition of the present invention is suitably used as a photosensitive composition for EUV exposure.
  • EUV light has a wavelength of 13.5 nm, which is shorter than ArF (wavelength 193 nm) light, etc., so the number of incident photons when exposed with the same sensitivity is smaller. Therefore, the influence of "photon shot noise" in which the number of photons varies stochastically is large, leading to deterioration of line edge roughness (LER) and bridging defects.
  • One way to reduce photon shot noise is to increase the number of incident photons by increasing the exposure amount, but this comes at a trade-off with the demand for higher sensitivity.
  • the absorption efficiency of EUV light and electron beams of the resist film formed from the resist composition becomes high, which is effective in reducing photon shot noise.
  • the A value represents the EUV light and electron beam absorption efficiency of the mass percentage of the resist film.
  • A ([H] x 0.04 + [C] x 1.0 + [N] x 2.1 + [O] x 3.6 + [F] x 5.6 + [S] x 1.5 + [I] x 39.5) / ([H] x 1 + [C] x 12 + [N] x 14 + [O] x 16 + [F] x 19 + [S] x 32 + [I] x 127)
  • the A value is preferably 0.120 or more.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but if the A value is too large, the EUV light and electron beam transmittance of the resist film will decrease, the optical image profile in the resist film will deteriorate, and as a result, it will be difficult to obtain a good pattern shape. Therefore, it is preferably 0.240 or less, more preferably 0.220 or less.
  • [H] represents the molar ratio of hydrogen atoms derived from the total solid content to all atoms of the total solid content in the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition
  • [C] represents the molar ratio of carbon atoms derived from the total solid content to all atoms of the total solid content in the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition
  • [N] is the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition.
  • [O] is the molar ratio of nitrogen atoms derived from all solids to all atoms of all solids in the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition
  • [F] is the molar ratio of fluorine atoms derived from the total solid content to all atoms of the total solid content in the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition.
  • [S] represents the molar ratio of sulfur atoms derived from the total solid content to all atoms of the total solid content in the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition
  • [I] represents the active ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition. It represents the molar ratio of iodine atoms derived from the total solid content to all atoms of the total solid content in a radiation-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition.
  • the resist composition includes an acid-decomposable resin, a photoacid generator, an acid diffusion control agent, and a solvent
  • the acid-decomposable resin, the photoacid generator, and the acid diffusion control agent correspond to the solid content. do.
  • all atoms in the total solid content correspond to the sum of all atoms derived from the resin, all atoms derived from the photoacid generator, and all atoms derived from the acid diffusion control agent.
  • [H] represents the molar ratio of hydrogen atoms derived from the total solid content to all atoms derived from the total solid content, and to explain based on the above example, [H] represents all atoms derived from the acid-decomposable resin. , hydrogen atoms derived from the acid-decomposable resin, hydrogen atoms derived from the photoacid generator, and the acid with respect to the total of all atoms derived from the photoacid generator and all atoms derived from the acid diffusion control agent. It represents the total molar ratio of hydrogen atoms derived from the diffusion control agent.
  • the A value can be calculated by calculating the ratio of the number of atoms contained. Furthermore, even if the constituent components are unknown, it is possible to calculate the constituent atomic ratio using analytical methods such as elemental analysis for a resist film obtained by evaporating the solvent components of the resist composition. .
  • the invention also relates to actinic- or radiation-sensitive films formed with the compositions of the invention.
  • the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film of the present invention is preferably a resist film.
  • the procedure of the pattern forming method using the composition of the present invention is not particularly limited, it is preferable to include the following steps. Step 1: Step of forming a resist film on a substrate using the composition of the present invention Step 2: Step of exposing the resist film Step 3: Step of developing the exposed resist film using a developer
  • Step 1 Step of forming a resist film on a substrate using the composition of the present invention
  • Step 2 Step of exposing the resist film
  • Step 3 Step of developing the exposed resist film using a developer
  • Step 1 is a step of forming a resist film on a substrate using the composition of the present invention.
  • Examples of the method for forming a resist film on a substrate using the composition of the present invention include a method of applying the composition of the present invention onto a substrate.
  • the pore size of the filter is preferably 0.1 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 0.05 ⁇ m or less, and even more preferably 0.03 ⁇ m or less.
  • the filter is preferably made of polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene, or nylon.
  • compositions of the present invention can be applied by any suitable application method, such as a spinner or coater, onto substrates (eg, silicon, silicon dioxide coated) such as those used in the manufacture of integrated circuit devices.
  • the coating method is preferably spin coating using a spinner.
  • the rotation speed during spin coating using a spinner is preferably 1000 to 3000 rpm (rotations per minute).
  • the substrate may be dried to form a resist film. Note that, if necessary, various base films (inorganic film, organic film, antireflection film) may be formed under the resist film.
  • drying method examples include a method of drying by heating. Heating can be carried out using a means provided in an ordinary exposure machine and/or developing machine, or may be carried out using a hot plate or the like.
  • the heating temperature is preferably 80 to 150°C, more preferably 80 to 140°C, even more preferably 80 to 130°C.
  • the heating time is preferably 30 to 1000 seconds, more preferably 60 to 800 seconds, even more preferably 60 to 600 seconds.
  • the thickness of the resist film is not particularly limited, but is preferably 10 to 120 nm from the standpoint of forming fine patterns with higher precision. Among these, in the case of EUV exposure, the thickness of the resist film is more preferably 10 to 65 nm, and even more preferably 15 to 50 nm. In the case of ArF immersion exposure, the thickness of the resist film is more preferably 10 to 120 nm, and even more preferably 15 to 90 nm.
  • a top coat may be formed on the upper layer of the resist film using a top coat composition. It is preferable that the top coat composition is not mixed with the resist film and can be uniformly applied to the upper layer of the resist film.
  • the top coat is not particularly limited, and a conventionally known top coat can be formed by a conventionally known method. Can be formed. For example, it is preferable to form a top coat containing a basic compound as described in JP-A-2013-61648 on the resist film. Specific examples of basic compounds that may be included in the top coat include basic compounds that may be included in the composition of the present invention.
  • the top coat contains a compound containing at least one group or bond selected from the group consisting of an ether bond, a thioether bond, a hydroxyl group, a thiol group, a carbonyl bond, and an ester bond.
  • Step 2 is a step of exposing the resist film.
  • the exposure method include a method of irradiating the formed resist film with actinic rays or radiation through a predetermined mask.
  • active light or radiation include infrared light, visible light, ultraviolet light, far ultraviolet light, extreme ultraviolet light, X-rays, and electron beams, preferably 250 nm or less, more preferably 220 nm or less, and 1 to 200 nm.
  • Particularly preferred are deep ultraviolet light of wavelengths, specifically KrF excimer laser (248 nm), ArF excimer laser (193 nm), F 2 excimer laser (157 nm), EUV (13.5 nm), X-rays, and electron beams.
  • the heating temperature is preferably 80 to 150°C, more preferably 80 to 140°C, even more preferably 80 to 130°C.
  • the heating time is preferably 10 to 1000 seconds, more preferably 10 to 180 seconds, and even more preferably 30 to 120 seconds. Heating can be carried out using means provided in a normal exposure machine and/or developing machine, and may be carried out using a hot plate or the like. This step is also called post-exposure bake.
  • Step 3 is a step of developing the exposed resist film using a developer to form a pattern.
  • the developer may be an alkaline developer or a developer containing an organic solvent (hereinafter also referred to as an organic developer).
  • Development methods include, for example, a method in which the substrate is immersed in a tank filled with a developer for a certain period of time (dip method), a method in which the developer is raised on the surface of the substrate by surface tension and left to stand for a certain period of time (paddle method). method), a method in which the developer is sprayed onto the surface of the substrate (spray method), and a method in which the developer is continuously discharged while scanning a developer discharge nozzle at a constant speed onto a rotating substrate (dynamic dispensing method). ). Furthermore, after the step of developing, a step of stopping the development may be carried out while substituting another solvent.
  • the development time is not particularly limited as long as the resin in the unexposed areas is sufficiently dissolved, and is preferably 10 to 300 seconds, more preferably 20 to 120 seconds.
  • the temperature of the developer is preferably 0 to 50°C, more preferably 15 to 35°C.
  • alkaline developer it is preferable to use an alkaline aqueous solution containing an alkali.
  • the type of alkaline aqueous solution is not particularly limited, but examples include quaternary ammonium salts represented by tetramethylammonium hydroxide, inorganic alkalis, primary amines, secondary amines, tertiary amines, alcohol amines, or cyclic amines. Examples include alkaline aqueous solutions containing.
  • the alkaline developer is preferably an aqueous solution of a quaternary ammonium salt typified by tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH). Appropriate amounts of alcohols, surfactants, etc. may be added to the alkaline developer.
  • the alkaline concentration of the alkaline developer is usually preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass.
  • the pH of the alkaline developer is usually preferably 10.0 to 15.0.
  • the organic developer is a developer containing at least one organic solvent selected from the group consisting of ketone solvents, ester solvents, alcohol solvents, amide solvents, ether solvents, and hydrocarbon solvents. It is preferable that there be.
  • a plurality of the above-mentioned solvents may be mixed together, or may be mixed with a solvent other than the above-mentioned ones or water.
  • the water content of the developer as a whole is preferably less than 50% by mass, more preferably less than 20% by mass, even more preferably less than 10% by mass, and particularly preferably substantially free of water.
  • the content of the organic solvent in the organic developer is preferably 50% by mass or more and 100% by mass or less, more preferably 80% by mass or more and 100% by mass or less, and 90% by mass or more and 100% by mass, based on the total amount of the developer. The following is more preferable, and 95% by mass or more and 100% by mass or less is particularly preferable.
  • the pattern forming method includes a step of cleaning using a rinsing liquid after step 3.
  • Examples of the rinsing solution used in the rinsing step after the step of developing using an alkaline developer include pure water. Note that an appropriate amount of a surfactant may be added to the pure water. An appropriate amount of surfactant may be added to the rinse solution.
  • the rinsing solution used in the rinsing step after the development step using an organic developer is not particularly limited as long as it does not dissolve the pattern, and solutions containing common organic solvents can be used.
  • the rinsing liquid should contain at least one organic solvent selected from the group consisting of hydrocarbon solvents, ketone solvents, ester solvents, alcohol solvents, amide solvents, and ether solvents. is preferred.
  • the method of the rinsing process is not particularly limited, and examples include a method in which the rinsing liquid is continuously discharged onto the substrate rotating at a constant speed (rotary coating method), and a method in which the substrate is immersed in a tank filled with the rinsing liquid for a certain period of time. (dip method) and a method of spraying a rinsing liquid onto the substrate surface (spray method).
  • the pattern forming method may include a heating step (Post Bake) after the rinsing step. In this step, the developer and rinse solution remaining between patterns and inside the patterns due to baking are removed. This step also has the effect of smoothing the resist pattern and improving surface roughness of the pattern.
  • the heating step after the rinsing step is usually carried out at 40 to 250°C (preferably 90 to 200°C) for 10 seconds to 3 minutes (preferably 30 seconds to 120 seconds).
  • the substrate may be etched using the formed pattern as a mask. That is, the pattern formed in step 3 may be used as a mask to process the substrate (or the lower film and the substrate) to form a pattern on the substrate.
  • the method of processing the substrate (or the lower layer film and the substrate) is not particularly limited, but by performing dry etching on the substrate (or the lower layer film and the substrate) using the pattern formed in step 3 as a mask, the substrate is processed.
  • a method of forming a pattern is preferred.
  • the dry etching is preferably oxygen plasma etching.
  • composition of the present invention and various materials used in the pattern forming method do not contain impurities such as metals. It is preferable not to include it.
  • the content of impurities contained in these materials is preferably 1 mass ppm (parts per million) or less, more preferably 10 mass ppb (parts per billion) or less, even more preferably 100 mass ppt (parts per trillion) or less, and 10 mass ppm (parts per million) or less.
  • a mass ppt or less is particularly preferred, and a mass ppt or less is most preferred.
  • the lower limit is not particularly limited, and is preferably 0 mass ppt or more.
  • metal impurities include Na, K, Ca, Fe, Cu, Mg, Al, Li, Cr, Ni, Sn, Ag, As, Au, Ba, Cd, Co, Pb, Ti, V, Examples include W and Zn.
  • Examples of methods for removing impurities such as metals from various materials include filtration using a filter. Details of filtration using a filter are described in paragraph [0321] of International Publication No. 2020/004306.
  • Methods for reducing impurities such as metals contained in various materials include, for example, methods of selecting raw materials with low metal content as raw materials constituting various materials, and methods of filtering raw materials constituting various materials. and a method in which distillation is carried out under conditions where contamination is suppressed as much as possible by lining the inside of the apparatus with Teflon (registered trademark).
  • impurities may be removed using an adsorbent, or a combination of filter filtration and an adsorbent may be used.
  • adsorbent known adsorbents can be used, such as inorganic adsorbents such as silica gel and zeolite, and organic adsorbents such as activated carbon.
  • inorganic adsorbents such as silica gel and zeolite
  • organic adsorbents such as activated carbon.
  • the content of metal components contained in the cleaning liquid after use is preferably 100 mass ppt or less, more preferably 10 mass ppt or less, and even more preferably 1 mass ppt or less.
  • the lower limit is not particularly limited, and is preferably 0 mass ppt or more.
  • Organic processing liquids such as rinsing liquids contain conductive compounds to prevent damage to chemical piping and various parts (filters, O-rings, tubes, etc.) due to static electricity charging and subsequent electrostatic discharge. may be added.
  • the conductive compound is not particularly limited, and for example, methanol may be mentioned.
  • the amount added is not particularly limited, but is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 5% by mass or less in terms of maintaining favorable development characteristics or rinsing characteristics.
  • the lower limit is not particularly limited, and is preferably 0.01% by mass or more.
  • Examples of chemical liquid piping include SUS (stainless steel), polyethylene or polypropylene treated with antistatic treatment, or various types of piping coated with fluororesin (polytetrafluoroethylene, perfluoroalkoxy resin, etc.). can be used.
  • SUS stainless steel
  • polyethylene or polypropylene treated with antistatic treatment or various types of piping coated with fluororesin (polytetrafluoroethylene, perfluoroalkoxy resin, etc.).
  • fluororesin polytetrafluoroethylene, perfluoroalkoxy resin, etc.
  • filter and O-ring antistatically treated polyethylene, polypropylene, or fluororesin (polytetrafluoroethylene, perfluoroalkoxy resin, etc.) can be used.
  • the present specification also relates to an electronic device manufacturing method including the above-described pattern forming method, and an electronic device manufactured by this manufacturing method.
  • Preferred embodiments of the electronic device of this specification include embodiments in which it is installed in electrical and electronic equipment (home appliances, office automation (OA), media-related equipment, optical equipment, communication equipment, etc.).
  • A-1 to A-15 were used. Furthermore, AX-1 to AX-4 were used as resins other than resin (A). For convenience, AX-1 to AX-4 are also listed in the resin (A) column in Table 1 below. The structures of A-1 to A-15 and AX-1 to AX-4 are shown below.
  • the content ratio of the following repeating units is a molar ratio.
  • A-1 to A-15 and AX-1 to AX-4 are acid-decomposable resins.
  • a synthesis example of A-1 is shown below.
  • Other resins (A) were also synthesized in the same manner.
  • B-1 to B-10 were used as salts (B).
  • the structures of B-1 to B-10 are shown below.
  • B-1H to B-10H are acids generated from B-1 to B-10 (conjugate acids of the anions of B-1 to B-10).
  • the structures and pKa of B-1H to B-10H are shown below.
  • C-1H to C-6H are acids generated from C-1 to C-6.
  • the structures and pKa of C-1H to C-6H are shown below.
  • D-1 to D-4 were used as acid diffusion control agents.
  • W-1 Megafac F176 (manufactured by Dainippon Ink & Chemicals Co., Ltd.; fluorine-based)
  • W-2 Megafac R08 (manufactured by Dainippon Ink and Chemicals Co., Ltd.; fluorine and silicone-based)
  • W-3 Polysiloxane polymer KP-341 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.; silicone-based)
  • W-4 Troysol S-366 (manufactured by Troy Chemical Co., Ltd.)
  • W-5 KH-20 (manufactured by AGC Co., Ltd.)
  • W-6 PolyFox PF-6320 (manufactured by OMNOVA Solutions Inc.; fluorine-based)
  • SL-1 Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA)
  • SL-2 Propylene glycol monomethyl ether propionate
  • SL-3 2-heptanone
  • SL-4 Ethyl lactate
  • SL-5 Propylene glycol monomethyl ether (PGME)
  • SL-6 Cyclohexanone
  • SL-7 ⁇ -butyrolactone
  • SL-8 Propylene carbonate
  • A-6/A-12 indicates that two types of resin (A), A-6 and A-12, were used, and "5/5" indicates that A-6 and A-12 were used as the resin (A). This indicates that 5g of each of A-6 and A-12 were used.
  • ⁇ Coating of resist composition The prepared resist composition was applied onto a 6-inch Si (silicon) wafer that had been previously treated with hexamethyldisilazane (HMDS) using a spin coater Mark 8 manufactured by Tokyo Electron, and dried on a hot plate at 130° C. for 300 seconds. As a result, a resist film having a thickness of 100 nm was obtained. Here, 1 inch is 0.0254 m. Note that similar results can be obtained even if the Si wafer is replaced with a chromium substrate.
  • HMDS hexamethyldisilazane
  • ⁇ Pattern formation method (1) EB exposure, alkaline development (positive)>
  • the wafer coated with the resist film obtained above was subjected to pattern irradiation using an electron beam drawing device (manufactured by Advantest Corporation; F7000S, acceleration voltage 50 keV). After electron beam drawing, it was heated on a hot plate at 100°C for 60 seconds, immersed in a 2.38% by mass tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH) aqueous solution for 60 seconds, rinsed with water for 30 seconds, and dried. . Thereafter, the wafer was rotated at a rotation speed of 4000 rpm for 30 seconds, and then baked at 95° C. for 60 seconds to dry it.
  • TMAH tetramethylammonium hydroxide
  • a 1:1 line-and-space pattern with a line width of 50 nm is drawn with an electron beam on a 10 ⁇ m square area 1 in FIG. 1, heated on a hot plate at 100° C. for 60 seconds, and developed.
  • the sensitivity at which one line and space was formed was designated as D.
  • a 1:1 line-and-space pattern with a line width of 50 nm is drawn with an electron beam on a 10 ⁇ m square region 2 in FIG.
  • the sensitivity at which a 1:1 line and space with a line width of 50 nm is formed in region 2 after heating on a hot plate for 60 seconds and developing is defined as B.
  • the sensitivity ratio D/B was used as an evaluation index of density dependence. The smaller the value of D/B, the less the density dependence, and the better the performance.
  • Table 2 below shows the resist compositions used in each Example and Comparative Example and the results of each Example and Comparative Example.
  • Comparative Example 5 had poorer density dependence than the Examples, but this was due to the high solubility of the AX-4 used in the developer, and the high solubility of the resin in the developer after AX-4 was deprotected. This is presumed to be due to too high solubility in
  • the present invention it is possible to provide an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition that is excellent in density dependence, LWR performance, and defect suppression performance. Further, the present invention can provide an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, a pattern forming method, and an electronic device manufacturing method using the above-mentioned actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
  • Materials For Photolithography (AREA)

Abstract

This actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition comprises a resin (A) having a group that is decomposed by action of an acid to have an increased polarity, and a salt (B). The resin (A) includes a repeating unit having a specific structure, and a repeating unit having a polar group. The salt (B) is a compound having a specific structure. This actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, this pattern forming method, and this electronic device production method use the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition. Accordingly, provided are: an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition having excellent density dependence, LWR performance, and defect inhibition performance; and an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, a pattern forming method, and an electronic device production method, which use the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition.

Description

感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物、感活性光線性又は感放射線性膜、パターン形成方法、及び電子デバイスの製造方法Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, pattern forming method, and electronic device manufacturing method
 本発明は、感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物、感活性光線性又は感放射線性膜、パターン形成方法、及び電子デバイスの製造方法に関する。より詳細には、本発明は、超LSI(Large Scale Integration)及び高容量マイクロチップの製造プロセス、ナノインプリント用モールド作成プロセス並びに高密度情報記録媒体の製造プロセス等に適用可能な超マイクロリソグラフィプロセス、並びにその他のフォトファブリケーションプロセスに好適に用いることができる感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物、感活性光線性又は感放射線性膜、パターン形成方法、及び電子デバイスの製造方法に関する。 The present invention relates to an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, a pattern forming method, and an electronic device manufacturing method. More specifically, the present invention relates to an ultra-microlithography process applicable to the manufacturing process of ultra-LSI (Large Scale Integration) and high-capacity microchips, the manufacturing process of nanoimprint molds, the manufacturing process of high-density information recording media, and the like; The present invention relates to actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin compositions, actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive films, pattern forming methods, and electronic device manufacturing methods that can be suitably used in other photofabrication processes.
 従来、IC(Integrated Circuit)、LSI(Large Scale Integration)などの半導体デバイスの製造プロセスにおいては、レジスト組成物を用いたリソグラフィーによる微細加工が行われている。近年、集積回路の高集積化に伴い、サブミクロン領域又はクオーターミクロン領域の超微細パターン形成が要求されるようになってきている。それに伴い、露光波長もg線からi線に、更にKrFエキシマレーザー光に、というように短波長化の傾向が見られ、現在では193nm波長を有するArFエキシマレーザーを光源とする露光機が開発されている。また、更に解像力を高める技術として、従来から投影レンズと試料の間に高屈折率の液体(以下、「液浸液」ともいう)で満たす、所謂、液浸法の開発が進んでいる。 Conventionally, in the manufacturing process of semiconductor devices such as IC (Integrated Circuit) and LSI (Large Scale Integration), microfabrication is performed by lithography using a resist composition. In recent years, as integrated circuits have become more highly integrated, there has been a demand for ultra-fine pattern formation in the submicron region or quarter micron region. Along with this, there has been a trend towards shorter exposure wavelengths, from g-line to i-line and then to KrF excimer laser light, and now exposure machines that use ArF excimer laser light with a wavelength of 193 nm as a light source have been developed. ing. Furthermore, as a technique to further improve resolution, the so-called immersion method, in which a liquid with a high refractive index (hereinafter also referred to as "immersion liquid") is filled between the projection lens and the sample, has been developed.
 また、現在では、エキシマレーザー光以外にも、電子線(EB)、X線及び極紫外線(EUV)等を用いたリソグラフィーも開発が進んでいる。これに伴い、各種の活性光線又は放射線に有効に感応するレジスト組成物が開発されている。 Currently, in addition to excimer laser light, lithography using electron beams (EB), X-rays, extreme ultraviolet (EUV), etc. is also being developed. Along with this, resist compositions that are effectively sensitive to various types of actinic rays or radiation have been developed.
 例えば、特許文献1及び2には、フェノール性水酸基を複数有する芳香族ジカルボン酸塩を含有するレジスト組成物が記載されている。 For example, Patent Documents 1 and 2 describe resist compositions containing aromatic dicarboxylic acid salts having multiple phenolic hydroxyl groups.
日本国特開2020-91404号公報Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2020-91404 日本国特開2022-66864号公報Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2022-66864
 しかしながら、特許文献1及び2に記載されたレジスト組成物は、疎密依存性、ラインウィズスラフネス(Line Width Roughness:LWR)性能、及び欠陥抑制性能に劣るという問題があった。
 疎密依存性とは、あるパターン(例えば、線幅50nmの1:1ラインアンドスペースパターン)を形成する際に、そのパターンを形成する領域の周囲の露光量が少ない場合(疎な場合)の感度Dと、そのパターンを形成する領域の周囲の露光量が多い場合(密な場合)の感度Bとに差が生じる性質のことを指す。疎密依存性に劣るとは、上記感度の比であるD/Bが大きい(例えば、D/Bが1.99以上である)ことを指し、疎密依存性に優れるとは、D/Bが小さい(例えば、D/Bが1.99未満である)ことを指す。
 LWR性能とは、パターンのLWRを小さくできる性能のことを指す。
 欠陥抑制性能とは、欠陥の発生を抑制することができる性能のことを指す。
However, the resist compositions described in Patent Documents 1 and 2 have problems in that they are inferior in density dependence, line width roughness (LWR) performance, and defect suppression performance.
The density dependence refers to the sensitivity when forming a certain pattern (for example, a 1:1 line-and-space pattern with a line width of 50 nm) when the exposure amount around the area where the pattern is formed is small (sparse). It refers to the property that there is a difference between sensitivity D and sensitivity B when the exposure amount around the area where the pattern is formed is large (when the exposure is dense). Poor density dependence means that D/B, which is the ratio of the above sensitivity, is large (for example, D/B is 1.99 or more), and excellent density dependence means that D/B is small. (For example, D/B is less than 1.99).
LWR performance refers to the ability to reduce the LWR of a pattern.
Defect suppression performance refers to performance that can suppress the occurrence of defects.
 本発明は、疎密依存性、LWR性能、及び欠陥抑制性能に優れる感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物を提供することを課題とする。また、本発明は、上記感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物を用いた感活性光線性又は感放射線性膜、パターン形成方法、及び電子デバイスの製造方法を提供することを課題とする。 An object of the present invention is to provide an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition that is excellent in density dependence, LWR performance, and defect suppression performance. Another object of the present invention is to provide an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, a pattern forming method, and an electronic device manufacturing method using the above-mentioned actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition.
 本発明者らは、以下の構成により上記課題を解決できることを見出した。
 本発明により、上記課題を解決できる理由について、完全には明らかになっていないが、樹脂(A)と塩(B)とが相溶性に優れるためであると本発明者らは推定している。
The present inventors have discovered that the above problem can be solved by the following configuration.
Although the reason why the above problems can be solved by the present invention is not completely clear, the present inventors assume that it is because the resin (A) and the salt (B) have excellent compatibility. .
[1]
 酸の作用により分解し極性が増大する基を含む樹脂(A)と、塩(B)とを含有する感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物であって、
 上記樹脂(A)は、下記一般式(S1)で表される繰り返し単位及び下記一般式(S2)で表される繰り返し単位からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1つの繰り返し単位と、極性基を有する繰り返し単位とを含み、
 上記塩(B)は、下記一般式(T1)で表される化合物である、感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
[1]
An actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition containing a resin (A) containing a group that decomposes and increases polarity by the action of an acid, and a salt (B),
The resin (A) has at least one repeating unit selected from the group consisting of a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (S1) and a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (S2), and a repeating unit having a polar group. including units,
The salt (B) is an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, which is a compound represented by the following general formula (T1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
 一般式(S1)中、Ra~Raは、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、又は、アルコキシカルボニル基を表す。
 Laは単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
 Ra~Raは、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、芳香族複素環式基、アラルキル基、又は、アルケニル基を表す。Ra~Raのうち2つが互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。
 Raは、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、芳香族複素環式基、アルコキシ基、アシルオキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、ハロゲン原子、又は、シアノ基を表す。Raが複数存在する場合、複数のRaは同一でも異なっていてもよい。
 Ra~Ra、La、及びRaのうち2つが互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。
 naは0~4の整数を表す。maは0~2の整数を表す。
 一般式(S2)中、Ra~Raは、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、又は、アルコキシカルボニル基を表す。
 Laは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
 Araは、芳香環基を表す。
 Ra10~Ra12は、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、芳香族複素環式基、アラルキル基、アルコキシ基、シクロアルキルオキシ基、又は、アルケニル基を表す。
 Ra10~Ra12のうち少なくとも2つが互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。
 Ra~Ra12のうち少なくとも1つがAraと結合してもよい。
In the general formula (S1), Ra 1 to Ra 3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group.
La 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
Ra 4 to Ra 6 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aromatic heterocyclic group, an aralkyl group, or an alkenyl group. Two of Ra 4 to Ra 6 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
Ra 0 represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aromatic heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a halogen atom, or a cyano group. When a plurality of Ra 0s exist, the plurality of Ra 0s may be the same or different.
Two of Ra 1 to Ra 3 , La 1 and Ra 0 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
na represents an integer from 0 to 4. ma represents an integer from 0 to 2.
In general formula (S2), Ra 7 to Ra 9 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group.
La 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
Ara represents an aromatic ring group.
Ra 10 to Ra 12 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aromatic heterocyclic group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkyloxy group, or an alkenyl group.
At least two of Ra 10 to Ra 12 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
At least one of Ra 9 to Ra 12 may bind to Ara.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
 一般式(T1)中、Arbは、芳香環を表す。上記芳香環は置換基を有してもよい。
 Qは、酸の残基を表す。
 一般式(T1)中のアニオンは、pKaが-1~9の酸の共役塩基である。
 Rbは、-OH、-ORb、-NRbRb、-SH、又は-SRbを表し、複数のRbは同一でも異なっていてもよい。
 Rbは、アルキル基、アリール基、又はアシル基を表す。
 Rb及びRbは、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基、又はアシル基を表す。
 Rbは、アルキル基、アリール基、又はアシル基を表す。
 Rb~Rbのうち少なくとも2つが互いに結合し環を形成してもよい。Arbが置換基を有する場合、上記置換基とRb~Rbの少なくとも1つが結合して環を形成してもよい。
 Lbは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。Lbは、Rbに含まれる水素原子を置換する形でRbと結合して環を形成してもよい。Lbは、Rb~Rbの少なくとも1つと結合して環を形成してもよい。Arbが置換基を有する場合、上記置換基とLbは結合して環を形成してもよい。
 pは2~5の整数を表す。
 Gm+は、m価の有機カチオンを表す。mは1以上の整数を表す。
[2]
 上記極性基を有する繰り返し単位が、下記一般式(S3)で表される繰り返し単位である、[1]に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
In general formula (T1), Arb represents an aromatic ring. The above aromatic ring may have a substituent.
Q represents an acid residue.
The anion in general formula (T1) is a conjugate base of an acid with a pKa of -1 to 9.
Rb 1 represents -OH, -ORb 2 , -NRb 3 Rb 4 , -SH, or -SRb 5 , and multiple Rb 1 's may be the same or different.
Rb 2 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or an acyl group.
Rb 3 and Rb 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or an acyl group.
Rb 5 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or an acyl group.
At least two of Rb 2 to Rb 5 may be bonded to each other to form a ring. When Arb has a substituent, the above substituent and at least one of Rb 2 to Rb 5 may be bonded to form a ring.
Lb 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Lb 1 may be combined with Rb 1 to form a ring by substituting a hydrogen atom contained in Rb 1 . Lb 1 may be bonded to at least one of Rb 2 to Rb 5 to form a ring. When Arb has a substituent, the substituent and Lb 1 may be combined to form a ring.
p represents an integer from 2 to 5.
G m+ represents an m-valent organic cation. m represents an integer of 1 or more.
[2]
The actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to [1], wherein the repeating unit having a polar group is a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (S3).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
 一般式(S3)中、R101、R102及びR103は、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、又は、アルコキシカルボニル基を表す。R102はArと結合して環を形成してもよく、その場合のR102は単結合又はアルキレン基を表す。
 Lは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
 Arは、芳香環基を表す。
 kは、1~5の整数を表す。
[3]
 上記一般式(T1)中のアニオンが、pKaが0~7の酸の共役塩基である、[1]又は[2]に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
[4]
 上記一般式(T1)中のRbのうち少なくとも1つが、-OHである、[1]~[3]のいずれか1つに記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
[5]
 上記一般式(T1)中のQが、カルボキシレートアニオン基である、[1]~[4]のいずれか1つに記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
[6]
 さらに、上記塩(B)とは異なる化合物であり、活性光線又は放射線の照射により酸を発生する塩(C)を含有し、上記塩(C)が、酸の作用により分解する基を有する、[1]~[5]のいずれか1つに記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
[7]
 上記塩(C)が、下記一般式(U1)で表される化合物である、[6]に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
In general formula (S3), R 101 , R 102 and R 103 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group. R 102 may combine with Ar A to form a ring, in which case R 102 represents a single bond or an alkylene group.
L A represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
Ar A represents an aromatic ring group.
k represents an integer from 1 to 5.
[3]
The actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to [1] or [2], wherein the anion in the general formula (T1) is a conjugate base of an acid having a pKa of 0 to 7.
[4]
The actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to any one of [1] to [3], wherein at least one of Rb 1 in the general formula (T1) is -OH.
[5]
The actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to any one of [1] to [4], wherein Q in the general formula (T1) is a carboxylate anion group.
[6]
Furthermore, the salt (C) is a compound different from the above salt (B) and contains a salt (C) that generates an acid upon irradiation with actinic rays or radiation, and the above salt (C) has a group that is decomposed by the action of the acid. The actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to any one of [1] to [5].
[7]
The actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to [6], wherein the salt (C) is a compound represented by the following general formula (U1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
 一般式(U1)中、Lは、単結合又は二価の連結基を表す。Lが複数存在するとき、複数のLは同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
 Aは、酸の作用により分解する基を表す。Aが複数存在するとき、複数のAは同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
 nは、1~5の整数を表す。
 Xは、n+1価の連結基を表す。
 Mは、スルホニウムイオン又はヨードニウムイオンを表す。
[8]
 上記塩(C)が、下記一般式(U2)で表される化合物である、[6]又は[7]に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
In general formula (U1), L represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. When a plurality of L's exist, the plurality of L's may be the same or different.
A represents a group that decomposes under the action of an acid. When a plurality of A's exist, the plural A's may be the same or different.
n represents an integer from 1 to 5.
X represents an n+1-valent linking group.
M + represents a sulfonium ion or an iodonium ion.
[8]
The actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to [6] or [7], wherein the salt (C) is a compound represented by the following general formula (U2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
 一般式(U2)中、L、A、n、及びMは、それぞれ、一般式(U1)中のL、A、n、及びMと同じ意味を表す。
[9]
 [1]~[8]のいずれか1つに記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物を用いて形成された感活性光線性又は感放射線性膜。
[10]
 [1]~[8]のいずれか1つに記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物を用いてレジスト膜を形成するレジスト膜形成工程と、
 上記レジスト膜を露光する露光工程と、
 露光された上記レジスト膜を現像液を用いて現像する現像工程とを含むパターン形成方法。
[11]
 [10]に記載のパターン形成方法を含む電子デバイスの製造方法。
In general formula (U2), L, A, n, and M + represent the same meanings as L, A, n, and M + in general formula (U1), respectively.
[9]
An actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film formed using the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to any one of [1] to [8].
[10]
A resist film forming step of forming a resist film using the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to any one of [1] to [8];
an exposure step of exposing the resist film;
A pattern forming method comprising a developing step of developing the exposed resist film using a developer.
[11]
A method for manufacturing an electronic device, including the pattern forming method according to [10].
 本発明により、疎密依存性、LWR性能、及び欠陥抑制性能に優れる感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物を提供することができる。
 また、本発明により、上記感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物を用いた感活性光線性又は感放射線性膜、パターン形成方法、及び電子デバイスの製造方法を提供することができる。
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition that is excellent in density dependence, LWR performance, and defect suppression performance.
Further, the present invention can provide an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, a pattern forming method, and an electronic device manufacturing method using the above-mentioned actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition.
疎密依存性の評価における、パターンを形成する領域の周囲の露光量が少ない場合(疎な場合)の感度Dを求める際の露光領域を示す模式図である。FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing an exposure area when determining sensitivity D when the exposure amount around a pattern forming area is small (sparse) in evaluation of density dependence. 疎密依存性の評価における、パターンを形成する領域の周囲の露光量が多い場合(密な場合)の感度Bを求める際の露光領域を示す模式図である。FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing an exposure area when determining sensitivity B when the exposure amount around a region forming a pattern is large (in a dense case) in evaluation of density dependence.
 以下、本発明について詳細に説明する。
 以下に記載する構成要件の説明は、本発明の代表的な実施態様に基づいてなされることがあるが、本発明はそのような実施態様に限定されない。
The present invention will be explained in detail below.
Although the description of the constituent elements described below may be made based on typical embodiments of the present invention, the present invention is not limited to such embodiments.
 本明細書において、「活性光線」又は「放射線」とは、例えば、水銀灯の輝線スペクトル、エキシマレーザーに代表される遠紫外線、極紫外線(EUV:Extreme Ultraviolet)、X線、軟X線、及び電子線(EB:Electron Beam)等を意味する。
 本明細書において、「光」とは、活性光線又は放射線を意味する。
 本明細書において、「露光」とは、特に断らない限り、水銀灯の輝線スペクトル、エキシマレーザーに代表される遠紫外線、極紫外線、X線、及びEUV等による露光のみならず、電子線、及びイオンビーム等の粒子線による描画も含む。
 本明細書において、「~」とはその前後に記載される数値を下限値及び上限値として含む意味で使用される。
In this specification, "active rays" or "radiation" include, for example, the bright line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays typified by excimer lasers, extreme ultraviolet (EUV), X-rays, soft X-rays, and electron It means a line (EB: Electron Beam) or the like.
As used herein, "light" means actinic rays or radiation.
In this specification, "exposure" refers not only to exposure to the bright line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays typified by excimer lasers, extreme ultraviolet rays, X-rays, and EUV, but also to electron beams and ion beams, unless otherwise specified. It also includes drawing using particle beams such as beams.
In the present specification, "~" is used to include the numerical values described before and after it as a lower limit value and an upper limit value.
 本明細書において、(メタ)アクリレートはアクリレート及びメタクリレートの少なくとも1種を表す。また(メタ)アクリル酸はアクリル酸及びメタクリル酸の少なくとも1種を表す。 In this specification, (meth)acrylate represents at least one of acrylate and methacrylate. Further, (meth)acrylic acid represents at least one of acrylic acid and methacrylic acid.
 本明細書において、樹脂の重量平均分子量(Mw)、数平均分子量(Mn)、及び分散度(分子量分布ともいう)(Mw/Mn)は、GPC(Gel Permeation Chromatography)装置(東ソー株式会社製HLC-8120GPC)によるGPC測定(溶剤:テトラヒドロフラン、流量(サンプル注入量):10μL、カラム:東ソー株式会社製TSK gel Multipore HXL-M、カラム温度:40℃、流速:1.0mL/分、検出器:示差屈折率検出器(Refractive Index Detector))によるポリスチレン換算値として定義される。 In this specification, the weight average molecular weight (Mw), number average molecular weight (Mn), and degree of dispersion (also referred to as molecular weight distribution) (Mw/Mn) of the resin are determined using a GPC (Gel Permeation Chromatography) apparatus (HLC manufactured by Tosoh Corporation). -8120GPC) GPC measurement (solvent: tetrahydrofuran, flow rate (sample injection amount): 10 μL, column: Tosoh Corporation TSK gel Multipore HXL-M, column temperature: 40 ° C., flow rate: 1.0 mL/min, detector: It is defined as a polystyrene equivalent value determined by a differential refractive index detector (Refractive Index Detector).
 本明細書中における基(原子団)の表記について、本発明の趣旨に反しない限り、置換及び無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有さない基と共に置換基を含む基をも包含する。例えば、「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有さないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも包含する。また、本明細書中における「有機基」とは、少なくとも1個の炭素原子を含む基をいう。
 置換基としては、特に断らない限り、1価の置換基が好ましい。置換基の例としては水素原子を除く1価の非金属原子団を挙げることができ、例えば、以下の置換基Tから選択できる。
Regarding the notation of a group (atomic group) in this specification, unless it goes against the spirit of the present invention, the notation that does not indicate substituted or unsubstituted includes a group containing a substituent as well as a group having no substituent. do. For example, the term "alkyl group" includes not only an alkyl group without a substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group). Furthermore, the term "organic group" as used herein refers to a group containing at least one carbon atom.
As the substituent, unless otherwise specified, monovalent substituents are preferred. Examples of the substituent include monovalent nonmetallic atomic groups excluding hydrogen atoms, and can be selected from the following substituents T, for example.
(置換基T)
 置換基Tとしては、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子及びヨウ素原子等のハロゲン原子;メトキシ基、エトキシ基及びtert-ブトキシ基等のアルコキシ基;シクロアルキルオキシ基;フェノキシ基及びp-トリルオキシ基等のアリールオキシ基;メトキシカルボニル基及びブトキシカルボニル基等のアルコキシカルボニル基;シクロアルキルオキシカルボニル基;フェノキシカルボニル基等のアリールオキシカルボニル基;アセトキシ基、プロピオニルオキシ基及びベンゾイルオキシ基等のアシルオキシ基;アセチル基、ベンゾイル基、イソブチリル基、アクリロイル基、メタクリロイル基及びメトキサリル基等のアシル基;スルファニル基;メチルスルファニル基及びtert-ブチルスルファニル基等のアルキルスルファニル基;フェニルスルファニル基及びp-トリルスルファニル基等のアリールスルファニル基;アルキル基;アルケニル基;シクロアルキル基;アリール基;芳香族複素環式基;ヒドロキシ基;カルボキシル基;ホルミル基;スルホ基;シアノ基;アルキルアミノカルボニル基;アリールアミノカルボニル基;スルホンアミド基;シリル基;アミノ基;カルバモイル基;等が挙げられる。また、これらの置換基が更に1個以上の置換基を有することができる場合は、その更なる置換基として上記した置換基から選択した置換基を1個以上有する基(例えば、モノアルキルアミノ基、ジアルキルアミノ基、アリールアミノ基、トリフルオロメチル基など)も置換基Tの例に含まれる。
(Substituent T)
Examples of the substituent T include halogen atoms such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine; alkoxy groups such as methoxy, ethoxy and tert-butoxy; cycloalkyloxy; phenoxy and p-tolyloxy groups; Aryloxy groups; alkoxycarbonyl groups such as methoxycarbonyl and butoxycarbonyl groups; cycloalkyloxycarbonyl groups; aryloxycarbonyl groups such as phenoxycarbonyl groups; acyloxy groups such as acetoxy, propionyloxy and benzoyloxy groups; acetyl Acyl groups such as benzoyl, isobutyryl, acryloyl, methacryloyl and methoxalyl groups; sulfanyl groups; alkylsulfanyl groups such as methylsulfanyl and tert-butylsulfanyl groups; phenylsulfanyl groups and p-tolylsulfanyl groups; Arylsulfanyl group; alkyl group; alkenyl group; cycloalkyl group; aryl group; aromatic heterocyclic group; hydroxy group; carboxyl group; formyl group; sulfo group; cyano group; alkylaminocarbonyl group; arylaminocarbonyl group; sulfone Examples include amide group; silyl group; amino group; carbamoyl group; and the like. In addition, when these substituents can further have one or more substituents, the further substituent is a group having one or more substituents selected from the above-mentioned substituents (for example, a monoalkylamino group). , dialkylamino group, arylamino group, trifluoromethyl group, etc.) are also included as examples of the substituent T.
 本明細書において、表記される2価の基の結合方向は、特に断らない限り制限されない。例えば、「X-Y-Z」なる式で表される化合物中の、Yが-COO-である場合、Yは、-CO-O-であってもよく、-O-CO-であってもよい。上記化合物は「X-CO-O-Z」であってもよく、「X-O-CO-Z」であってもよい。 In this specification, the direction of bonding of the divalent groups described is not limited unless otherwise specified. For example, when Y in the compound represented by the formula "X-Y-Z" is -COO-, Y may be -CO-O- or -O-CO- Good too. The above compound may be "X-CO-O-Z" or "X-O-CO-Z".
 本明細書において、酸解離定数(pKa)とは、水溶液中でのpKaを表し、具体的には、下記ソフトウェアパッケージ1を用いて、ハメットの置換基定数及び公知文献値のデータベースに基づいた値を、計算により求められる値である。本明細書中に記載したpKaの値は、全て、このソフトウェアパッケージを用いて計算により求めた値を示す。
 ソフトウェアパッケージ1: Advanced Chemistry Development (ACD/Labs) Software V8.14 for Solaris (1994-2007 ACD/Labs)。
In this specification, acid dissociation constant (pKa) refers to pKa in an aqueous solution, and specifically, it is a value based on Hammett's substituent constant and a database of known literature values using the following software package 1. is the value obtained by calculation. All pKa values described herein are values calculated using this software package.
Software package 1: Advanced Chemistry Development (ACD/Labs) Software V8.14 for Solaris (1994-2007 ACD/Labs).
 また、pKaは、分子軌道計算法によっても求められる。この具体的な方法としては、熱力学サイクルに基づいて、水溶液中におけるH解離自由エネルギーを計算することで算出する手法が挙げられる。H解離自由エネルギーの計算方法については、例えばDFT(密度汎関数法)により計算することができるが、他にも様々な手法が文献等で報告されており、これに制限されるものではない。なお、DFTを実施できるソフトウェアは複数存在するが、例えば、Gaussian16が挙げられる。 Furthermore, pKa can also be determined by molecular orbital calculation method. A specific method for this includes a method of calculating H 2 + dissociation free energy in an aqueous solution based on a thermodynamic cycle. The H + dissociation free energy can be calculated, for example, by DFT (density functional theory), but various other methods have been reported in the literature, and the method is not limited to this. . Note that there is a plurality of software that can perform DFT, and one example is Gaussian 16.
 本明細書において、pKaとは、上述した通り、ソフトウェアパッケージ1を用いて、ハメットの置換基定数及び公知文献値のデータベースに基づいた値を計算により求められる値を指すが、この手法によりpKaが算出できない場合には、DFT(密度汎関数法)に基づいてGaussian16により得られる値を採用するものとする。
 本明細書において、pKaは、上述した通り「水溶液中でのpKa」を指すが、水溶液中でのpKaが算出できない場合には、「ジメチルスルホキシド(DMSO)溶液中でのpKa」を採用するものとする。
In this specification, pKa refers to a value obtained by calculating a value based on Hammett's substituent constant and a database of known literature values using software package 1, as described above. If calculation is not possible, a value obtained by Gaussian 16 based on DFT (density functional theory) is adopted.
In this specification, pKa refers to "pKa in aqueous solution" as described above, but if pKa in aqueous solution cannot be calculated, "pKa in dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO) solution" is adopted. shall be.
 本明細書において、「固形分」とは、感活性光線性又は感放射線性膜を形成する成分を意味し、溶剤は含まれない。また、感活性光線性又は感放射線性膜を形成する成分であれば、その性状が液体状であっても、固形分とみなす。 In this specification, "solid content" means a component that forms an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, and does not include a solvent. Furthermore, if the component forms an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, it is considered to be a solid content even if the component is liquid.
<感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物>
 本発明の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物(「本発明の組成物」ともいう。)は、酸の作用により分解し極性が増大する基を含む樹脂(A)と、塩(B)とを含有する感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物であって、樹脂(A)は、一般式(S1)で表される繰り返し単位及び一般式(S2)で表される繰り返し単位からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1つの繰り返し単位と、極性基を有する繰り返し単位とを含み、塩(B)は、一般式(T1)で表される化合物である、感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物である。
<Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition>
The actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition of the present invention (also referred to as "composition of the present invention") comprises a resin (A) containing a group that decomposes and increases polarity by the action of an acid, and a salt (B). ), wherein the resin (A) is composed of a repeating unit represented by general formula (S1) and a repeating unit represented by general formula (S2). The salt (B) is an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin containing at least one repeating unit selected from the group consisting of a repeating unit having a polar group, and the salt (B) is a compound represented by the general formula (T1). It is a composition.
 本発明の組成物は、典型的にはレジスト組成物であり、ポジ型のレジスト組成物であっても、ネガ型のレジスト組成物であってもよい。本発明の組成物は、アルカリ現像用のレジスト組成物であっても、有機溶剤現像用のレジスト組成物であってもよい。
 本発明の組成物は、化学増幅型のレジスト組成物であっても、非化学増幅型のレジスト組成物であってもよい。本発明の組成物は、典型的には、化学増幅型のレジスト組成物である。
 本発明の組成物を用いて感活性光線性又は感放射線性膜を形成することができる。本発明の組成物を用いて形成された感活性光線性又は感放射線性膜は、典型的にはレジスト膜である。
 以下、まず、本発明の組成物の各種成分について詳述する。
The composition of the present invention is typically a resist composition, and may be a positive resist composition or a negative resist composition. The composition of the present invention may be a resist composition for alkaline development or an organic solvent development resist composition.
The composition of the present invention may be a chemically amplified resist composition or a non-chemically amplified resist composition. The composition of the present invention is typically a chemically amplified resist composition.
Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive films can be formed using the composition of the present invention. The actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film formed using the composition of the present invention is typically a resist film.
Hereinafter, first, various components of the composition of the present invention will be explained in detail.
[樹脂(A)]
 本発明の組成物に含まれる樹脂(A)は、酸の作用により分解し極性が増大する基(「酸分解性基」ともいう。)を含む樹脂である。
 樹脂(A)は、酸分解性樹脂であり、本発明の組成物を用いたパターン形成方法において、典型的には、現像液としてアルカリ現像液を採用した場合には、ポジ型パターンが好適に形成され、現像液として有機系現像液を採用した場合には、ネガ型パターンが好適に形成される。
[Resin (A)]
The resin (A) contained in the composition of the present invention is a resin containing a group (also referred to as an "acid-decomposable group") that decomposes and increases polarity under the action of an acid.
The resin (A) is an acid-decomposable resin, and when an alkaline developer is typically used as the developer in the pattern forming method using the composition of the present invention, a positive pattern is preferably used. When an organic developer is used as the developer, a negative pattern is suitably formed.
 酸分解性基は、典型的には、酸の作用により分解して極性基を生じる基である。酸分解性基は、酸の作用により脱離する基(脱離基)で極性基が保護された構造を有することが好ましい。典型的には、樹脂(A)は、酸の作用により極性が増大してアルカリ現像液に対する溶解度が増大し、有機溶剤に対する溶解度が減少する。 An acid-decomposable group is typically a group that decomposes under the action of an acid to produce a polar group. The acid-decomposable group preferably has a structure in which a polar group is protected by a group that leaves by the action of an acid (leaving group). Typically, the polarity of the resin (A) increases due to the action of an acid, so that its solubility in an alkaline developer increases and its solubility in an organic solvent decreases.
 樹脂(A)は、一般式(S1)で表される繰り返し単位及び一般式(S2)で表される繰り返し単位からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1つの繰り返し単位を含む。一般式(S1)で表される繰り返し単位及び一般式(S2)で表される繰り返し単位からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1つの繰り返し単位は、酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位であることが好ましい。 The resin (A) contains at least one repeating unit selected from the group consisting of the repeating unit represented by the general formula (S1) and the repeating unit represented by the general formula (S2). At least one repeating unit selected from the group consisting of the repeating unit represented by general formula (S1) and the repeating unit represented by general formula (S2) is preferably a repeating unit having an acid-decomposable group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
 一般式(S1)中、Ra~Raは、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、又は、アルコキシカルボニル基を表す。
 Laは単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
 Ra~Raは、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、芳香族複素環式基、アラルキル基、又は、アルケニル基を表す。Ra~Raのうち2つが互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。
 Raは、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、芳香族複素環式基、アルコキシ基、アシルオキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、ハロゲン原子、又は、シアノ基を表す。Raが複数存在する場合、複数のRaは同一でも異なっていてもよい。
 Ra~Ra、La、及びRaのうち2つが互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。
 naは0~4の整数を表す。maは0~2の整数を表す。
In the general formula (S1), Ra 1 to Ra 3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group.
La 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
Ra 4 to Ra 6 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aromatic heterocyclic group, an aralkyl group, or an alkenyl group. Two of Ra 4 to Ra 6 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
Ra 0 represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aromatic heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a halogen atom, or a cyano group. When a plurality of Ra 0s exist, the plurality of Ra 0s may be the same or different.
Two of Ra 1 to Ra 3 , La 1 and Ra 0 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
na represents an integer from 0 to 4. ma represents an integer from 0 to 2.
 一般式(S2)中、Ra~Raは、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、又は、アルコキシカルボニル基を表す。
 Laは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
 Araは、芳香環基を表す。
 Ra10~Ra12は、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、芳香族複素環式基、アラルキル基、アルコキシ基、シクロアルキルオキシ基、又は、アルケニル基を表す。
 Ra10~Ra12のうち少なくとも2つが互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。
 Ra~Ra12のうち少なくとも1つがAraと結合してもよい。
In general formula (S2), Ra 7 to Ra 9 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group.
La 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
Ara represents an aromatic ring group.
Ra 10 to Ra 12 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aromatic heterocyclic group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkyloxy group, or an alkenyl group.
At least two of Ra 10 to Ra 12 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
At least one of Ra 9 to Ra 12 may bind to Ara.
(一般式(S1)で表される繰り返し単位)
 一般式(S1)中のRa~Raは、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、又は、アルコキシカルボニル基を表す。
 Ra~Raのアルキル基としては、直鎖状及び分岐鎖状のいずれであってもよい。アルキル基の炭素数は特に制限されないが、1~5が好ましく、1~3がより好ましい。
 Ra~Raのシクロアルキル基の炭素数は特に制限されないが、3~20が好ましく、5~15がより好ましい。Ra~Raのシクロアルキル基としては、シクロペンチル基、及びシクロヘキシル基等の単環のシクロアルキル基、並びにノルボルニル基、テトラシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロドデカニル基、及びアダマンチル基等の多環のシクロアルキル基が好ましい。
 Ra~Raのハロゲン原子としては、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、及びヨウ素原子が挙げられ、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子が好ましい。
 Ra~Raのアルコキシカルボニル基中に含まれるアルキル基としては直鎖状及び分岐鎖状のいずれであってもよい。アルコキシカルボニル基中に含まれるアルキル基の炭素数は特に制限されないが、1~5が好ましく、1~3がより好ましい。
(Repeating unit represented by general formula (S1))
Ra 1 to Ra 3 in general formula (S1) each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group.
The alkyl groups of Ra 1 to Ra 3 may be either linear or branched. The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 5, more preferably 1 to 3.
The number of carbon atoms in the cycloalkyl group of Ra 1 to Ra 3 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 3 to 20, more preferably 5 to 15. Examples of the cycloalkyl group for Ra 1 to Ra 3 include monocyclic cycloalkyl groups such as a cyclopentyl group and a cyclohexyl group, and polycyclic groups such as a norbornyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, and an adamantyl group. A cycloalkyl group is preferred.
Examples of the halogen atom of Ra 1 to Ra 3 include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom, with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom being preferred.
The alkyl group contained in the alkoxycarbonyl group of Ra 1 to Ra 3 may be either linear or branched. The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group contained in the alkoxycarbonyl group is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 5, more preferably 1 to 3.
 一般式(S1)中のLaは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。2価の連結基としては、例えば、カルボニル基(-CO-)、-O-、-S-、-SO-、-SO-、アミド基(-CONR-)、スルホンアミド基(-SONR-)、アルキレン基、シクロアルキレン基、アルケニレン基、及びこれらの複数が連結した連結基等が挙げられる。上記Rはそれぞれ水素原子又は有機基を表し、有機基としてはアルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、及びこれらの組み合わせが好ましい。
 Laは、単結合又は-COO-であることが好ましく、単結合であることがより好ましい。
La 1 in general formula (S1) represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Examples of divalent linking groups include carbonyl group (-CO-), -O-, -S-, -SO-, -SO 2 -, amide group (-CONR-), and sulfonamide group (-SO 2 NR-), an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, an alkenylene group, and a linking group in which a plurality of these are linked. Each of the above R represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group, and the organic group is preferably an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, or a combination thereof.
La 1 is preferably a single bond or -COO-, and more preferably a single bond.
 一般式(S1)中のRa~Raは、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、芳香族複素環式基、アラルキル基、又は、アルケニル基を表す。 Ra 4 to Ra 6 in general formula (S1) each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aromatic heterocyclic group, an aralkyl group, or an alkenyl group.
 Ra~Raのアルキル基としては、直鎖状及び分岐鎖状のいずれであってもよい。アルキル基の炭素数は特に制限されないが、1~10が好ましく、1~6がより好ましい。Ra~Raのアルキル基に含まれるメチレン基は、-CO-及び-O-の少なくとも1つで置き換わっていてもよい。
 Ra~Raのシクロアルキル基の炭素数は特に制限されないが、3~20が好ましく、5~15がより好ましい。Ra~Raのシクロアルキル基としては、シクロペンチル基、及びシクロヘキシル基等の単環のシクロアルキル基、並びにノルボルニル基、テトラシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロドデカニル基、及びアダマンチル基等の多環のシクロアルキル基が好ましい。
 Ra~Raのアリール基の炭素数は特に制限されないが、6~20が好ましく、6~10がより好ましい。Ra~Raのアリール基としては、フェニル基が最も好ましい。
 Ra~Raのアラルキル基としては、上述したRa~Raのアルキル基中の1個の水素原子を炭素数6~10のアリール基(好ましくはフェニル基)で置換した基が好ましく、例えば、ベンジル基等が挙げられる。
 Ra~Raのアルケニル基の炭素数は特に制限されないが、2~5が好ましく、2~4がより好ましい。Ra~Raのアルケニル基としては、ビニル基が好ましい。
 Ra~Raの芳香族複素環式基は、硫黄原子、窒素原子及び酸素原子からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1つのヘテロ原子を含むことが好ましい。芳香族複素環式基に含まれるヘテロ原子の数は1~5個が好ましく、1~3個がより好ましい。芳香族複素環式基の炭素数は特に制限されないが、2~20が好ましく、3~15がより好ましい。芳香族複素環式基は単環でも多環でもよい。Ra~Raの芳香族複素環式基としては、例えば、チエニル基、フラニル基、ベンゾチエニル基、ジベンゾチエニル基、ベンゾフラニル基、ピロール基、オキサゾリル基、チアゾリル基、ピリジル基、イソチアゾリル基、チアジアゾリル基等が挙げられる。
The alkyl groups of Ra 4 to Ra 6 may be either linear or branched. The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 6. The methylene group contained in the alkyl group of Ra 4 to Ra 6 may be replaced with at least one of -CO- and -O-.
The number of carbon atoms in the cycloalkyl group of Ra 4 to Ra 6 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 3 to 20, more preferably 5 to 15. Examples of the cycloalkyl group for Ra 4 to Ra 6 include monocyclic cycloalkyl groups such as a cyclopentyl group and a cyclohexyl group, and polycyclic groups such as a norbornyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, and an adamantyl group. A cycloalkyl group is preferred.
The number of carbon atoms in the aryl group of Ra 4 to Ra 6 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 10. The most preferred aryl group for Ra 4 to Ra 6 is a phenyl group.
The aralkyl group of Ra 4 to Ra 6 is preferably a group in which one hydrogen atom in the alkyl group of Ra 4 to Ra 6 described above is substituted with an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms (preferably a phenyl group), For example, a benzyl group and the like can be mentioned.
The number of carbon atoms in the alkenyl group of Ra 4 to Ra 6 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 2 to 5, more preferably 2 to 4. As the alkenyl group for Ra 4 to Ra 6 , a vinyl group is preferred.
The aromatic heterocyclic group of Ra 4 to Ra 6 preferably contains at least one heteroatom selected from the group consisting of a sulfur atom, a nitrogen atom, and an oxygen atom. The number of heteroatoms contained in the aromatic heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 5, more preferably 1 to 3. The number of carbon atoms in the aromatic heterocyclic group is not particularly limited, but is preferably from 2 to 20, more preferably from 3 to 15. The aromatic heterocyclic group may be monocyclic or polycyclic. Examples of the aromatic heterocyclic group of Ra 4 to Ra 6 include thienyl group, furanyl group, benzothienyl group, dibenzothienyl group, benzofuranyl group, pyrrole group, oxazolyl group, thiazolyl group, pyridyl group, isothiazolyl group, thiadiazolyl group. Examples include groups.
 Ra~Raのうち2つが互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。Ra~Raのうち2つが結合して環を形成してなる基としては、シクロアルキル基が好ましい。上記シクロアルキル基としては、シクロペンチル基、若しくは、シクロヘキシル基等の単環のシクロアルキル基、又は、ノルボルニル基、テトラシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロドデカニル基、若しくは、アダマンチル基等の多環のシクロアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数5~6の単環のシクロアルキル基がより好ましい。上記シクロアルキル基は、環を構成するメチレン基の1つが、酸素原子等のヘテロ原子、カルボニル基等のヘテロ原子を含む基、又は、ビニリデン基で置き換わっていてもよい。これらのシクロアルキル基は、シクロアルカン環を構成するエチレン基の1つ以上が、ビニレン基で置き換わっていてもよい。 Two of Ra 4 to Ra 6 may be bonded to each other to form a ring. The group formed by bonding two of Ra 4 to Ra 6 to form a ring is preferably a cycloalkyl group. The above-mentioned cycloalkyl group is a monocyclic cycloalkyl group such as a cyclopentyl group or a cyclohexyl group, or a polycyclic cycloalkyl group such as a norbornyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, or an adamantyl group. An alkyl group is preferred, and a monocyclic cycloalkyl group having 5 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferred. In the above cycloalkyl group, one of the methylene groups constituting the ring may be replaced with a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom, a group containing a hetero atom such as a carbonyl group, or a vinylidene group. In these cycloalkyl groups, one or more of the ethylene groups constituting the cycloalkane ring may be replaced with a vinylene group.
 一般式(S1)中の-C(Ra)(Ra)(Ra)は脱離基であることが好ましく、-COO-C(Ra)(Ra)(Ra)は、酸の作用により-C(Ra)(Ra)(Ra)が脱離して、カルボキシル基を生じることが好ましい。 -C(Ra 4 )(Ra 5 )(Ra 6 ) in general formula (S1) is preferably a leaving group, and -COO-C(Ra 4 )(Ra 5 )(Ra 6 ) is an acid It is preferable that -C(Ra 4 )(Ra 5 )(Ra 6 ) is eliminated by the action of , thereby producing a carboxyl group.
 一般式(S1)中のRaは、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、芳香族複素環式基、アルコキシ基、アシルオキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、ハロゲン原子、又は、シアノ基を表す。
 Raのアルキル基としては、直鎖状及び分岐鎖状のいずれであってもよい。アルキル基の炭素数は特に制限されないが、1~5が好ましく、1~3がより好ましい。
 Raのシクロアルキル基の炭素数は特に制限されないが、3~20が好ましく、5~15がより好ましい。Ra~Raのシクロアルキル基としては、シクロペンチル基、及びシクロヘキシル基等の単環のシクロアルキル基、並びにノルボルニル基、テトラシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロドデカニル基、及びアダマンチル基等の多環のシクロアルキル基が好ましい。
 Raのハロゲン原子としては、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、及びヨウ素原子が挙げられ、フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子が好ましい。
 Raのアルコキシ基中に含まれるアルキル基としては直鎖状及び分岐鎖状のいずれであってもよい。アルコキシ基中に含まれるアルキル基の炭素数は特に制限されないが、1~5が好ましく、1~3がより好ましい。
 Raのアシルオキシ基中に含まれ得るアルキル基としては直鎖状及び分岐鎖状のいずれであってもよい。Raのアシルオキシ基中に含まれ得るアルキル基の炭素数は特に制限されないが、1~5が好ましく、1~3がより好ましい。
 Raのアシルオキシ基中に含まれ得るアリール基の炭素数は特に制限されないが、6~20が好ましく、6~10がより好ましい。Raのアシルオキシ基中に含まれ得るアリール基としては、フェニル基が最も好ましい。
 Raのアルコキシカルボニル基中に含まれるアルキル基としては直鎖状及び分岐鎖状のいずれであってもよい。アルコキシカルボニル基中に含まれるアルキル基の炭素数は特に制限されないが、1~5が好ましく、1~3がより好ましい。
 Raのアリール基の炭素数は特に制限されないが、6~20が好ましく、6~10がより好ましい。Raのアリール基としては、フェニル基が最も好ましい。
 Raのアラルキル基としては、上述したRaのアルキル基中の1個の水素原子を炭素数6~10のアリール基(好ましくはフェニル基)で置換した基が好ましく、例えば、ベンジル基等が挙げられる。
 Raのアルケニル基の炭素数は特に制限されないが、2~5が好ましく、2~4がより好ましい。Raのアルケニル基としては、ビニル基が好ましい。
 Raの芳香族複素環式基は、硫黄原子、窒素原子及び酸素原子からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1つのヘテロ原子を含むことが好ましい。芳香族複素環式基に含まれるヘテロ原子の数は1~5個が好ましく、1~3個がより好ましい。芳香族複素環式基の炭素数は特に制限されないが、2~20が好ましく、3~15がより好ましい。芳香族複素環式基は単環でも多環でもよい。Raの芳香族複素環式基としては、例えば、チエニル基、フラニル基、ベンゾチエニル基、ジベンゾチエニル基、ベンゾフラニル基、ピロール基、オキサゾリル基、チアゾリル基、ピリジル基、イソチアゾリル基、チアジアゾリル基等が挙げられる。
Ra 0 in general formula (S1) represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aromatic heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a halogen atom, or a cyano group.
The alkyl group of Ra 0 may be either linear or branched. The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 5, more preferably 1 to 3.
The number of carbon atoms in the cycloalkyl group of Ra 0 is not particularly limited, but is preferably from 3 to 20, more preferably from 5 to 15. Examples of the cycloalkyl group for Ra 1 to Ra 3 include monocyclic cycloalkyl groups such as a cyclopentyl group and a cyclohexyl group, and polycyclic groups such as a norbornyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, and an adamantyl group. A cycloalkyl group is preferred.
Examples of the halogen atom with Ra 0 include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom, with a fluorine atom or an iodine atom being preferred.
The alkyl group contained in the alkoxy group of Ra 0 may be either linear or branched. The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group contained in the alkoxy group is not particularly limited, but is preferably from 1 to 5, more preferably from 1 to 3.
The alkyl group that may be contained in the acyloxy group of Ra 0 may be either linear or branched. The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group that can be contained in the acyloxy group of Ra 0 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 5, more preferably 1 to 3.
The number of carbon atoms in the aryl group that can be contained in the acyloxy group of Ra 0 is not particularly limited, but is preferably from 6 to 20, more preferably from 6 to 10. As the aryl group that can be included in the acyloxy group of Ra 0 , a phenyl group is most preferable.
The alkyl group contained in the alkoxycarbonyl group of Ra 0 may be either linear or branched. The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group contained in the alkoxycarbonyl group is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 5, more preferably 1 to 3.
The number of carbon atoms in the aryl group of Ra 0 is not particularly limited, but is preferably from 6 to 20, more preferably from 6 to 10. As the aryl group with Ra 0 , a phenyl group is most preferred.
The aralkyl group with Ra 0 is preferably a group in which one hydrogen atom in the alkyl group with Ra 0 described above is substituted with an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms (preferably a phenyl group), such as a benzyl group, etc. Can be mentioned.
The number of carbon atoms in the alkenyl group of Ra 0 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 2 to 5, more preferably 2 to 4. As the alkenyl group with Ra 0 , a vinyl group is preferable.
The aromatic heterocyclic group with Ra 0 preferably contains at least one heteroatom selected from the group consisting of a sulfur atom, a nitrogen atom, and an oxygen atom. The number of heteroatoms contained in the aromatic heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 5, more preferably 1 to 3. The number of carbon atoms in the aromatic heterocyclic group is not particularly limited, but is preferably from 2 to 20, more preferably from 3 to 15. The aromatic heterocyclic group may be monocyclic or polycyclic. Examples of the aromatic heterocyclic group with Ra 0 include thienyl group, furanyl group, benzothienyl group, dibenzothienyl group, benzofuranyl group, pyrrole group, oxazolyl group, thiazolyl group, pyridyl group, isothiazolyl group, thiadiazolyl group, etc. Can be mentioned.
 一般式(S1)中のnaは0~4の整数を表し、0~2の整数を表すことが好ましく、0又は1を表すことがより好ましく、0を表すことが更に好ましい。 In general formula (S1), na represents an integer of 0 to 4, preferably an integer of 0 to 2, more preferably 0 or 1, and even more preferably 0.
 一般式(S1)中のmaは0~2の整数を表し、0又は1を表すことが好ましく、0を表すことがより好ましい。一般式(S1)中の芳香環は、maが0を表す場合はベンゼンになり、1を表す場合はナフタレンになり、2を表す場合はアントラセンになる。 In general formula (S1), ma represents an integer from 0 to 2, preferably represents 0 or 1, and more preferably represents 0. The aromatic ring in general formula (S1) is benzene when ma represents 0, naphthalene when ma represents 1, and anthracene when ma represents 2.
 一般式(S1)で表される繰り返し単位の具体例を以下に示すが、これらに限定されない。 Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by general formula (S1) are shown below, but are not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
(一般式(S2)で表される繰り返し単位)
 一般式(S2)中のRa~Raは、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、又は、アルコキシカルボニル基を表す。Ra~Raについての説明、具体例及び好ましい範囲は、前述した一般式(S1)中のRa~Raについての説明、具体例及び好ましい範囲と同じである。
(Repeating unit represented by general formula (S2))
Ra 7 to Ra 9 in general formula (S2) each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group. The explanations, specific examples, and preferred ranges for Ra 7 to Ra 9 are the same as the explanations, specific examples, and preferred ranges for Ra 1 to Ra 3 in general formula (S1) described above.
 一般式(S2)中のLaは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。Laについての説明、具体例及び好ましい範囲は、前述した一般式(S1)中のLaについての説明、具体例及び好ましい範囲と同じである。 La 2 in general formula (S2) represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. The explanation, specific example, and preferred range for La 2 are the same as the explanation, specific example, and preferred range for La 1 in the general formula (S1) described above.
 一般式(S2)中のAraは、芳香環基を表す。Araの芳香環基は、アリーレン基であることが好ましく、炭素数6~20のアリーレン基であることがより好ましく、炭素数6~10のアリーレン基であることが更に好ましく、フェニレン基又はナフチレン基であることが特に好ましく、フェニレン基であることが最も好ましい。 Ara in general formula (S2) represents an aromatic ring group. The aromatic ring group of Ara is preferably an arylene group, more preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, even more preferably an arylene group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms, and a phenylene group or a naphthylene group. is particularly preferable, and most preferably a phenylene group.
 一般式(S2)中のRa10~Ra12は、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、芳香族複素環式基、アラルキル基、アルコキシ基、シクロアルキルオキシ基、又は、アルケニル基を表す。
 Ra10~Ra12のアルキル基としては、直鎖状及び分岐鎖状のいずれであってもよい。アルキル基の炭素数は特に制限されないが、1~5が好ましく、1~3がより好ましい。
 Ra10~Ra12のシクロアルキル基の炭素数は特に制限されないが、3~20が好ましく、5~15がより好ましい。Ra10~Ra12のシクロアルキル基としては、シクロペンチル基、及びシクロヘキシル基等の単環のシクロアルキル基、並びにノルボルニル基、テトラシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロドデカニル基、及びアダマンチル基等の多環のシクロアルキル基が好ましい。
 Ra10~Ra12のアルコキシ基中に含まれるアルキル基としては直鎖状及び分岐鎖状のいずれであってもよい。アルコキシ基中に含まれるアルキル基の炭素数は特に制限されないが、1~5が好ましく、1~3がより好ましい。
 Ra10~Ra12のシクロアルキルオキシ基中に含まれるシクロアルキル基の炭素数は特に制限されないが、3~20が好ましく、5~15がより好ましい。Ra10~Ra12のシクロアルキルオキシ基中に含まれるシクロアルキル基としては、シクロペンチル基、及びシクロヘキシル基等の単環のシクロアルキル基、並びにノルボルニル基、テトラシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロドデカニル基、及びアダマンチル基等の多環のシクロアルキル基が好ましい。としては直鎖状及び分岐鎖状のいずれであってもよい。アルコキシ基中に含まれるアルキル基の炭素数は特に制限されないが、1~5が好ましく、1~3がより好ましい。
 Ra10~Ra12のアリール基の炭素数は特に制限されないが、6~20が好ましく、6~10がより好ましい。Ra10~Ra12のアリール基としては、フェニル基が最も好ましい。
 Ra10~Ra12のアラルキル基としては、上述したRa10~Ra12のアルキル基中の1個の水素原子を炭素数6~10のアリール基(好ましくはフェニル基)で置換した基が好ましく、例えば、ベンジル基等が挙げられる。
 Ra10~Ra12のアルケニル基の炭素数は特に制限されないが、2~5が好ましく、2~4がより好ましい。Ra10~Ra12のアルケニル基としては、ビニル基が好ましい。
 Ra10~Ra12の芳香族複素環式基は、硫黄原子、窒素原子及び酸素原子からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1つのヘテロ原子を含むことが好ましい。芳香族複素環式基に含まれるヘテロ原子の数は1~5個が好ましく、1~3個がより好ましい。芳香族複素環式基の炭素数は特に制限されないが、2~20が好ましく、3~15がより好ましい。芳香族複素環式基は単環でも多環でもよい。Ra10~Ra12の芳香族複素環式基としては、例えば、チエニル基、フラニル基、ベンゾチエニル基、ジベンゾチエニル基、ベンゾフラニル基、ピロール基、オキサゾリル基、チアゾリル基、ピリジル基、イソチアゾリル基、チアジアゾリル基等が挙げられる。
Ra 10 to Ra 12 in general formula (S2) are each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aromatic heterocyclic group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkyloxy group, or , represents an alkenyl group.
The alkyl group of Ra 10 to Ra 12 may be either linear or branched. The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 5, more preferably 1 to 3.
The number of carbon atoms in the cycloalkyl group of Ra 10 to Ra 12 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 3 to 20, more preferably 5 to 15. Examples of the cycloalkyl group for Ra 10 to Ra 12 include monocyclic cycloalkyl groups such as a cyclopentyl group and a cyclohexyl group, and polycyclic groups such as a norbornyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, and an adamantyl group. A cycloalkyl group is preferred.
The alkyl group contained in the alkoxy group of Ra 10 to Ra 12 may be either linear or branched. The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group contained in the alkoxy group is not particularly limited, but is preferably from 1 to 5, more preferably from 1 to 3.
The number of carbon atoms in the cycloalkyl group contained in the cycloalkyloxy group of Ra 10 to Ra 12 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 3 to 20, more preferably 5 to 15. The cycloalkyl group contained in the cycloalkyloxy group of Ra 10 to Ra 12 includes monocyclic cycloalkyl groups such as cyclopentyl group and cyclohexyl group, as well as norbornyl group, tetracyclodecanyl group, and tetracyclododecanyl group. , and polycyclic cycloalkyl groups such as adamantyl groups are preferred. It may be either linear or branched. The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group contained in the alkoxy group is not particularly limited, but is preferably from 1 to 5, more preferably from 1 to 3.
The number of carbon atoms in the aryl group of Ra 10 to Ra 12 is not particularly limited, but is preferably from 6 to 20, more preferably from 6 to 10. The most preferred aryl group for Ra 10 to Ra 12 is a phenyl group.
The aralkyl group of Ra 10 to Ra 12 is preferably a group in which one hydrogen atom in the alkyl group of Ra 10 to Ra 12 described above is substituted with an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms (preferably a phenyl group), For example, a benzyl group and the like can be mentioned.
The number of carbon atoms in the alkenyl group of Ra 10 to Ra 12 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 2 to 5, more preferably 2 to 4. As the alkenyl group for Ra 10 to Ra 12 , a vinyl group is preferred.
The aromatic heterocyclic group of Ra 10 to Ra 12 preferably contains at least one heteroatom selected from the group consisting of a sulfur atom, a nitrogen atom, and an oxygen atom. The number of heteroatoms contained in the aromatic heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 5, more preferably 1 to 3. The number of carbon atoms in the aromatic heterocyclic group is not particularly limited, but is preferably from 2 to 20, more preferably from 3 to 15. The aromatic heterocyclic group may be monocyclic or polycyclic. Examples of the aromatic heterocyclic group of Ra 10 to Ra 12 include thienyl group, furanyl group, benzothienyl group, dibenzothienyl group, benzofuranyl group, pyrrole group, oxazolyl group, thiazolyl group, pyridyl group, isothiazolyl group, thiadiazolyl group. Examples include groups.
 Ra10~Ra12のうち少なくとも2つが互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。Ra10~Ra12が結合して環を形成してなる基としては、シクロアルキル基が好ましい。上記シクロアルキル基としては、シクロペンチル基、若しくは、シクロヘキシル基等の単環のシクロアルキル基、又は、ノルボルニル基、テトラシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロドデカニル基、若しくは、アダマンチル基等の多環のシクロアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数5~6の単環のシクロアルキル基がより好ましい。上記シクロアルキル基は、環を構成するメチレン基の1つが、酸素原子等のヘテロ原子、カルボニル基等のヘテロ原子を含む基、又は、ビニリデン基で置き換わっていてもよい。これらのシクロアルキル基は、シクロアルカン環を構成するエチレン基の1つ以上が、ビニレン基で置き換わっていてもよい。 At least two of Ra 10 to Ra 12 may be bonded to each other to form a ring. The group formed by bonding Ra 10 to Ra 12 to form a ring is preferably a cycloalkyl group. The above-mentioned cycloalkyl group is a monocyclic cycloalkyl group such as a cyclopentyl group or a cyclohexyl group, or a polycyclic cycloalkyl group such as a norbornyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, or an adamantyl group. An alkyl group is preferred, and a monocyclic cycloalkyl group having 5 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferred. In the above cycloalkyl group, one of the methylene groups constituting the ring may be replaced with a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom, a group containing a hetero atom such as a carbonyl group, or a vinylidene group. In these cycloalkyl groups, one or more of the ethylene groups constituting the cycloalkane ring may be replaced with a vinylene group.
 Ra10~Ra12のうち少なくとも1つがアルコキシ基であることが好ましく、Ra10~Ra12のうち1つがアルコキシ基であり、かつ他の2つが水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、又はアリール基であることがより好ましい。 It is preferable that at least one of Ra 10 to Ra 12 is an alkoxy group, and one of Ra 10 to Ra 12 is an alkoxy group, and the other two are a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, or an aryl group. It is more preferable that
 一般式(S2)中の-C(Ra10)(Ra11)(Ra12)は脱離基であることが好ましく、-O-C(Ra10)(Ra11)(Ra12)は、酸の作用により-C(Ra10)(Ra11)(Ra12)が脱離して、ヒドロキシ基(このヒドロキシ基はAraに結合しているためフェノール性水酸基である)を生じることが好ましい。 -C(Ra 10 )(Ra 11 )(Ra 12 ) in general formula (S2) is preferably a leaving group, and -OC(Ra 10 )(Ra 11 )(Ra 12 ) is an acid It is preferable that -C(Ra 10 )(Ra 11 )(Ra 12 ) is eliminated by the action of , thereby producing a hydroxy group (this hydroxy group is a phenolic hydroxyl group because it is bonded to Ara).
 一般式(S2)で表される繰り返し単位の具体例を以下に示すが、これらに限定されない。 Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by general formula (S2) are shown below, but are not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
 一般式(S1)で表される繰り返し単位及び一般式(S2)で表される繰り返し単位からなる群より選ばれる繰り返し単位の含有量は、樹脂(A)中の全繰り返し単位に対して、5モル%以上が好ましく、10モル%以上がより好ましく、15モル%以上が更に好ましい。また、一般式(S1)で表される繰り返し単位及び一般式(S2)で表される繰り返し単位からなる群より選ばれる繰り返し単位の含有量は、樹脂(A)中の全繰り返し単位に対して、70モル%以下が好ましく、60モル%以下がより好ましく、50モル%以下が更に好ましい。 The content of repeating units selected from the group consisting of repeating units represented by general formula (S1) and repeating units represented by general formula (S2) is 5% relative to all repeating units in resin (A). It is preferably mol% or more, more preferably 10 mol% or more, and even more preferably 15 mol% or more. In addition, the content of the repeating unit selected from the group consisting of the repeating unit represented by the general formula (S1) and the repeating unit represented by the general formula (S2) is based on the total repeating units in the resin (A). , is preferably 70 mol% or less, more preferably 60 mol% or less, and even more preferably 50 mol% or less.
 樹脂(A)が含む一般式(S1)で表される繰り返し単位及び一般式(S2)で表される繰り返し単位からなる群より選ばれる繰り返し単位は、1種でもよいし、2種以上でもよい。2種以上含む場合は、その合計含有量が、上記好適含有量の範囲内であるのが好ましい。 The number of repeating units selected from the group consisting of the repeating unit represented by the general formula (S1) and the repeating unit represented by the general formula (S2) contained in the resin (A) may be one type or two or more types. . When two or more types are included, the total content is preferably within the above-mentioned preferred content range.
(極性基を有する繰り返し単位)
 樹脂(A)が含む極性基を有する繰り返し単位について説明する。
 極性基を有する繰り返し単位は、前述した一般式(S1)で表される繰り返し単位及び一般式(S2)で表される繰り返し単位からなる群より選ばれる繰り返し単位とは異なる繰り返し単位であることが好ましい。
 極性基を有する繰り返し単位の極性基としては、例えば、水酸基、ラクトン基、スルトン基、ラクタム基、イミド基、アミド基、スルホンアミド基、カーボネート基、ウレタン基、ウレア基、ニトリル基、スルホキシド基、スルホニル基等が挙げられる。極性基は酸基であってもよい。極性基としては、水酸基又はラクトン基が好ましく、芳香族性水酸基がより好ましく、フェノール性水酸基が更に好ましい。
 極性基を含む繰り返し単位としては、下記一般式(S3)で表される繰り返し単位であることが好ましい。
(Repeating unit with polar group)
The repeating unit having a polar group contained in the resin (A) will be explained.
The repeating unit having a polar group may be a repeating unit different from the repeating unit selected from the group consisting of the repeating unit represented by the general formula (S1) and the repeating unit represented by the general formula (S2) described above. preferable.
Examples of the polar group of the repeating unit having a polar group include a hydroxyl group, a lactone group, a sultone group, a lactam group, an imide group, an amide group, a sulfonamide group, a carbonate group, a urethane group, a urea group, a nitrile group, a sulfoxide group, Examples include sulfonyl groups. The polar group may be an acid group. The polar group is preferably a hydroxyl group or a lactone group, more preferably an aromatic hydroxyl group, and even more preferably a phenolic hydroxyl group.
The repeating unit containing a polar group is preferably a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (S3).
 極性基を有する繰り返し単位は、下記一般式(S3)で表される繰り返し単位であることが好ましい。 The repeating unit having a polar group is preferably a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (S3).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
 一般式(S3)中、R101、R102及びR103は、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、又は、アルコキシカルボニル基を表す。R102はArと結合して環を形成してもよく、その場合のR102は単結合又はアルキレン基を表す。
 Lは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
 Arは、芳香環基を表す。
 kは、1~5の整数を表す。
In general formula (S3), R 101 , R 102 and R 103 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group. R 102 may combine with Ar A to form a ring, in which case R 102 represents a single bond or an alkylene group.
L A represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
Ar A represents an aromatic ring group.
k represents an integer from 1 to 5.
 一般式(S3)中のR101、R102及びR103は、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、又は、アルコキシカルボニル基を表す。R101、R102及びR103についての説明、具体例及び好ましい範囲は、前述した一般式(S1)中のRa~Raについての説明、具体例及び好ましい範囲と同じである。 R 101 , R 102 and R 103 in general formula (S3) each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group. The explanation, specific examples and preferred ranges of R 101 , R 102 and R 103 are the same as the explanation, specific examples and preferred ranges of Ra 1 to Ra 3 in general formula (S1) described above.
 一般式(S3)中のArは芳香環基を表し、より具体的には(k+1)価の芳香環基を表す。kが1である場合における2価の芳香環基は、例えば、フェニレン基、トリレン基、ナフチレン基、アントラセニレン基等の炭素数6~18のアリーレン基、又は、チオフェン環、フラン環、ピロール環、ベンゾチオフェン環、ベンゾフラン環、ベンゾピロール環、トリアジン環、イミダゾール環、ベンゾイミダゾール環、トリアゾール環、チアジアゾール環、チアゾール環等のヘテロ環を含む2価の芳香環基が好ましい。上記芳香環基は、置換基を有していてもよい。
 kが2以上の整数である場合における(k+1)価の芳香環基の具体例としては、2価の芳香環基の上記した具体例から、(k-1)個の任意の水素原子を除してなる基が挙げられる。
 (k+1)価の芳香環基は、更に置換基を有していてもよい。
 (k+1)価の芳香環基が有し得る置換基としては、特に限定されないが、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、n-ブチル基、sec-ブチル基、ヘキシル基、2-エチルヘキシル基、オクチル基、ドデシル基等のアルキル基;メトキシ基、エトキシ基、ヒドロキシエトキシ基、プロポキシ基、ヒドロキシプロポキシ基、ブトキシ基等のアルコキシ基;フェニル基等のアリール基;等が挙げられる。
 Arは炭素数6~18の芳香環基を表すことが好ましく、ベンゼン環基、ナフタレン環基又はビフェニレン環基を表すことがより好ましい。
Ar A in general formula (S3) represents an aromatic ring group, more specifically represents a (k+1)-valent aromatic ring group. The divalent aromatic ring group when k is 1 is, for example, an arylene group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms such as a phenylene group, tolylene group, naphthylene group, anthracenylene group, or a thiophene ring, a furan ring, a pyrrole ring, A divalent aromatic ring group containing a hetero ring such as a benzothiophene ring, a benzofuran ring, a benzopyrrole ring, a triazine ring, an imidazole ring, a benzimidazole ring, a triazole ring, a thiadiazole ring, and a thiazole ring is preferred. The above aromatic ring group may have a substituent.
Specific examples of (k+1)-valent aromatic ring groups when k is an integer of 2 or more include (k-1) arbitrary hydrogen atoms removed from the above-mentioned specific examples of divalent aromatic ring groups. The following groups are mentioned.
The (k+1)-valent aromatic ring group may further have a substituent.
Substituents that the (k+1)-valent aromatic ring group may have are not particularly limited, but include, for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, n-butyl group, sec-butyl group, hexyl group, - Alkyl groups such as ethylhexyl, octyl and dodecyl; alkoxy groups such as methoxy, ethoxy, hydroxyethoxy, propoxy, hydroxypropoxy and butoxy; aryl groups such as phenyl; and the like.
Ar A preferably represents an aromatic ring group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, and more preferably represents a benzene ring group, a naphthalene ring group, or a biphenylene ring group.
 一般式(S3)中のLは単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
 Lが表す2価の連結基としては、特に限定されないが、例えば、-COO-、-CONR64-、アルキレン基、又はこれらの基の2種以上を組み合わせてなる基が挙げられる。上記R64は水素原子又はアルキル基を表す。
 上記アルキレン基としては、特に限定されないが、メチレン基、エチレン基、プロピレン基、ブチレン基、ヘキシレン基、及びオクチレン基等の炭素数1~8のアルキレン基が好ましい。
 R64がアルキル基を表す場合のアルキル基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、n-ブチル基、sec-ブチル基、ヘキシル基、2-エチルヘキシル基、オクチル基、ドデシル基等の炭素数20以下のアルキル基が挙げられ、炭素数8以下のアルキル基が好ましい。
LA in general formula (S3) represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
The divalent linking group represented by L A is not particularly limited, but includes, for example, -COO-, -CONR 64 -, an alkylene group, or a group formed by combining two or more of these groups. The above R 64 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
The alkylene group is not particularly limited, but alkylene groups having 1 to 8 carbon atoms such as methylene group, ethylene group, propylene group, butylene group, hexylene group, and octylene group are preferable.
When R 64 represents an alkyl group, examples of the alkyl group include methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, n-butyl group, sec-butyl group, hexyl group, 2-ethylhexyl group, octyl group, and dodecyl group. Examples include alkyl groups having 20 or less carbon atoms, such as groups, and alkyl groups having 8 or less carbon atoms are preferred.
 一般式(S3)で表される繰り返し単位は、ヒドロキシスチレン構造を備えていることが好ましい。すなわち、Arはベンゼン環基を表すことが好ましい。
 kは1~3の整数を表すことが好ましく、1又は2を表すことがより好ましい。
The repeating unit represented by general formula (S3) preferably has a hydroxystyrene structure. That is, it is preferable that Ar A represents a benzene ring group.
k preferably represents an integer of 1 to 3, more preferably 1 or 2.
 一般式(S3)で表される繰り返し単位の具体例を以下に示すが、これらに限定されない。 Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by general formula (S3) are shown below, but are not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
 樹脂(A)中の極性基を有する繰り返し単位の含有量は、特に限定されないが、樹脂(A)中の全繰り返し単位に対して20モル%以上であることが好ましく、30モル%以上であることがより好ましく、40モル%以上であることが更に好ましい。また、極性基を有する繰り返し単位の含有量は、樹脂(A)中の全繰り返し単位に対して90モル%以下であることが好ましく、85モル%以下であることがより好ましく、80モル%以下であることが更に好ましい。 The content of the repeating unit having a polar group in the resin (A) is not particularly limited, but is preferably 20 mol% or more, and 30 mol% or more based on the total repeating units in the resin (A). More preferably, it is 40 mol% or more. Further, the content of the repeating unit having a polar group is preferably 90 mol% or less, more preferably 85 mol% or less, and 80 mol% or less based on the total repeating units in the resin (A). It is more preferable that
 樹脂(A)が含む極性基を有する繰り返し単位は、1種でもよいし、2種以上でもよい。2種以上含む場合は、その合計含有量が、上記好適含有量の範囲内であるのが好ましい。 The number of repeating units having polar groups contained in the resin (A) may be one or two or more. When two or more types are included, the total content is preferably within the above-mentioned preferred content range.
(ラクトン基、スルトン基、又はカーボネート基を有する繰り返し単位)
 樹脂(A)は、ラクトン基、スルトン基、及びカーボネート基からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を有する繰り返し単位(以下、「単位Y」ともいう。)を有していてもよい。
 単位Yは、水酸基、及びヘキサフルオロプロパノール基等の酸基を有さないことも好ましい。
(Repeat unit having lactone group, sultone group, or carbonate group)
The resin (A) may have a repeating unit (hereinafter also referred to as "unit Y") having at least one type selected from the group consisting of a lactone group, a sultone group, and a carbonate group.
It is also preferable that the unit Y does not have an acid group such as a hydroxyl group or a hexafluoropropanol group.
 ラクトン基又はスルトン基としては、ラクトン構造又はスルトン構造を有していればよい。ラクトン構造又はスルトン構造は、5~7員環ラクトン構造又は5~7員環スルトン構造が好ましい。なかでも、ビシクロ構造若しくはスピロ構造を形成する形で5~7員環ラクトン構造に他の環構造が縮環しているもの、又はビシクロ構造若しくはスピロ構造を形成する形で5~7員環スルトン構造に他の環構造が縮環しているものがより好ましい。
 樹脂(A)について、国際公開第2022/024928号の[0120]~[0134]の記載を参照として取り込むことができる。
The lactone group or sultone group may have a lactone structure or a sultone structure. The lactone structure or sultone structure is preferably a 5- to 7-membered ring lactone structure or a 5- to 7-membered ring sultone structure. Among these, 5- to 7-membered ring lactone structures are fused with other ring structures to form a bicyclo or spiro structure, or 5- to 7-membered sultone structures to form a bicyclo or spiro structure. More preferred is a structure in which another ring structure is condensed.
Regarding the resin (A), the descriptions in [0120] to [0134] of International Publication No. 2022/024928 can be incorporated as a reference.
 樹脂(A)は、一般式(S1)で表される繰り返し単位及び一般式(S2)で表される繰り返し単位からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1つの繰り返し単位と、極性基を有する繰り返し単位とを含むが、これらに加えて、その他の繰り返し単位を含んでもよい。 The resin (A) contains at least one repeating unit selected from the group consisting of a repeating unit represented by general formula (S1) and a repeating unit represented by general formula (S2), and a repeating unit having a polar group. However, in addition to these, other repeating units may also be included.
 樹脂(A)は、その他の繰り返し単位として、上記以外の酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位を含んでいてもよい。
 酸分解性基は、酸の作用により分解して極性基を生じる基であることが好ましい。
 上記極性基としては、アルカリ可溶性基が好ましく、例えば、カルボキシ基、フェノール性水酸基、フッ素化アルコール基、スルホン酸基、リン酸基、スルホンアミド基、スルホニルイミド基、(アルキルスルホニル)(アルキルカルボニル)メチレン基、(アルキルスルホニル)(アルキルカルボニル)イミド基、ビス(アルキルカルボニル)メチレン基、ビス(アルキルカルボニル)イミド基、ビス(アルキルスルホニル)メチレン基、ビス(アルキルスルホニル)イミド基、トリス(アルキルカルボニル)メチレン基、及びトリス(アルキルスルホニル)メチレン基等の酸性基、並びにアルコール性水酸基等が挙げられる。
The resin (A) may contain, as other repeating units, repeating units having acid-decomposable groups other than those mentioned above.
The acid-decomposable group is preferably a group that is decomposed by the action of an acid to produce a polar group.
The above polar group is preferably an alkali-soluble group, such as a carboxy group, phenolic hydroxyl group, fluorinated alcohol group, sulfonic acid group, phosphoric acid group, sulfonamide group, sulfonylimide group, (alkylsulfonyl) (alkylcarbonyl) Methylene group, (alkylsulfonyl)(alkylcarbonyl)imide group, bis(alkylcarbonyl)methylene group, bis(alkylcarbonyl)imide group, bis(alkylsulfonyl)methylene group, bis(alkylsulfonyl)imide group, tris(alkylcarbonyl) ) methylene group, acidic groups such as tris(alkylsulfonyl)methylene groups, and alcoholic hydroxyl groups.
 酸の作用により脱離する脱離基としては、例えば、式(Y1)~(Y4)で表される基が挙げられる。
 式(Y1):-C(Rx)(Rx)(Rx
 式(Y2):-C(=O)OC(Rx)(Rx)(Rx
 式(Y3):-C(R36)(R37)(OR38
 式(Y4):-C(Rn)(H)(Ar)
Examples of the leaving group that leaves by the action of an acid include groups represented by formulas (Y1) to (Y4).
Formula (Y1): -C(Rx 1 )(Rx 2 )(Rx 3 )
Formula (Y2): -C(=O)OC(Rx 1 )(Rx 2 )(Rx 3 )
Formula (Y3): -C(R 36 )(R 37 )(OR 38 )
Formula (Y4): -C(Rn)(H)(Ar)
 式(Y1)及び式(Y2)中、Rx~Rxは、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基(直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状)、シクロアルキル基(単環若しくは多環)、アリール基(単環若しくは多環)、アラルキル基(直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状)、又はアルケニル基(直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状)を表す。なお、Rx~Rxの全てがアルキル基(直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状)である場合、Rx~Rxのうち少なくとも2つはメチル基であることが好ましい。
 なかでも、Rx~Rxは、それぞれ独立に、直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基を表すことが好ましく、Rx~Rxは、それぞれ独立に、直鎖状のアルキル基を表すことがより好ましい。
 Rx~Rxの2つが互いに結合して環(単環及び多環のいずれであってもよい)を形成してもよい。
 Rx~Rxのアルキル基としては、メチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、イソプロピル基、n-ブチル基、イソブチル基、及びt-ブチル基等の炭素数1~5のアルキル基が好ましい。
 Rx~Rxのシクロアルキル基としては、シクロペンチル基、及びシクロヘキシル基等の単環のシクロアルキル基、並びにノルボルニル基、テトラシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロドデカニル基、及びアダマンチル基等の多環のシクロアルキル基が好ましい。
 Rx~Rxのアリール基としては、炭素数6~10のアリール基が好ましく、例えば、フェニル基、ナフチル基、及びアントリル基等が挙げられる。
 Rx~Rxのアラルキル基としては、上述したRx~Rxのアルキル基中の1個の水素原子を炭素数6~10のアリール基(好ましくはフェニル基)で置換した基が好ましく、例えば、ベンジル基等が挙げられる。
 Rx~Rxのアルケニル基としては、ビニル基が好ましい。
 Rx~Rxの2つが結合して形成される環としては、シクロアルキル基が好ましい。Rx~Rxの2つが結合して形成されるシクロアルキル基としては、シクロペンチル基、若しくは、シクロヘキシル基等の単環のシクロアルキル基、又はノルボルニル基、テトラシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロドデカニル基、若しくは、アダマンチル基等の多環のシクロアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数5~6の単環のシクロアルキル基がより好ましい。
 Rx~Rxの2つが結合して形成されるシクロアルキル基は、例えば、環を構成するメチレン基の1つが、酸素原子等のヘテロ原子、カルボニル基等のヘテロ原子を有する基、又はビニリデン基で置き換わっていてもよい。また、これらのシクロアルキル基は、シクロアルカン環を構成するエチレン基の1つ以上が、ビニレン基で置き換わっていてもよい。
 式(Y1)又は式(Y2)で表される基は、例えば、Rxがメチル基又はエチル基であり、RxとRxとが結合して上述のシクロアルキル基を形成している態様が好ましい。
In formulas (Y1) and (Y2), Rx 1 to Rx 3 each independently represent an alkyl group (linear or branched chain), a cycloalkyl group (monocyclic or polycyclic), an aryl group (monocyclic or polycyclic), an aralkyl group (linear or branched), or an alkenyl group (linear or branched). Note that when all of Rx 1 to Rx 3 are alkyl groups (linear or branched), it is preferable that at least two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 are methyl groups.
Among these, it is preferable that Rx 1 to Rx 3 each independently represent a linear or branched alkyl group, and Rx 1 to Rx 3 each independently represent a linear alkyl group. is more preferable.
Two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 may be bonded to each other to form a ring (which may be monocyclic or polycyclic).
As the alkyl group for Rx 1 to Rx 3 , an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms such as a methyl group, ethyl group, n-propyl group, isopropyl group, n-butyl group, isobutyl group, and t-butyl group is preferable. .
Examples of the cycloalkyl group for Rx 1 to Rx 3 include monocyclic cycloalkyl groups such as cyclopentyl group and cyclohexyl group, and polycyclic groups such as norbornyl group, tetracyclodecanyl group, tetracyclododecanyl group, and adamantyl group. A cycloalkyl group is preferred.
The aryl group for Rx 1 to Rx 3 is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms, such as a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, an anthryl group, and the like.
The aralkyl group of Rx 1 to Rx 3 is preferably a group in which one hydrogen atom in the alkyl group of Rx 1 to Rx 3 described above is substituted with an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms (preferably a phenyl group), For example, a benzyl group and the like can be mentioned.
As the alkenyl group for Rx 1 to Rx 3 , a vinyl group is preferred.
The ring formed by bonding two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 is preferably a cycloalkyl group. The cycloalkyl group formed by combining two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 is a cyclopentyl group or a monocyclic cycloalkyl group such as a cyclohexyl group, or a norbornyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, or a tetracyclododecanyl group. or a polycyclic cycloalkyl group such as an adamantyl group, and a monocyclic cycloalkyl group having 5 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferable.
The cycloalkyl group formed by bonding two of Rx 1 to Rx 3 is, for example, a group in which one of the methylene groups constituting the ring has a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom, a hetero atom such as a carbonyl group, or a group in which one of the methylene groups constituting the ring has a hetero atom such as a carbonyl group, or May be substituted with a group. Further, in these cycloalkyl groups, one or more of the ethylene groups constituting the cycloalkane ring may be replaced with a vinylene group.
The group represented by formula (Y1) or formula (Y2) is, for example, an embodiment in which Rx 1 is a methyl group or an ethyl group, and Rx 2 and Rx 3 are bonded to form the above-mentioned cycloalkyl group. is preferred.
 式(Y3)中、R36~R38は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は1価の有機基を表す。R37とR38とは、互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。1価の有機基としては、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、及びアルケニル基等が挙げられる。R36は水素原子であることも好ましい。
 なお、上記アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、及びアラルキル基には、酸素原子等のヘテロ原子及び/又はカルボニル基等のヘテロ原子を有する基が含まれていてもよい。例えば、上記アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、及びアラルキル基は、例えば、メチレン基の1つ以上が、酸素原子等のヘテロ原子及び/又はカルボニル基等のヘテロ原子を有する基で置き換わっていてもよい。
 また、R38は、繰り返し単位の主鎖が有する別の置換基と互いに結合して、環を形成してもよい。R38と繰り返し単位の主鎖が有する別の置換基とが互いに結合して形成する基は、メチレン基等のアルキレン基が好ましい。
In formula (Y3), R 36 to R 38 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group. R 37 and R 38 may be combined with each other to form a ring. Examples of monovalent organic groups include alkyl groups, cycloalkyl groups, aryl groups, aralkyl groups, and alkenyl groups. It is also preferable that R 36 is a hydrogen atom.
Note that the alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, and aralkyl group may include a group having a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom and/or a hetero atom such as a carbonyl group. For example, in the above alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, and aralkyl group, one or more methylene groups are replaced with a group having a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom and/or a hetero atom such as a carbonyl group. Good too.
Further, R 38 may be bonded to another substituent in the main chain of the repeating unit to form a ring. The group formed by bonding R 38 and another substituent of the main chain of the repeating unit to each other is preferably an alkylene group such as a methylene group.
 式(Y4)中、Arは、芳香環基を表す。Rnは、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、又はアリール基を表す。RnとArとは互いに結合して非芳香族環を形成してもよい。Arはより好ましくはアリール基である。 In formula (Y4), Ar represents an aromatic ring group. Rn represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, or an aryl group. Rn and Ar may be bonded to each other to form a non-aromatic ring. Ar is more preferably an aryl group.
(酸分解性基及び酸基のいずれも有さず、フッ素原子、臭素原子又はヨウ素原子を有する繰り返し単位)
 樹脂(A)は、上述した繰り返し単位とは別に、酸分解性基及び酸基のいずれも有さず、フッ素原子、臭素原子又はヨウ素原子を有する繰り返し単位(以下、単位Xともいう。)を有していてもよい。ここで言う<酸分解性基及び酸基のいずれも有さず、フッ素原子、臭素原子又はヨウ素原子を有する繰り返し単位>は、後述の<ラクトン基、スルトン基、又はカーボネート基を有する繰り返し単位>、及び<光酸発生基を有する繰り返し単位>とは異なることが好ましい。
(Repeating unit that has neither an acid-decomposable group nor an acid group, but has a fluorine atom, a bromine atom, or an iodine atom)
In addition to the above-mentioned repeating units, the resin (A) contains a repeating unit (hereinafter also referred to as unit may have. The <repeat unit having neither an acid-decomposable group nor an acid group but a fluorine atom, a bromine atom, or an iodine atom> referred to herein means the <repeat unit having a lactone group, sultone group, or carbonate group> described below. , and <repeating unit having a photoacid generating group>.
 単位Xとしては、式(C)で表される繰り返し単位が好ましい。 As the unit X, a repeating unit represented by formula (C) is preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
 Lは、単結合、又はエステル基を表す。Rは、水素原子、又はフッ素原子若しくはヨウ素原子を有していてもよいアルキル基を表す。R10は、水素原子、フッ素原子若しくはヨウ素原子を有していてもよいアルキル基、フッ素原子若しくはヨウ素原子を有していてもよいシクロアルキル基、フッ素原子若しくはヨウ素原子を有していてもよいアリール基、又はこれらを組み合わせた基を表す。 L 5 represents a single bond or an ester group. R 9 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom. R10 may have a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, a cycloalkyl group which may have a fluorine atom or an iodine atom, a fluorine atom or an iodine atom. Represents an aryl group or a group combining these.
 フッ素原子又はヨウ素原子を有する繰り返し単位を以下に例示する。 Examples of repeating units having a fluorine atom or an iodine atom are shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
 単位Xの含有量は、樹脂(A)中の全繰り返し単位に対して、0モル%以上が好ましく、5モル%以上がより好ましく、10モル%以上が更に好ましい。また、その上限値としては、樹脂(A)中の全繰り返し単位に対して、50モル%以下が好ましく、45モル%以下がより好ましく、40モル%以下が更に好ましい。 The content of unit X is preferably 0 mol% or more, more preferably 5 mol% or more, and even more preferably 10 mol% or more, based on all repeating units in the resin (A). Moreover, the upper limit thereof is preferably 50 mol% or less, more preferably 45 mol% or less, and even more preferably 40 mol% or less, based on all repeating units in the resin (A).
 樹脂(A)の繰り返し単位のうち、フッ素原子、臭素原子及びヨウ素原子の少なくとも1つを含む繰り返し単位の合計含有量は、樹脂(A)の全繰り返し単位に対して、10モル%以上が好ましく、20モル%以上がより好ましく、30モル%以上が更に好ましく、40モル%以上が特に好ましい。上限値は特に制限されないが、例えば、樹脂(A)の全繰り返し単位に対して、100モル%以下である。
 なお、フッ素原子、臭素原子及びヨウ素原子の少なくとも1つを含む繰り返し単位としては、例えば、フッ素原子、臭素原子又はヨウ素原子を有し、かつ、酸分解性基を有する繰り返し単位、フッ素原子、臭素原子又はヨウ素原子を有し、かつ、酸基を有する繰り返し単位、及びフッ素原子、臭素原子又はヨウ素原子を有する繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
Among the repeating units of the resin (A), the total content of repeating units containing at least one of a fluorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom is preferably 10 mol% or more based on all repeating units of the resin (A). , more preferably 20 mol% or more, still more preferably 30 mol% or more, particularly preferably 40 mol% or more. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is, for example, 100 mol% or less based on all repeating units of the resin (A).
Note that the repeating unit containing at least one of a fluorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom includes, for example, a repeating unit having a fluorine atom, a bromine atom, or an iodine atom and an acid-decomposable group, a fluorine atom, a bromine atom, and a repeating unit having an acid-decomposable group. Examples include repeating units having an atom or an iodine atom and an acid group, and repeating units having a fluorine atom, a bromine atom, or an iodine atom.
(光酸発生基を有する繰り返し単位)
 樹脂(A)は、上記以外の繰り返し単位として、活性光線又は放射線(好ましくは電子線又は極紫外線)の照射により酸を発生する基(以下、「光酸発生基」ともいう)を有する繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。
 光酸発生基を有する繰り返し単位としては、式(4)で表される繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
(Repeating unit with photoacid generating group)
The resin (A) is a repeating unit having a group that generates an acid upon irradiation with actinic rays or radiation (preferably an electron beam or extreme ultraviolet rays) (hereinafter also referred to as a "photoacid generating group") as a repeating unit other than the above. It may have.
Examples of the repeating unit having a photoacid generating group include a repeating unit represented by formula (4).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
 R41は、水素原子又はメチル基を表す。L41は、単結合、又は2価の連結基を表す。L42は、2価の連結基を表す。R40は、活性光線又は放射線の照射により分解して側鎖に酸を発生させる構造部位を表す。
 光酸発生基を有する繰り返し単位を以下に例示するが、これらに限定されない。
R 41 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group. L 41 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. L 42 represents a divalent linking group. R 40 represents a structural moiety that decomposes upon irradiation with actinic rays or radiation to generate an acid in the side chain.
Examples of repeating units having a photoacid generating group are shown below, but the invention is not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
 そのほか、式(4)で表される繰り返し単位としては、例えば、特開2014-041327号公報の段落[0094]~[0105]に記載された繰り返し単位、及び国際公開第2018/193954号の段落[0094]に記載された繰り返し単位が挙げられる。 In addition, examples of the repeating unit represented by formula (4) include repeating units described in paragraphs [0094] to [0105] of JP2014-041327A and paragraphs of International Publication No. 2018/193954. Examples include the repeating units described in [0094].
 樹脂(A)が光酸発生基を有する繰り返し単位を含む場合、光酸発生基を有する繰り返し単位の含有量は、樹脂(A)中の全繰り返し単位に対して、1モル%以上が好ましく、5モル%以上がより好ましい。また、その上限値としては、樹脂(A)中の全繰り返し単位に対して、40モル%以下が好ましく、35モル%以下がより好ましく、30モル%以下が更に好ましい。 When the resin (A) contains a repeating unit having a photoacid generating group, the content of the repeating unit having a photoacid generating group is preferably 1 mol% or more with respect to all repeating units in the resin (A), More preferably 5 mol% or more. Further, the upper limit thereof is preferably 40 mol% or less, more preferably 35 mol% or less, and even more preferably 30 mol% or less, based on all repeating units in the resin (A).
(式(V-1)又は下記式(V-2)で表される繰り返し単位)
 樹脂(A)は、下記式(V-1)、又は下記式(V-2)で表される繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。
 下記式(V-1)、及び下記式(V-2)で表される繰り返し単位は上述の繰り返し単位とは異なる繰り返し単位であることが好ましい。
(Repeating unit represented by formula (V-1) or the following formula (V-2))
The resin (A) may have a repeating unit represented by the following formula (V-1) or the following formula (V-2).
The repeating units represented by the following formulas (V-1) and (V-2) are preferably repeating units different from the above-mentioned repeating units.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
 式中、
 R及びRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、水酸基、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アシロキシ基、シアノ基、ニトロ基、アミノ基、ハロゲン原子、エステル基(-OCOR又は-COOR:Rは炭素数1~6のアルキル基又はフッ素化アルキル基)、又はカルボキシル基を表す。アルキル基としては、炭素数1~10の直鎖状、分岐鎖状又は環状のアルキル基が好ましい。
 nは、0~6の整数を表す。
 nは、0~4の整数を表す。
 Xは、メチレン基、酸素原子、又は硫黄原子である。
 式(V-1)又は(V-2)で表される繰り返し単位を以下に例示する。
 式(V-1)又は(V-2)で表される繰り返し単位としては、例えば、国際公開第2018/193954号の段落[0100]に記載された繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
During the ceremony,
R 6 and R 7 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an amino group, a halogen atom, an ester group (-OCOR or -COOR: R is the number of carbon atoms 1 to 6 alkyl groups or fluorinated alkyl groups), or carboxyl groups. The alkyl group is preferably a linear, branched or cyclic alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
n 3 represents an integer from 0 to 6.
n 4 represents an integer from 0 to 4.
X 4 is a methylene group, an oxygen atom, or a sulfur atom.
The repeating units represented by formula (V-1) or (V-2) are illustrated below.
Examples of the repeating unit represented by formula (V-1) or (V-2) include the repeating unit described in paragraph [0100] of International Publication No. 2018/193954.
(主鎖の運動性を低下させるための繰り返し単位)
 樹脂(A)は、発生酸の過剰な拡散又は現像時のパターン崩壊を抑制できる点から、ガラス転移温度(Tg)が高い方が好ましい。Tgは、90℃より大きいことが好ましく、100℃より大きいことがより好ましく、110℃より大きいことが更に好ましく、125℃より大きいことが特に好ましい。なお、現像液への溶解速度が優れる点から、Tgは400℃以下が好ましく、350℃以下がより好ましい。
 なお、本明細書において、樹脂(A)等のポリマーのガラス転移温度(Tg)(以下「繰り返し単位のTg」)は、以下の方法で算出する。まず、ポリマー中に含まれる各繰り返し単位のみからなるホモポリマーのTgを、Bicerano法によりそれぞれ算出する。次に、ポリマー中の全繰り返し単位に対する、各繰り返し単位の質量割合(%)を算出する。次に、Foxの式(Materials Letters 62(2008)3152等に記載)を用いて各質量割合におけるTgを算出して、それらを総和して、ポリマーのTg(℃)とする。
 Bicerano法は、Prediction of polymer properties, Marcel Dekker Inc, New York(1993)に記載されている。Bicerano法によるTgの算出は、ポリマーの物性概算ソフトウェアMDL Polymer(MDL Information Systems, Inc.)を用いて行うことができる。
(Repeat unit to reduce main chain mobility)
The resin (A) preferably has a high glass transition temperature (Tg) from the viewpoint of suppressing excessive diffusion of generated acid or pattern collapse during development. Tg is preferably greater than 90°C, more preferably greater than 100°C, even more preferably greater than 110°C, and particularly preferably greater than 125°C. In addition, from the viewpoint of excellent dissolution rate in a developer, Tg is preferably 400°C or less, more preferably 350°C or less.
In this specification, the glass transition temperature (Tg) of a polymer such as resin (A) (hereinafter referred to as "Tg of a repeating unit") is calculated by the following method. First, the Tg of a homopolymer consisting only of each repeating unit contained in the polymer is calculated by the Bicerano method. Next, the mass ratio (%) of each repeating unit to all repeating units in the polymer is calculated. Next, the Tg at each mass ratio is calculated using Fox's formula (described in Materials Letters 62 (2008) 3152, etc.), and these are summed to determine the Tg (° C.) of the polymer.
The Bicerano method is described in Prediction of polymer properties, Marcel Dekker Inc, New York (1993). Calculation of Tg by the Bicerano method can be performed using polymer physical property estimation software MDL Polymer (MDL Information Systems, Inc.).
 樹脂(A)のTgを大きくする(好ましくは、Tgを90℃超とする)には、樹脂(A)の主鎖の運動性を低下させることが好ましい。樹脂(A)の主鎖の運動性を低下させる方法は、以下の(a)~(e)の方法が挙げられる。
 (a)主鎖への嵩高い置換基の導入
 (b)主鎖への複数の置換基の導入
 (c)主鎖近傍への樹脂(A)間の相互作用を誘発する置換基の導入
 (d)環状構造での主鎖形成
 (e)主鎖への環状構造の連結
 なお、樹脂(A)は、ホモポリマーのTgが130℃以上を示す繰り返し単位を有することが好ましい。
 なお、ホモポリマーのTgが130℃以上を示す繰り返し単位の種類は特に制限されず、Bicerano法により算出されるホモポリマーのTgが130℃以上である繰り返し単位であればよい。なお、後述する式(A)~式(E)で表される繰り返し単位中の官能基の種類によっては、ホモポリマーのTgが130℃以上を示す繰り返し単位に該当する。
In order to increase the Tg of the resin (A) (preferably to make the Tg higher than 90° C.), it is preferable to reduce the mobility of the main chain of the resin (A). Examples of methods for reducing the mobility of the main chain of resin (A) include the following methods (a) to (e).
(a) Introduction of a bulky substituent to the main chain (b) Introduction of multiple substituents to the main chain (c) Introduction of a substituent that induces interaction between the resins (A) near the main chain ( d) Main chain formation with a cyclic structure (e) Connection of the cyclic structure to the main chain It is preferable that the resin (A) has a repeating unit whose homopolymer Tg is 130° C. or higher.
The type of repeating unit whose homopolymer Tg is 130°C or higher is not particularly limited, and any repeating unit whose homopolymer Tg calculated by the Bicerano method is 130°C or higher may be used. Note that, depending on the type of functional group in the repeating units represented by formulas (A) to (E) described below, the repeating units correspond to homopolymer Tg of 130° C. or higher.
 上記(a)の具体的な達成手段の一例としては、樹脂(A)に式(A)で表される繰り返し単位を導入する方法が挙げられる。 An example of a specific means for achieving the above (a) is a method of introducing a repeating unit represented by the formula (A) into the resin (A).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
 式(A)、Rは、多環構造を含む基を表す。Rは、水素原子、メチル基、又はエチル基を表す。多環構造を含む基とは、複数の環構造を含む基であり、複数の環構造は縮合していても、縮合していなくてもよい。
 式(A)で表される繰り返し単位の具体例としては、国際公開第2018/193954号の段落[0107]~[0119]に記載のものが挙げられる。
In formula (A), R A represents a group containing a polycyclic structure. R x represents a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, or an ethyl group. A group containing a polycyclic structure is a group containing a plurality of ring structures, and the plurality of ring structures may or may not be condensed.
Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by formula (A) include those described in paragraphs [0107] to [0119] of International Publication No. 2018/193954.
 上記(b)の具体的な達成手段の一例としては、樹脂(A)に式(B)で表される繰り返し単位を導入する方法が挙げられる。 An example of a specific means for achieving the above (b) is a method of introducing a repeating unit represented by the formula (B) into the resin (A).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
 式(B)中、Rb1~Rb4は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は有機基を表し、Rb1~Rb4のうち少なくとも2つ以上が有機基を表す。
 有機基の少なくとも1つが、繰り返し単位中の主鎖に直接環構造が連結している基である場合、他の有機基の種類は特に制限されない。
 また、有機基のいずれも繰り返し単位中の主鎖に直接環構造が連結している基ではない場合、有機基の少なくとも2つ以上は、水素原子を除く構成原子の数が3つ以上である置換基である。
 式(B)で表される繰り返し単位の具体例としては、国際公開第2018/193954号の段落[0113]~[0115]に記載のものが挙げられる。
In formula (B), R b1 to R b4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an organic group, and at least two or more of R b1 to R b4 represent an organic group.
When at least one of the organic groups is a group in which a ring structure is directly connected to the main chain in the repeating unit, the types of other organic groups are not particularly limited.
In addition, if none of the organic groups is a group in which a ring structure is directly connected to the main chain in the repeating unit, at least two or more of the organic groups have three or more constituent atoms excluding hydrogen atoms. It is a substituent.
Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by formula (B) include those described in paragraphs [0113] to [0115] of International Publication No. 2018/193954.
 上記(c)の具体的な達成手段の一例としては、樹脂(A)に式(C)で表される繰り返し単位を導入する方法が挙げられる。 An example of a specific means for achieving the above (c) is a method of introducing a repeating unit represented by the formula (C) into the resin (A).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
 式(C)中、Rc1~Rc4は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は有機基を表し、Rc1~Rc4のうち少なくとも1つが、主鎖炭素から原子数3以内に水素結合性の水素原子を含む基である。なかでも、樹脂(A)の主鎖間の相互作用を誘発するうえで、原子数2以内(より主鎖近傍側)に水素結合性の水素原子を有することが好ましい。
 式(C)で表される繰り返し単位の具体例としては、国際公開第2018/193954号の段落[0119]~[0121]に記載のものが挙げられる。
In formula (C), R c1 to R c4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an organic group, and at least one of R c1 to R c4 has a hydrogen bonding property within 3 atoms from the main chain carbon. A group containing an atom. Among these, in order to induce interaction between the main chains of the resin (A), it is preferable to have hydrogen atoms capable of hydrogen bonding within 2 atoms (closer to the main chain).
Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by formula (C) include those described in paragraphs [0119] to [0121] of International Publication No. 2018/193954.
 上記(d)の具体的な達成手段の一例としては、樹脂(A)に式(D)で表される繰り返し単位を導入する方法が挙げられる。 An example of a specific means for achieving the above (d) is a method of introducing a repeating unit represented by the formula (D) into the resin (A).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
 式(D)中、「Cyclic」は、環状構造で主鎖を形成している基を表す。環の構成原子数は特に制限されない。
 式(D)で表される繰り返し単位の具体例としては、国際公開第2018/193954号の段落[0126]~[0127]に記載のものが挙げられる。
In formula (D), "Cyclic" represents a group forming a main chain with a cyclic structure. The number of atoms constituting the ring is not particularly limited.
Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by formula (D) include those described in paragraphs [0126] to [0127] of International Publication No. 2018/193954.
 上記(e)の具体的な達成手段の一例としては、樹脂(A)に式(E)で表される繰り返し単位を導入する方法が挙げられる。 An example of a specific means for achieving the above (e) is a method of introducing a repeating unit represented by the formula (E) into the resin (A).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
 式(E)中、Reは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は有機基を表す。有機基としては、例えば、置換基を有してもよい、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、及びアルケニル基が挙げられる。
 「Cyclic」は、主鎖の炭素原子を含む環状基である。環状基に含まれる原子数は特に制限されない。
 式(E)で表される繰り返し単位の具体例としては、国際公開第2018/193954号の段落[0131]~[0133]に記載のものが挙げられる。
In formula (E), Re each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group. Examples of the organic group include an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, and an alkenyl group, which may have a substituent.
"Cyclic" is a cyclic group containing backbone carbon atoms. The number of atoms contained in the cyclic group is not particularly limited.
Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by formula (E) include those described in paragraphs [0131] to [0133] of International Publication No. 2018/193954.
(ラクトン基、スルトン基、カーボネート基、水酸基、シアノ基、及びアルカリ可溶性基から選ばれる少なくとも1種類の基を有する繰り返し単位)
 樹脂(A)は、ラクトン基、スルトン基、カーボネート基、水酸基、シアノ基、及びアルカリ可溶性基から選ばれる少なくとも1種類の基を有する繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。
 樹脂(A)が有するラクトン基、スルトン基、又はカーボネート基を有する繰り返し単位としては、上述した<ラクトン基、スルトン基、又はカーボネート基を有する繰り返し単位>で説明した繰り返し単位が挙げられる。好ましい含有量も上述した<ラクトン基、スルトン基、又はカーボネート基を有する繰り返し単位>で説明した通りである。
(Repeating unit having at least one type of group selected from lactone group, sultone group, carbonate group, hydroxyl group, cyano group, and alkali-soluble group)
The resin (A) may have a repeating unit having at least one type of group selected from a lactone group, a sultone group, a carbonate group, a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, and an alkali-soluble group.
Examples of the repeating unit having a lactone group, sultone group, or carbonate group that the resin (A) has include the repeating units described in <Repeating unit having a lactone group, sultone group, or carbonate group> described above. The preferable content is also as explained above in <Repeating unit having lactone group, sultone group, or carbonate group>.
 樹脂(A)は、水酸基又はシアノ基を有する繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。これにより基板密着性、現像液親和性が向上する。
 水酸基又はシアノ基を有する繰り返し単位は、水酸基又はシアノ基で置換された脂環式炭化水素構造を有する繰り返し単位であることが好ましい。
 水酸基又はシアノ基を有する繰り返し単位は、酸分解性基を有さないことが好ましい。水酸基又はシアノ基を有する繰り返し単位としては、特開2014-098921号公報の段落[0081]~[0084]に記載のものが挙げられる。
The resin (A) may have a repeating unit having a hydroxyl group or a cyano group. This improves substrate adhesion and developer affinity.
The repeating unit having a hydroxyl group or a cyano group is preferably a repeating unit having an alicyclic hydrocarbon structure substituted with a hydroxyl group or a cyano group.
The repeating unit having a hydroxyl group or a cyano group preferably does not have an acid-decomposable group. Examples of the repeating unit having a hydroxyl group or a cyano group include those described in paragraphs [0081] to [0084] of JP-A No. 2014-098921.
 樹脂(A)は、アルカリ可溶性基を有する繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。
 アルカリ可溶性基としては、カルボキシル基、スルホンアミド基、スルホニルイミド基、ビススルホニルイミド基、及びα位が電子求引性基で置換された脂肪族アルコール基(例えば、ヘキサフルオロイソプロパノール基)が挙げられ、カルボキシル基が好ましい。樹脂(A)がアルカリ可溶性基を有する繰り返し単位を含むことにより、コンタクトホール用途での解像性が増す。アルカリ可溶性基を有する繰り返し単位としては、特開2014-098921号公報の段落[0085]及び[0086]に記載のものが挙げられる。
The resin (A) may have a repeating unit having an alkali-soluble group.
Examples of the alkali-soluble group include a carboxyl group, a sulfonamide group, a sulfonylimide group, a bissulfonylimide group, and an aliphatic alcohol group substituted with an electron-withdrawing group at the α position (for example, a hexafluoroisopropanol group). , carboxyl group is preferred. When the resin (A) contains a repeating unit having an alkali-soluble group, resolution in contact hole applications increases. Examples of the repeating unit having an alkali-soluble group include those described in paragraphs [0085] and [0086] of JP-A-2014-098921.
(脂環式炭化水素構造を有し、酸分解性を示さない繰り返し単位)
 樹脂(A)は、脂環式炭化水素構造を有し、酸分解性を示さない繰り返し単位を有してもよい。これにより液浸露光時にレジスト膜から液浸液への低分子成分の溶出が低減できる。脂環式炭化水素構造を有し、酸分解性を示さない繰り返し単位として、例えば、1-アダマンチル(メタ)アクリレート、ジアマンチル(メタ)アクリレート、トリシクロデカニル(メタ)アクリレート、又はシクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート由来の繰り返し単位が挙げられる。
(Repeating unit that has an alicyclic hydrocarbon structure and does not show acid decomposition)
The resin (A) has an alicyclic hydrocarbon structure and may have repeating units that are not acid-decomposable. This can reduce the elution of low molecular weight components from the resist film into the immersion liquid during immersion exposure. Examples of repeating units having an alicyclic hydrocarbon structure and not showing acid decomposability include 1-adamantyl (meth)acrylate, diamantyl (meth)acrylate, tricyclodecanyl (meth)acrylate, or cyclohexyl (meth)acrylate. Examples include repeating units derived from acrylates.
(水酸基及びシアノ基のいずれも有さない、式(III)で表される繰り返し単位)
 樹脂(A)は、水酸基及びシアノ基のいずれも有さない、式(III)で表される繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。
(Repeating unit represented by formula (III) that does not have either a hydroxyl group or a cyano group)
The resin (A) may have a repeating unit represented by formula (III) that does not have either a hydroxyl group or a cyano group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
 式(III)中、Rは少なくとも1つの環状構造を有し、水酸基及びシアノ基のいずれも有さない炭化水素基を表す。
 Raは水素原子、アルキル基又は-CH-O-Ra基を表す。式中、Raは、水素原子、アルキル基又はアシル基を表す。
 水酸基及びシアノ基のいずれも有さない、式(III)で表される繰り返し単位としては、特開2014-098921号公報の段落[0087]~[0094]に記載のものが挙げられる。
In formula (III), R 5 represents a hydrocarbon group having at least one cyclic structure and having neither a hydroxyl group nor a cyano group.
Ra represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or two groups of -CH 2 -O-Ra. In the formula, Ra 2 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an acyl group.
Examples of the repeating unit represented by formula (III) having neither a hydroxyl group nor a cyano group include those described in paragraphs [0087] to [0094] of JP-A No. 2014-098921.
(その他の繰り返し単位)
 更に、樹脂(A)は、上述した繰り返し単位以外のその他の繰り返し単位を有してもよい。
 例えば樹脂(A)は、オキサチアン環基を有する繰り返し単位、オキサゾロン環基を有する繰り返し単位、ジオキサン環基を有する繰り返し単位、及びヒダントイン環基を有する繰り返し単位からなる群から選択される繰り返し単位を有していてもよい。
 上述した繰り返し単位以外のその他の繰り返し単位の具体例を以下に例示する。
(Other repeat units)
Furthermore, the resin (A) may have repeating units other than the above-mentioned repeating units.
For example, the resin (A) has a repeating unit selected from the group consisting of a repeating unit having an oxathian ring group, a repeating unit having an oxazolone ring group, a repeating unit having a dioxane ring group, and a repeating unit having a hydantoin ring group. You may do so.
Specific examples of repeating units other than the above-mentioned repeating units are illustrated below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
 樹脂(A)は、上記の繰り返し構造単位以外に、ドライエッチング耐性、標準現像液適性、基板密着性、レジストプロファイル、解像性、耐熱性、及び感度等を調節する目的で様々な繰り返し構造単位を有していてもよい。 In addition to the above-mentioned repeating structural units, the resin (A) contains various repeating structural units for the purpose of adjusting dry etching resistance, standard developer suitability, substrate adhesion, resist profile, resolution, heat resistance, sensitivity, etc. It may have.
 樹脂(A)としては、特に、本発明の組成物がArF用の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物として用いられる場合、繰り返し単位の全てが、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物に由来する繰り返し単位で構成されることが好ましい。特に、繰り返し単位の全てが(メタ)アクリレート系繰り返し単位で構成されることも好ましい。繰り返し単位の全てが(メタ)アクリレート系繰り返し単位で構成される場合、繰り返し単位の全てがメタクリレート系繰り返し単位であるもの、繰り返し単位の全てがアクリレート系繰り返し単位であるもの、繰り返し単位の全てがメタクリレート系繰り返し単位とアクリレート系繰り返し単位とによるもののいずれのものでも用いることができ、アクリレート系繰り返し単位が全繰り返し単位の50モル%以下であることが好ましい。 As the resin (A), especially when the composition of the present invention is used as an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition for ArF, all of the repeating units are derived from a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond. It is preferable to be composed of repeating units. In particular, it is also preferable that all of the repeating units are composed of (meth)acrylate repeating units. When all of the repeating units are composed of (meth)acrylate repeating units, all of the repeating units are methacrylate repeating units, all of the repeating units are acrylate repeating units, and all of the repeating units are methacrylate. Either a type repeating unit or an acrylate type repeating unit can be used, and it is preferable that the acrylate type repeating unit accounts for 50 mol% or less of the total repeating units.
 樹脂(A)は、常法に従って(例えばラジカル重合)合成できる。
 GPC法によりポリスチレン換算値として、樹脂(A)の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、30,000以下が好ましく、1,000~30,000がより好ましく、3,000~30,000が更に好ましく、5,000~15,000が特に好ましい。
 樹脂(A)の分散度(分子量分布、Pd、Mw/Mn)は、1~5が好ましく、1~3がより好ましく、1.2~3.0が更に好ましく、1.2~2.0が特に好ましい。分散度が小さいものほど、解像度、及びレジスト形状がより優れ、更に、レジストパターンの側壁がよりスムーズであり、ラフネス性にもより優れる。
Resin (A) can be synthesized according to conventional methods (eg, radical polymerization).
The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin (A) is preferably 30,000 or less, more preferably 1,000 to 30,000, even more preferably 3,000 to 30,000, as a polystyrene equivalent value determined by GPC method. Particularly preferred is 5,000 to 15,000.
The degree of dispersion (molecular weight distribution, Pd, Mw/Mn) of the resin (A) is preferably 1 to 5, more preferably 1 to 3, even more preferably 1.2 to 3.0, and 1.2 to 2.0. is particularly preferred. The smaller the degree of dispersion, the better the resolution and resist shape, the smoother the sidewalls of the resist pattern, and the better the roughness.
 本発明の組成物において、樹脂(A)の含有量は、本発明の組成物の全固形分に対して、40.0~99.9質量%が好ましく、60.0~90.0質量%がより好ましい。
 樹脂(A)は、1種で使用してもよいし、2種以上使用してもよい。2種以上使用する場合は、その合計含有量が、上記好適含有量の範囲内であるのが好ましい。
In the composition of the present invention, the content of the resin (A) is preferably 40.0 to 99.9% by mass, and 60.0 to 90.0% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition of the present invention. is more preferable.
The resin (A) may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total content is within the above-mentioned preferred content range.
[塩(B)]
 本発明の組成物に含まれる塩(B)について説明する。
 塩(B)は、下記一般式(T1)で表される化合物である。
 塩(B)は、活性光線又は放射線の照射により酸を発生する化合物(光酸発生剤)であってもよいし、光酸発生剤ではなくてもよいが、活性光線又は放射線の照射により、pKaが-1~9の酸を発生する化合物であることが好ましい。
 塩(B)は、光酸発生剤(例えば、後述する塩(C)など)から発生する酸に対して相対的に弱酸となる酸の塩の場合、酸拡散制御剤として機能することができる。酸拡散制御剤は、露光時に、光酸発生剤(例えば、後述する塩(C)など)等から発生する酸をトラップし、余分な発生酸による、未露光部における酸分解性樹脂の反応を抑制するクエンチャーとして作用する。
[Salt (B)]
The salt (B) contained in the composition of the present invention will be explained.
Salt (B) is a compound represented by the following general formula (T1).
The salt (B) may be a compound (photoacid generator) that generates an acid upon irradiation with actinic rays or radiation, or may not be a photoacid generator, but upon irradiation with actinic rays or radiation, A compound that generates an acid with a pKa of -1 to 9 is preferable.
Salt (B) can function as an acid diffusion control agent in the case of a salt of an acid that is a relatively weak acid with respect to the acid generated from a photoacid generator (for example, salt (C) described below). . The acid diffusion control agent traps the acid generated from the photoacid generator (for example, salt (C) described below) etc. during exposure, and prevents the reaction of the acid-decomposable resin in the unexposed area due to the excess generated acid. Acts as a quencher.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000029
 一般式(T1)中、Arbは、芳香環を表す。上記芳香環は置換基を有してもよい。
 Qは、酸の残基を表す。
 一般式(T1)中のアニオンは、pKaが-1~9の酸の共役塩基である。
 Rbは、-OH、-ORb、-NRbRb、-SH、又は-SRbを表し、複数のRbは同一でも異なっていてもよい。
 Rbは、アルキル基、アリール基、又はアシル基を表す。
 Rb及びRbは、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基、又はアシル基を表す。
 Rbは、アルキル基、アリール基、又はアシル基を表す。
 Rb~Rbのうち少なくとも2つが互いに結合し環を形成してもよい。Arbが置換基を有する場合、上記置換基とRb~Rbの少なくとも1つが結合して環を形成してもよい。
 Lbは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。Lbは、Rbに含まれる水素原子を置換する形でRbと結合して環を形成してもよい。Lbは、Rb~Rbの少なくとも1つと結合して環を形成してもよい。Arbが置換基を有する場合、上記置換基とLbは結合して環を形成してもよい。
 pは2~5の整数を表す。
 Gm+は、m価の有機カチオンを表す。mは1以上の整数を表す。
In general formula (T1), Arb represents an aromatic ring. The above aromatic ring may have a substituent.
Q represents an acid residue.
The anion in general formula (T1) is a conjugate base of an acid with a pKa of -1 to 9.
Rb 1 represents -OH, -ORb 2 , -NRb 3 Rb 4 , -SH, or -SRb 5 , and multiple Rb 1 's may be the same or different.
Rb 2 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or an acyl group.
Rb 3 and Rb 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or an acyl group.
Rb 5 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or an acyl group.
At least two of Rb 2 to Rb 5 may be bonded to each other to form a ring. When Arb has a substituent, the above substituent and at least one of Rb 2 to Rb 5 may be bonded to form a ring.
Lb 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Lb 1 may be combined with Rb 1 to form a ring by substituting a hydrogen atom contained in Rb 1 . Lb 1 may be bonded to at least one of Rb 2 to Rb 5 to form a ring. When Arb has a substituent, the substituent and Lb 1 may be combined to form a ring.
p represents an integer from 2 to 5.
G m+ represents an m-valent organic cation. m represents an integer of 1 or more.
 一般式(T1)で表される化合物の分子量は、3000以下が好ましく、2000以下がより好ましく、1000以下が更に好ましい。下限は特に制限されないが、100以上が好ましい。 The molecular weight of the compound represented by general formula (T1) is preferably 3000 or less, more preferably 2000 or less, and even more preferably 1000 or less. The lower limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 100 or more.
 一般式(T1)中のArbは、芳香環を表す。上記芳香環に含まれる環員としての炭素原子の数は4~20であることが好ましく、5~15であることがより好ましく、6~10であることが更に好ましい。
 上記芳香環としては、芳香族炭化水素環であっても芳香族複素環であってもよいが、芳香族炭化水素環であることが好ましい。芳香族炭化水素環としては、ベンゼン環、ナフタレン環、アントラセン環などが挙げられ、ベンゼン環又はナフタレン環が好ましく、ベンゼン環がより好ましい。芳香族複素環としては、窒素原子、硫黄原子及び酸素原子からなる群より選択される少なくとも1つのヘテロ原子を含む芳香族複素環が好ましい。
Arb in general formula (T1) represents an aromatic ring. The number of carbon atoms as ring members contained in the aromatic ring is preferably 4 to 20, more preferably 5 to 15, and even more preferably 6 to 10.
The aromatic ring may be an aromatic hydrocarbon ring or an aromatic heterocycle, but is preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon ring. Examples of the aromatic hydrocarbon ring include a benzene ring, a naphthalene ring, an anthracene ring, etc., with a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring being preferred, and a benzene ring being more preferred. The aromatic heterocycle is preferably an aromatic heterocycle containing at least one heteroatom selected from the group consisting of a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom, and an oxygen atom.
 Arbが表す芳香環には、Lb及びRbが結合しているが、Arbが表す芳香環は、これら以外に更に置換基を有していてもよい。上記置換基としては、例えば、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基などの炭素数1~10の有機基が挙げられる。 Although Lb 1 and Rb 1 are bonded to the aromatic ring represented by Arb, the aromatic ring represented by Arb may further have a substituent in addition to these. Examples of the above-mentioned substituents include organic groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, such as alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, alkynyl groups, cycloalkyl groups, and aryl groups.
 一般式(T1)中のRbは、-OH、-ORb、-NRbRb、-SH、又は-SRbを表す。Rbは、アルキル基、アリール基、又はアシル基を表す。Rb及びRbは、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基、又はアシル基を表す。Rbは、アルキル基、アリール基、又はアシル基を表す。
 Rb~Rbが表すアルキル基は、直鎖状及び分岐鎖状のいずれであってもよい。アルキル基の炭素数は特に制限されないが、1~10が好ましく、1~5がより好ましい。
 Rb~Rbが表すアリール基の炭素数は特に制限されないが、6~20が好ましく、6~10がより好ましい。アリール基としては、フェニル基又はナフチル基が好ましく、フェニル基がより好ましい。
 Rb~Rbが表すアシル基中に含まれ得るアルキル基としては直鎖状及び分岐鎖状のいずれであってもよい。アシル基中に含まれ得るアルキル基の炭素数は特に制限されないが、1~10が好ましく、1~5がより好ましい。
 Rb~Rbが表すアシル基中に含まれ得るアリール基の炭素数は特に制限されないが、6~20が好ましく、6~10がより好ましい。アシル基中に含まれ得るアリール基としては、フェニル基又はナフチル基が好ましく、フェニル基がより好ましい。
 Rbは、-OH、-NH、又は-SHであることが好ましい。Rbのうち少なくとも1つが-OHであることが特に好ましい。
Rb 1 in general formula (T1) represents -OH, -ORb 2 , -NRb 3 Rb 4 , -SH, or -SRb 5 . Rb 2 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or an acyl group. Rb 3 and Rb 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or an acyl group. Rb 5 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or an acyl group.
The alkyl group represented by Rb 2 to Rb 5 may be either linear or branched. The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is not particularly limited, but is preferably from 1 to 10, more preferably from 1 to 5.
The number of carbon atoms in the aryl group represented by Rb 2 to Rb 5 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 10. As the aryl group, a phenyl group or a naphthyl group is preferable, and a phenyl group is more preferable.
The alkyl group that may be contained in the acyl group represented by Rb 2 to Rb 5 may be either linear or branched. The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group that may be contained in the acyl group is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5.
The number of carbon atoms in the aryl group that can be contained in the acyl group represented by Rb 2 to Rb 5 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 10. The aryl group that may be included in the acyl group is preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group, and more preferably a phenyl group.
Rb 1 is preferably -OH, -NH 2 or -SH. It is particularly preferred that at least one of Rb 1 is -OH.
 一般式(T1)中のLbは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。2価の連結基としては、炭素数1~10の有機連結基、エーテル基、チオエーテル基、カルボニル基及びこれらの組み合わせが好ましく、例えば、アルキレン基、シクロアルキレン基、アルケニレン基、アルキニレン基、アリーレン基等が挙げられる。 Lb 1 in general formula (T1) represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. The divalent linking group is preferably an organic linking group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an ether group, a thioether group, a carbonyl group, or a combination thereof, such as an alkylene group, a cycloalkylene group, an alkenylene group, an alkynylene group, or an arylene group. etc.
 一般式(T1)中のpは2~5の整数を表し、2~4の整数を表すことが好ましく、2又は3を表すことがより好ましい。 p in general formula (T1) represents an integer of 2 to 5, preferably represents an integer of 2 to 4, and more preferably represents 2 or 3.
 一般式(T1)中のQは、酸の残基を表す。酸の残基としては、カルボキシレートアニオン基(-COO)、スルホネートアニオン基(-SO )、又はスルホンアミド基(-N-SON1で表される。RN1は有機基を表し、アルキル基、フルオロアルキル基、アリール基が好ましい。)が好ましく、カルボキシレートアニオン基がより好ましい。
 一般式(T1)中のアニオン(下記一般式(T1A)で表されるアニオン)は、pKaが-1~9の酸の共役塩基であり、pKaが0~7の酸の共役塩基であることが好ましく、pKaが1~6の酸の共役塩基であることがより好ましい。換言すると、一般式(T1A)で表されるアニオンの共役酸のpKaは-1~9であり、0~7であることが好ましく、1~6であることがより好ましい。
Q in general formula (T1) represents an acid residue. The acid residue is represented by a carboxylate anion group (-COO - ), a sulfonate anion group (-SO 3 - ), or a sulfonamide group (-N - -SO 2 R N1 . R N1 is an organic group represents an alkyl group, a fluoroalkyl group, and an aryl group are preferable, and a carboxylate anion group is more preferable.
The anion in general formula (T1) (the anion represented by general formula (T1A) below) is a conjugate base of an acid with a pKa of -1 to 9, and a conjugate base of an acid with a pKa of 0 to 7. is preferable, and a conjugate base of an acid having a pKa of 1 to 6 is more preferable. In other words, the pKa of the conjugate acid of the anion represented by the general formula (T1A) is -1 to 9, preferably 0 to 7, and more preferably 1 to 6.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
 一般式(T1A)中、Arb、Q、Rb、Lb、及びpは、それぞれ一般式(T1)中のArb、Q、Rb、Lb、及びpと同じ意味を表す。 In general formula (T1A), Arb, Q, Rb 1 , Lb 1 and p represent the same meanings as Arb, Q, Rb 1 , Lb 1 and p in general formula (T1), respectively.
 一般式(T1)中のアニオン(一般式(T1A)で表されるアニオン)の具体例を以下に示すが、これらに限定されない。 Specific examples of the anion in general formula (T1) (anion represented by general formula (T1A)) are shown below, but are not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
 一般式(T1)中のGm+は、m価の有機カチオンを表す。mは1以上の整数を表し、1~3の整数を表すことが好ましく、1又は2を表すことがより好ましく、1を表すことが更に好ましい。
 Gm+の有機カチオンとしては特に制限されない。有機カチオンとしては、スルホニウムカチオン、ヨードニウムカチオン、又はアンモニウムカチオンが好ましい。有機カチオンとしては、式(ZaI)で表されるカチオン(以下「カチオン(ZaI)」ともいう。)、又は、式(ZaII)で表されるカチオン(以下「カチオン(ZaII)」ともいう。)がより好ましい。
G m+ in general formula (T1) represents an m-valent organic cation. m represents an integer of 1 or more, preferably an integer of 1 to 3, more preferably 1 or 2, even more preferably 1.
The organic cation of G m+ is not particularly limited. As the organic cation, a sulfonium cation, an iodonium cation, or an ammonium cation is preferable. Examples of the organic cation include a cation represented by formula (ZaI) (hereinafter also referred to as "cation (ZaI)"), or a cation represented by formula (ZaII) (hereinafter also referred to as "cation (ZaII)"). is more preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
 上記式(ZaI)において、R201、R202、及びR203は、それぞれ独立に、有機基を表す。
 R201、R202、及びR203としての有機基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~20がより好ましい。R201~R203のうち2つが結合して環構造を形成してもよく、環内に酸素原子、硫黄原子、エステル基、アミド基、又はカルボニル基を含んでいてもよい。R201~R203の内の2つが結合して形成する基としては、例えば、アルキレン基(例えば、ブチレン基及びペンチレン基)、及び-CH-CH-O-CH-CH-が挙げられる。
In the above formula (ZaI), R 201 , R 202 , and R 203 each independently represent an organic group.
The number of carbon atoms in the organic group as R 201 , R 202 , and R 203 is preferably 1 to 30, more preferably 1 to 20. Two of R 201 to R 203 may be combined to form a ring structure, and the ring may contain an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an ester group, an amide group, or a carbonyl group. Examples of the group formed by combining two of R 201 to R 203 include an alkylene group (for example, a butylene group and a pentylene group), and -CH 2 -CH 2 -O-CH 2 -CH 2 -. Can be mentioned.
 式(ZaI)における有機カチオンの好適な態様としては、後述する、カチオン(ZaI-1)、カチオン(ZaI-2)、カチオン(ZaI-3b)、カチオン(ZaI-4b)が挙げられる。 Preferred embodiments of the organic cation in formula (ZaI) include cation (ZaI-1), cation (ZaI-2), cation (ZaI-3b), and cation (ZaI-4b), which will be described later.
 まず、カチオン(ZaI-1)について説明する。
 カチオン(ZaI-1)は、上記式(ZaI)のR201~R203の少なくとも1つがアリール基である、アリールスルホニウムカチオンである。
 アリールスルホニウムカチオンは、R201~R203の全てがアリール基でもよいし、R201~R203の一部がアリール基であり、残りがアルキル基又はシクロアルキル基であってもよい。
 R201~R203のうちの1つがアリール基であり、R201~R203のうちの残りの2つが結合して環構造を形成してもよく、環内に酸素原子、硫黄原子、エステル基、アミド基、又はカルボニル基を含んでいてもよい。R201~R203のうちの2つが結合して形成する基としては、例えば、1つ以上のメチレン基が酸素原子、硫黄原子、エステル基、アミド基、及び/又はカルボニル基で置換されていてもよいアルキレン基(例えば、ブチレン基、ペンチレン基、及び-CH-CH-O-CH-CH-)が挙げられる。
 アリールスルホニウムカチオンとしては、トリアリールスルホニウムカチオン、ジアリールアルキルスルホニウムカチオン、アリールジアルキルスルホニウムカチオン、ジアリールシクロアルキルスルホニウムカチオン、及びアリールジシクロアルキルスルホニウムカチオンが挙げられる。
First, the cation (ZaI-1) will be explained.
The cation (ZaI-1) is an arylsulfonium cation in which at least one of R 201 to R 203 in the above formula (ZaI) is an aryl group.
In the arylsulfonium cation, all of R 201 to R 203 may be an aryl group, or some of R 201 to R 203 may be an aryl group, and the remainder may be an alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group.
One of R 201 to R 203 is an aryl group, and the remaining two of R 201 to R 203 may be combined to form a ring structure, and an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or an ester group may be present in the ring. , an amide group, or a carbonyl group. The group formed by combining two of R 201 to R 203 includes, for example, one or more methylene groups substituted with an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, an ester group, an amide group, and/or a carbonyl group. and alkylene groups such as butylene, pentylene, and -CH 2 -CH 2 -O-CH 2 -CH 2 -.
Arylsulfonium cations include triarylsulfonium cations, diarylalkylsulfonium cations, aryldialkylsulfonium cations, diarylcycloalkylsulfonium cations, and aryldicycloalkylsulfonium cations.
 アリールスルホニウムカチオンに含まれるアリール基としては、フェニル基又はナフチル基が好ましく、フェニル基がより好ましい。アリール基は、酸素原子、窒素原子、又は硫黄原子等を有するヘテロ環構造を有するアリール基であってもよい。ヘテロ環構造としては、ピロール残基、フラン残基、チオフェン残基、インドール残基、ベンゾフラン残基、及びベンゾチオフェン残基が挙げられる。アリールスルホニウムカチオンが2つ以上のアリール基を有する場合に、2つ以上あるアリール基は同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
 アリールスルホニウムカチオンが必要に応じて有しているアルキル基又はシクロアルキル基は、炭素数1~15の直鎖状アルキル基、炭素数3~15の分岐鎖状アルキル基、又は炭素数3~15のシクロアルキル基が好ましく、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、n-ブチル基、sec-ブチル基、t-ブチル基、シクロプロピル基、シクロブチル基、又はシクロヘキシル基がより好ましい。
The aryl group contained in the arylsulfonium cation is preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group, and more preferably a phenyl group. The aryl group may be an aryl group having a heterocyclic structure having an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom, or the like. Examples of the heterocyclic structure include a pyrrole residue, a furan residue, a thiophene residue, an indole residue, a benzofuran residue, and a benzothiophene residue. When the arylsulfonium cation has two or more aryl groups, the two or more aryl groups may be the same or different.
The alkyl group or cycloalkyl group that the arylsulfonium cation has as necessary is a linear alkyl group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms, a branched alkyl group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms, or a branched alkyl group having 3 to 15 carbon atoms. A cycloalkyl group is preferred, and a methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, n-butyl group, sec-butyl group, t-butyl group, cyclopropyl group, cyclobutyl group, or cyclohexyl group is more preferred.
 R201~R203のアリール基、アルキル基、及びシクロアルキル基が有していてもよい置換基としては、アルキル基(例えば、炭素数1~15)、シクロアルキル基(例えば、炭素数3~15)、アリール基(例えば、炭素数6~14)、アルコキシ基(例えば、炭素数1~15)、シクロアルキルアルコキシ基(例えば、炭素数1~15)、ハロゲン原子(例えば、フッ素及びヨウ素)、水酸基、カルボキシル基、エステル基、スルフィニル基、スルホニル基、アルキルチオ基、又はフェニルチオ基が好ましい。
 上記置換基は可能な場合更に置換基を有していてもよく、上記アルキル基が置換基としてハロゲン原子を有して、トリフルオロメチル基等のハロゲン化アルキル基となっていることも好ましい。
 上記置換基は任意の組み合わせにより、酸分解性基を形成することも好ましい。酸分解性基とは、酸の作用により分解して極性基を生じる基を意図し、酸の作用により脱離する基で極性基が保護された構造であることが好ましい。
Examples of substituents that the aryl group, alkyl group, and cycloalkyl group of R 201 to R 203 may have include an alkyl group (for example, having 1 to 15 carbon atoms) and a cycloalkyl group (for example, having 3 to 15 carbon atoms). 15), aryl group (for example, 6 to 14 carbon atoms), alkoxy group (for example, 1 to 15 carbon atoms), cycloalkylalkoxy group (for example, 1 to 15 carbon atoms), halogen atom (for example, fluorine and iodine) , a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, an ester group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an alkylthio group, or a phenylthio group.
The above-mentioned substituent may further have a substituent if possible, and it is also preferable that the above-mentioned alkyl group has a halogen atom as a substituent to become a halogenated alkyl group such as a trifluoromethyl group.
It is also preferable that the above substituents form an acid-decomposable group by any combination. The acid-decomposable group is intended to be a group that is decomposed by the action of an acid to produce a polar group, and preferably has a structure in which the polar group is protected with a group that is eliminated by the action of an acid.
 次に、カチオン(ZaI-2)について説明する。
 カチオン(ZaI-2)は、式(ZaI)におけるR201~R203が、それぞれ独立に、芳香環を有さない有機基を表すカチオンである。芳香環とは、ヘテロ原子を含む芳香環も包含する。
 R201~R203としての芳香環を有さない有機基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~20がより好ましい。
 R201~R203としては、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリル基、又はビニル基が好ましく、直鎖状又は分岐鎖状の2-オキソアルキル基、2-オキソシクロアルキル基、又はアルコキシカルボニルメチル基がより好ましく、直鎖状又は分岐鎖状の2-オキソアルキル基が更に好ましい。
Next, the cation (ZaI-2) will be explained.
The cation (ZaI-2) is a cation in which R 201 to R 203 in the formula (ZaI) each independently represent an organic group having no aromatic ring. The aromatic ring also includes an aromatic ring containing a heteroatom.
The carbon number of the organic group having no aromatic ring as R 201 to R 203 is preferably 1 to 30, more preferably 1 to 20.
R 201 to R 203 are each independently preferably an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an allyl group, or a vinyl group, and a linear or branched 2-oxoalkyl group, a 2-oxocycloalkyl group, or An alkoxycarbonylmethyl group is more preferred, and a linear or branched 2-oxoalkyl group is even more preferred.
 R201~R203のアルキル基及びシクロアルキル基は、例えば、炭素数1~10の直鎖状アルキル基又は炭素数3~10の分岐鎖状アルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基、及びペンチル基)、並びに、炭素数3~10のシクロアルキル基(例えば、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基、及びノルボルニル基)が挙げられる。
 R201~R203は、ハロゲン原子、アルコキシ基(例えば、炭素数1~5)、水酸基、シアノ基、又はニトロ基によって更に置換されていてもよい。
 R201~R203の置換基は、それぞれ独立に、置換基の任意の組み合わせにより、酸分解性基を形成することも好ましい。
The alkyl group and cycloalkyl group of R 201 to R 203 are, for example, a linear alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms or a branched alkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms (for example, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group). , butyl group, and pentyl group), and cycloalkyl groups having 3 to 10 carbon atoms (eg, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, and norbornyl group).
R 201 to R 203 may be further substituted with a halogen atom, an alkoxy group (eg, having 1 to 5 carbon atoms), a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, or a nitro group.
It is also preferable that the substituents R 201 to R 203 each independently form an acid-decomposable group by any combination of substituents.
 次に、カチオン(ZaI-3b)について説明する。
 カチオン(ZaI-3b)は、下記式(ZaI-3b)で表されるカチオンである。
Next, the cation (ZaI-3b) will be explained.
The cation (ZaI-3b) is a cation represented by the following formula (ZaI-3b).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
 式(ZaI-3b)中、R1c~R5cは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アルキルカルボニルオキシ基、シクロアルキルカルボニルオキシ基、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、ニトロ基、アルキルチオ基、又はアリールチオ基を表す。
 R6c及びR7cは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基(例えば、t-ブチル基等)、シクロアルキル基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、又はアリール基を表す。
 R及びRは、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、2-オキソアルキル基、2-オキソシクロアルキル基、アルコキシカルボニルアルキル基、アリル基、又はビニル基を表す。
 R1c~R7c、並びに、R及びRの置換基は、それぞれ独立に、置換基の任意の組み合わせにより、酸分解性基を形成することも好ましい。
In formula (ZaI-3b), R 1c to R 5c each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an alkylcarbonyloxy group, a cycloalkyl group. Represents a carbonyloxy group, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, a nitro group, an alkylthio group, or an arylthio group.
R 6c and R 7c each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group (eg, t-butyl group, etc.), a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an aryl group.
R x and R y each independently represent an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a 2-oxoalkyl group, a 2-oxocycloalkyl group, an alkoxycarbonylalkyl group, an allyl group, or a vinyl group.
It is also preferable that the substituents of R 1c to R 7c and R x and R y each independently form an acid-decomposable group by any combination of substituents.
 R1c~R5c中のいずれか2つ以上、R5cとR6c、R6cとR7c、R5cとR、及びRとRは、それぞれ互いに結合して環を形成してもよく、この環は、それぞれ独立に、酸素原子、硫黄原子、ケトン基、エステル結合、又はアミド結合を含んでいてもよい。
 上記環としては、芳香族又は非芳香族の炭化水素環、芳香族又は非芳香族のヘテロ環、及びこれらの環が2つ以上組み合わされてなる多環縮合環が挙げられる。環としては、3~10員環が挙げられ、4~8員環が好ましく、5又は6員環がより好ましい。
Any two or more of R 1c to R 5c , R 5c and R 6c , R 6c and R 7c , R 5c and R x , and R x and R y may be bonded to each other to form a ring. Often, the rings may each independently contain an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a ketone group, an ester bond, or an amide bond.
Examples of the above-mentioned ring include an aromatic or non-aromatic hydrocarbon ring, an aromatic or non-aromatic heterocycle, and a polycyclic condensed ring formed by combining two or more of these rings. Examples of the ring include a 3- to 10-membered ring, preferably a 4- to 8-membered ring, and more preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring.
 R1c~R5c中のいずれか2つ以上、R6cとR7c、及びRとRが結合して形成する基としては、ブチレン基及びペンチレン基等のアルキレン基が挙げられる。このアルキレン基中のメチレン基が酸素原子等のヘテロ原子で置換されていてもよい。
 R5cとR6c、及びR5cとRが結合して形成する基としては、単結合又はアルキレン基が好ましい。アルキレン基としては、メチレン基及びエチレン基が挙げられる。
Examples of the group formed by combining any two or more of R 1c to R 5c , R 6c and R 7c , and R x and R y include alkylene groups such as a butylene group and a pentylene group. The methylene group in this alkylene group may be substituted with a hetero atom such as an oxygen atom.
The group formed by bonding R 5c and R 6c and R 5c and R x is preferably a single bond or an alkylene group. Alkylene groups include methylene and ethylene groups.
 R1c~R5c、R6c、R7c、R、R、並びに、R1c~R5c中のいずれか2つ以上、R5cとR6c、R6cとR7c、R5cとR、及びRとRがそれぞれ互いに結合して形成する環は、置換基を有していてもよい。 R 1c to R 5c , R 6c , R 7c , R x , R y , and any two or more of R 1c to R 5c , R 5c and R 6c , R 6c and R 7c , R 5c and R x , and the ring formed by bonding R x and R y to each other may have a substituent.
 次に、カチオン(ZaI-4b)について説明する。
 カチオン(ZaI-4b)は、下記式(ZaI-4b)で表されるカチオンである。
Next, the cation (ZaI-4b) will be explained.
The cation (ZaI-4b) is a cation represented by the following formula (ZaI-4b).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000035
 式(ZaI-4b)中、lは0~2の整数を表し、rは0~8の整数を表す。
 R13は、水素原子、ハロゲン原子(例えば、フッ素原子及びヨウ素原子等)、水酸基、アルキル基、ハロゲン化アルキル基、アルコキシ基、カルボキシル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、又はシクロアルキル基を含む基(シクロアルキル基そのものであってもよく、シクロアルキル基を一部に含む基であってもよい)を表す。これらの基は置換基を有してもよい。
 R14は、水酸基、ハロゲン原子(例えば、フッ素原子及びヨウ素原子等)、アルキル基、ハロゲン化アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アルキルカルボニル基、アルキルスルホニル基、シクロアルキルスルホニル基、又はシクロアルキル基を含む基(シクロアルキル基そのものであってもよく、シクロアルキル基を一部に含む基であってもよい)を表す。これらの基は置換基を有してもよい。R14は、複数存在する場合は、それぞれ独立して、水酸基等の上記基を表す。
 R15は、それぞれ独立して、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、又はナフチル基を表す。2つのR15が互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。2つのR15が互いに結合して環を形成するとき、環骨格内に、酸素原子、又は窒素原子等のヘテロ原子を含んでもよい。
 一態様において、2つのR15がアルキレン基であり、互いに結合して環構造を形成することが好ましい。なお、上記アルキル基、上記シクロアルキル基、及び上記ナフチル基、並びに、2つのR15が互いに結合して形成する環は置換基を有してもよい。
In formula (ZaI-4b), l represents an integer of 0 to 2, and r represents an integer of 0 to 8.
R13 is a group containing a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (e.g., a fluorine atom, an iodine atom, etc.), a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group, a halogenated alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a carboxyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, or a cycloalkyl group (cycloalkyl It may be a group itself or a group partially containing a cycloalkyl group). These groups may have substituents.
R14 is a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom (e.g., a fluorine atom and an iodine atom), an alkyl group, a halogenated alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an alkylcarbonyl group, an alkylsulfonyl group, a cycloalkylsulfonyl group, or a cycloalkyl group. Represents a group containing a group (which may be a cycloalkyl group itself or a group partially containing a cycloalkyl group). These groups may have substituents. When a plurality of R 14s exist, each R 14 independently represents the above group such as a hydroxyl group.
R 15 each independently represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, or a naphthyl group. Two R 15s may be bonded to each other to form a ring. When two R 15s combine with each other to form a ring, the ring skeleton may contain a heteroatom such as an oxygen atom or a nitrogen atom.
In one embodiment, two R 15s are alkylene groups and are preferably bonded to each other to form a ring structure. The ring formed by bonding the alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, naphthyl group, and two R 15s to each other may have a substituent.
 式(ZaI-4b)において、R13、R14、及びR15のアルキル基は、直鎖状又は分岐鎖状であってもよい。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましい。アルキル基は、メチル基、エチル基、n-ブチル基、又はt-ブチル基等が好ましい。
 R13~R15、並びに、R及びRの各置換基は、それぞれ独立に、置換基の任意の組み合わせにより、酸分解性基を形成することも好ましい。
In formula (ZaI-4b), the alkyl groups of R 13 , R 14 and R 15 may be linear or branched. The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 10. The alkyl group is preferably a methyl group, ethyl group, n-butyl group, or t-butyl group.
It is also preferable that each substituent of R 13 to R 15 and R x and R y each independently form an acid-decomposable group by any combination of substituents.
 次に、式(ZaII)について説明する。
 式(ZaII)中、R204及びR205は、それぞれ独立に、アリール基、アルキル基又はシクロアルキル基を表す。
 R204及びR205のアリール基としては、フェニル基、又はナフチル基が好ましく、フェニル基がより好ましい。R204及びR205のアリール基は、酸素原子、窒素原子、又は硫黄原子等を有するヘテロ環を有するアリール基であってもよい。ヘテロ環を有するアリール基の骨格としては、例えば、ピロール、フラン、チオフェン、インドール、ベンゾフラン、及びベンゾチオフェンが挙げられる。
 R204及びR205のアルキル基及びシクロアルキル基としては、炭素数1~10の直鎖状アルキル基又は炭素数3~10の分岐鎖状アルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基、又はペンチル基)、又は炭素数3~10のシクロアルキル基(例えばシクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基、又はノルボルニル基)が好ましい。
Next, formula (ZaII) will be explained.
In formula (ZaII), R 204 and R 205 each independently represent an aryl group, an alkyl group, or a cycloalkyl group.
The aryl group for R 204 and R 205 is preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group, and more preferably a phenyl group. The aryl group of R 204 and R 205 may be an aryl group having a heterocycle having an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom, or the like. Examples of the skeleton of the aryl group having a heterocycle include pyrrole, furan, thiophene, indole, benzofuran, and benzothiophene.
The alkyl group and cycloalkyl group of R 204 and R 205 include a linear alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms or a branched alkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms (for example, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, butyl group, pentyl group), or a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms (eg, cyclopentyl group, cyclohexyl group, or norbornyl group).
 R204及びR205のアリール基、アルキル基、及びシクロアルキル基は、それぞれ独立に、置換基を有していてもよい。R204及びR205のアリール基、アルキル基、及びシクロアルキル基が有していてもよい置換基としては、例えば、アルキル基(例えば、炭素数1~15)、シクロアルキル基(例えば、炭素数3~15)、アリール基(例えば、炭素数6~15)、アルコキシ基(例えば、炭素数1~15)、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、及びフェニルチオ基が挙げられる。また、R204及びR205の置換基は、それぞれ独立に、置換基の任意の組み合わせにより、酸分解性基を形成することも好ましい。 The aryl group, alkyl group, and cycloalkyl group of R 204 and R 205 may each independently have a substituent. Examples of substituents that the aryl group, alkyl group, and cycloalkyl group of R 204 and R 205 may have include an alkyl group (e.g., carbon number 1 to 15), a cycloalkyl group (e.g., carbon number 3 to 15), an aryl group (eg, carbon number 6 to 15), an alkoxy group (eg, carbon number 1 to 15), a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, and a phenylthio group. Furthermore, it is also preferable that the substituents of R 204 and R 205 each independently form an acid-decomposable group using any combination of substituents.
 以下に有機カチオンの具体例を示すが、これらに限定されない。 Specific examples of organic cations are shown below, but the invention is not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000036
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000037
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000038
 塩(B)の含有量は、本発明の組成物の全固形分に対して、0.1質量%以上が好ましく、0.5質量%以上がより好ましく、1.0質量%以上が更に好ましい。塩(B)の含有量は、本発明の組成物の全固形分に対して、30.0質量%以下が好ましく、20.0質量%以下がより好ましく、15.0質量%以下が更に好ましい。
 塩(B)は、1種で使用してもよいし、2種以上使用してもよい。2種以上使用する場合は、その合計含有量が、上記好適含有量の範囲内であるのが好ましい。
The content of the salt (B) is preferably 0.1% by mass or more, more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and even more preferably 1.0% by mass or more, based on the total solid content of the composition of the present invention. . The content of the salt (B) is preferably 30.0% by mass or less, more preferably 20.0% by mass or less, and even more preferably 15.0% by mass or less, based on the total solid content of the composition of the present invention. .
Salt (B) may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total content is within the above-mentioned preferred content range.
 本発明の組成物には、塩(B)が酸化されることによって生じる化合物(不純物)が含まれていてもよい。塩(B)が酸化されることによって生じる化合物としては、具体的にはキノン構造を有する化合物が挙げられる。上記不純物の含有量は、本発明の組成物の全固形分に対して、1.0質量%以下が好ましく、0.1質量%以下がより好ましく、0.01質量%以下が更に好ましい。 The composition of the present invention may contain a compound (impurity) produced by oxidizing the salt (B). Specific examples of the compound produced by oxidizing the salt (B) include compounds having a quinone structure. The content of the impurities is preferably 1.0% by mass or less, more preferably 0.1% by mass or less, and even more preferably 0.01% by mass or less, based on the total solid content of the composition of the present invention.
 本発明の組成物は、樹脂(A)及び塩(B)に加えて、その他の成分を含有してもよい。 The composition of the present invention may contain other components in addition to the resin (A) and the salt (B).
[塩(C)]
 本発明の組成物は、上記塩(B)とは異なる化合物であり、活性光線又は放射線の照射により酸を発生する塩(C)を含有してもよい。
 活性光線又は放射線の照射により塩(C)から発生する酸のpKaは、塩(B)のアニオンの共役酸のpKaよりも小さいことが好ましい。塩(C)から発生する酸のpKaと、塩(B)のアニオンの共役酸のpKaとの差の絶対値は、0.1以上20未満であることが好ましく、1以上15未満であることがより好ましく、2以上10未満であることが特に好ましい。
 塩(C)は、低分子化合物の形態であってもよく、重合体(例えば、樹脂(A))の一部に組み込まれた形態であってもよい。また、低分子化合物の形態と重合体(例えば、樹脂(A))の一部に組み込まれた形態とを併用してもよい。
 塩(C)が、低分子化合物の形態である場合、塩(C)の分子量は3000以下が好ましく、2000以下がより好ましく、1000以下が更に好ましい。下限は特に制限されないが、100以上が好ましい。
 塩(C)が、重合体の一部に組み込まれた形態である場合、樹脂(A)の一部に組み込まれてもよく、樹脂(A)とは異なる樹脂に組み込まれてもよい。
[Salt (C)]
The composition of the present invention may contain a salt (C) which is a compound different from the above-mentioned salt (B) and which generates an acid upon irradiation with actinic rays or radiation.
The pKa of the acid generated from the salt (C) upon irradiation with actinic rays or radiation is preferably smaller than the pKa of the conjugate acid of the anion of the salt (B). The absolute value of the difference between the pKa of the acid generated from the salt (C) and the pKa of the conjugate acid of the anion of the salt (B) is preferably 0.1 or more and less than 20, and preferably 1 or more and less than 15. is more preferable, and particularly preferably 2 or more and less than 10.
The salt (C) may be in the form of a low molecular compound or may be incorporated into a part of the polymer (for example, the resin (A)). Further, a form of a low molecular compound and a form incorporated into a part of a polymer (for example, resin (A)) may be used together.
When the salt (C) is in the form of a low molecular weight compound, the molecular weight of the salt (C) is preferably 3000 or less, more preferably 2000 or less, even more preferably 1000 or less. The lower limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 100 or more.
When the salt (C) is incorporated into a part of the polymer, it may be incorporated into a part of the resin (A) or into a resin different from the resin (A).
 塩(C)としては、例えば、「G  X」で表される化合物(オニウム塩)が挙げられ、露光により有機酸を発生する化合物であるのが好ましい。
 上記有機酸として、例えば、スルホン酸(脂肪族スルホン酸、芳香族スルホン酸、及びカンファースルホン酸等)、カルボン酸(脂肪族カルボン酸、芳香族カルボン酸、及びアラルキルカルボン酸等)、カルボニルスルホニルイミド酸、ビス(アルキルスルホニル)イミド酸、及びトリス(アルキルスルホニル)メチド酸が挙げられる。
Examples of the salt (C) include a compound represented by "G 1 + X - " (onium salt), and preferably a compound that generates an organic acid upon exposure to light.
Examples of the organic acids include sulfonic acids (aliphatic sulfonic acids, aromatic sulfonic acids, camphorsulfonic acids, etc.), carboxylic acids (aliphatic carboxylic acids, aromatic carboxylic acids, aralkylcarboxylic acids, etc.), carbonylsulfonylimide acid, bis(alkylsulfonyl)imidic acid, and tris(alkylsulfonyl)methide acid.
 「G  X」で表される化合物において、G は、有機カチオンを表す。上記有機カチオンの具体例及び好ましい範囲は、前述の一般式(T1)中のGm+が表す有機カチオンと同様である。 In the compound represented by “G 1 + X ”, G 1 + represents an organic cation. Specific examples and preferred ranges of the organic cation are the same as those of the organic cation represented by G m+ in the general formula (T1) above.
 「G  X」で表される化合物において、Xは、有機アニオンを表す。
 有機アニオンとしては、特に制限されず、1又は2価以上の有機アニオンが挙げられる。
 有機アニオンとしては、求核反応を起こす能力が著しく低いアニオンが好ましく、非求核性アニオンがより好ましい。
 非求核性アニオンとしては、例えば、スルホン酸アニオン(脂肪族スルホン酸アニオン、芳香族スルホン酸アニオン、及びカンファースルホン酸アニオン等)、カルボン酸アニオン(脂肪族カルボン酸アニオン、芳香族カルボン酸アニオン、及びアラルキルカルボン酸アニオン等)、スルホニルイミドアニオン、ビス(アルキルスルホニル)イミドアニオン、及びトリス(アルキルスルホニル)メチドアニオンが挙げられる。
In the compound represented by “G 1 + X ”, X represents an organic anion.
The organic anion is not particularly limited, and includes mono- or divalent or higher-valent organic anions.
As the organic anion, an anion having a significantly low ability to cause a nucleophilic reaction is preferable, and a non-nucleophilic anion is more preferable.
Examples of non-nucleophilic anions include sulfonic acid anions (aliphatic sulfonic acid anions, aromatic sulfonic acid anions, camphor sulfonic acid anions, etc.), carboxylic acid anions (aliphatic carboxylic acid anions, aromatic carboxylic acid anions, and aralkylcarboxylic acid anions), sulfonylimide anions, bis(alkylsulfonyl)imide anions, and tris(alkylsulfonyl)methide anions.
 脂肪族スルホン酸アニオン及び脂肪族カルボン酸アニオンにおける脂肪族部位は、直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基であっても、シクロアルキル基であってもよく、炭素数1~30の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基、又は、炭素数3~30のシクロアルキル基が好ましい。
 上記アルキル基は、例えば、フルオロアルキル基(フッ素原子以外の置換基を有していてもよい。パーフルオロアルキル基であってもよい)であってもよい。
The aliphatic moiety in the aliphatic sulfonic acid anion and the aliphatic carboxylic acid anion may be a linear or branched alkyl group, or a cycloalkyl group, and may be a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. Alternatively, a branched alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms is preferable.
The alkyl group may be, for example, a fluoroalkyl group (which may have a substituent other than a fluorine atom and may be a perfluoroalkyl group).
 芳香族スルホン酸アニオン及び芳香族カルボン酸アニオンにおけるアリール基としては、炭素数6~14のアリール基が好ましく、例えば、フェニル基、トリル基、及び、ナフチル基が挙げられる。 The aryl group in the aromatic sulfonic acid anion and the aromatic carboxylic acid anion is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms, such as a phenyl group, a tolyl group, and a naphthyl group.
 上記で挙げたアルキル基、シクロアルキル基、及び、アリール基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては特に制限されないが、例えば、ニトロ基、フッ素原子及び塩素原子等のハロゲン原子、カルボキシル基、水酸基、アミノ基、シアノ基、アルコキシ基(炭素数1~15が好ましい)、アルキル基(炭素数1~10が好ましい)、シクロアルキル基(炭素数3~15が好ましい)、アリール基(炭素数6~14が好ましい)、アルコキシカルボニル基(炭素数2~7が好ましい)、アシル基(炭素数2~12が好ましい)、アルコキシカルボニルオキシ基(炭素数2~7が好ましい)、アルキルチオ基(炭素数1~15が好ましい)、アルキルスルホニル基(炭素数1~15が好ましい)、アルキルイミノスルホニル基(炭素数1~15が好ましい)、及び、アリールオキシスルホニル基(炭素数6~20が好ましい)が挙げられる。 The alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, and aryl group listed above may have a substituent. Substituents are not particularly limited, but include, for example, nitro groups, halogen atoms such as fluorine atoms and chlorine atoms, carboxyl groups, hydroxyl groups, amino groups, cyano groups, alkoxy groups (preferably having 1 to 15 carbon atoms), alkyl groups ( (preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms), cycloalkyl group (preferably has 3 to 15 carbon atoms), aryl group (preferably has 6 to 14 carbon atoms), alkoxycarbonyl group (preferably has 2 to 7 carbon atoms), acyl group (preferably has 2 to 7 carbon atoms), (preferably has 2 to 12 carbon atoms), alkoxycarbonyloxy group (preferably has 2 to 7 carbon atoms), alkylthio group (preferably has 1 to 15 carbon atoms), alkylsulfonyl group (preferably has 1 to 15 carbon atoms), alkylimino Examples include a sulfonyl group (preferably having 1 to 15 carbon atoms) and an aryloxysulfonyl group (preferably having 6 to 20 carbon atoms).
 アラルキルカルボン酸アニオンにおけるアラルキル基としては、炭素数7~14のアラルキル基が好ましい。
 炭素数7~14のアラルキル基としては、例えば、ベンジル基、フェネチル基、ナフチルメチル基、ナフチルエチル基、及び、ナフチルブチル基が挙げられる。
The aralkyl group in the aralkylcarboxylic acid anion is preferably an aralkyl group having 7 to 14 carbon atoms.
Examples of the aralkyl group having 7 to 14 carbon atoms include benzyl group, phenethyl group, naphthylmethyl group, naphthylethyl group, and naphthylbutyl group.
 スルホニルイミドアニオンとしては、例えば、サッカリンアニオンが挙げられる。 Examples of the sulfonylimide anion include saccharin anion.
 ビス(アルキルスルホニル)イミドアニオン、及び、トリス(アルキルスルホニル)メチドアニオンにおけるアルキル基としては、炭素数1~5のアルキル基が好ましい。これらのアルキル基の置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、ハロゲン原子で置換されたアルキル基、アルコキシ基、アルキルチオ基、アルキルオキシスルホニル基、アリールオキシスルホニル基、及び、シクロアルキルアリールオキシスルホニル基が挙げられ、フッ素原子又はフッ素原子で置換されたアルキル基が好ましい。
 また、ビス(アルキルスルホニル)イミドアニオンにおけるアルキル基は、互いに結合して環構造を形成してもよい。これにより、酸強度が増加する。
The alkyl group in the bis(alkylsulfonyl)imide anion and tris(alkylsulfonyl)methide anion is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. Substituents for these alkyl groups include halogen atoms, alkyl groups substituted with halogen atoms, alkoxy groups, alkylthio groups, alkyloxysulfonyl groups, aryloxysulfonyl groups, and cycloalkylaryloxysulfonyl groups, A fluorine atom or an alkyl group substituted with a fluorine atom is preferred.
Furthermore, the alkyl groups in the bis(alkylsulfonyl)imide anion may be bonded to each other to form a ring structure. This increases the acid strength.
 その他の非求核性アニオンとしては、例えば、フッ素化燐(例えば、PF )、フッ素化ホウ素(例えば、BF )、及び、フッ素化アンチモン(例えば、SbF )が挙げられる。 Other non-nucleophilic anions include, for example, fluorinated phosphorus (eg, PF 6 ), fluorinated boron (eg, BF 4 ), and fluorinated antimony (eg, SbF 6 ).
 非求核性アニオンとしては、スルホン酸の少なくともα位がフッ素原子で置換された脂肪族スルホン酸アニオン、フッ素原子若しくはフッ素原子を有する基で置換された芳香族スルホン酸アニオン、アルキル基がフッ素原子で置換されたビス(アルキルスルホニル)イミドアニオン、又は、アルキル基がフッ素原子で置換されたトリス(アルキルスルホニル)メチドアニオンが好ましい。なかでも、パーフルオロ脂肪族スルホン酸アニオン(炭素数4~8が好ましい)、又は、フッ素原子を有するベンゼンスルホン酸アニオンがより好ましく、ノナフルオロブタンスルホン酸アニオン、パーフルオロオクタンスルホン酸アニオン、ペンタフルオロベンゼンスルホン酸アニオン、又は、3,5-ビス(トリフルオロメチル)ベンゼンスルホン酸アニオンが更に好ましい。 Examples of non-nucleophilic anions include aliphatic sulfonic acid anions in which at least the α-position of the sulfonic acid is substituted with a fluorine atom, aromatic sulfonic acid anions substituted with a fluorine atom or a group having a fluorine atom, and an alkyl group having a fluorine atom. A bis(alkylsulfonyl)imide anion substituted with , or a tris(alkylsulfonyl)methide anion whose alkyl group is substituted with a fluorine atom is preferred. Among these, perfluoroaliphatic sulfonate anions (preferably having 4 to 8 carbon atoms) or benzenesulfonate anions having a fluorine atom are more preferable, and nonafluorobutanesulfonate anions, perfluorooctanesulfonate anions, pentafluorobutanesulfonate anions, etc. More preferred is benzenesulfonic acid anion or 3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)benzenesulfonic acid anion.
 非求核性アニオンとしては、下記式(AN1)で表されるアニオンも好ましい。 As the non-nucleophilic anion, an anion represented by the following formula (AN1) is also preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000039
 式(AN1)中、R及びRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、又は置換基を表す。
 置換基は特に制限されないが、電子求引性基ではない基が好ましい。電子求引性基ではない基としては、例えば、炭化水素基、水酸基、オキシ炭化水素基、オキシカルボニル炭化水素基、アミノ基、炭化水素置換アミノ基、及び、炭化水素置換アミド基が挙げられる。
 電子求引性基ではない基としては、それぞれ独立に、-R’、-OH、-OR’、-OCOR’、-NH、-NR’、-NHR’、又は、-NHCOR’が好ましい。R’は、1価の炭化水素基である。
In formula (AN1), R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
The substituent is not particularly limited, but a group that is not an electron-withdrawing group is preferred. Examples of groups that are not electron-withdrawing groups include hydrocarbon groups, hydroxyl groups, oxyhydrocarbon groups, oxycarbonyl hydrocarbon groups, amino groups, hydrocarbon-substituted amino groups, and hydrocarbon-substituted amide groups.
As groups that are not electron-withdrawing groups, -R', -OH, -OR', -OCOR', -NH 2 , -NR' 2 , -NHR', or -NHCOR' are preferable, each independently. . R' is a monovalent hydrocarbon group.
 上記R’で表される1価の炭化水素基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、及びブチル基等のアルキル基;エテニル基、プロペニル基、及びブテニル基等のアルケニル基;エチニル基、プロピニル基、及びブチニル基等のアルキニル基等の1価の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状の炭化水素基;シクロプロピル基、シクロブチル基、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基、ノルボルニル基、及びアダマンチル基等のシクロアルキル基;シクロプロペニル基、シクロブテニル基、シクロペンテニル基、及びノルボルネニル基等のシクロアルケニル基等の1価の脂環炭化水素基;フェニル基、トリル基、キシリル基、メシチル基、ナフチル基、メチルナフチル基、アントリル基、及びメチルアントリル基等のアリール基;ベンジル基、フェネチル基、フェニルプロピル基、ナフチルメチル基、及びアントリルメチル基等のアラルキル基等の1価の芳香族炭化水素基が挙げられる。
 なかでも、R及びRは、それぞれ独立に、炭化水素基(シクロアルキル基が好ましい)又は水素原子が好ましい。
Examples of the monovalent hydrocarbon group represented by R' include alkyl groups such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, and butyl; alkenyl groups such as ethenyl, propenyl, and butenyl; ethynyl Monovalent linear or branched hydrocarbon groups such as alkynyl groups, propynyl groups, butynyl groups; cyclopropyl groups, cyclobutyl groups, cyclopentyl groups, cyclohexyl groups, norbornyl groups, adamantyl groups, etc. Cycloalkyl group; monovalent alicyclic hydrocarbon group such as cycloalkenyl group such as cyclopropenyl group, cyclobutenyl group, cyclopentenyl group, and norbornenyl group; phenyl group, tolyl group, xylyl group, mesityl group, naphthyl group, methyl Aryl groups such as naphthyl group, anthryl group, and methylanthryl group; monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon groups such as aralkyl groups such as benzyl group, phenethyl group, phenylpropyl group, naphthylmethyl group, and anthrylmethyl group; Can be mentioned.
Among these, R 1 and R 2 are each independently preferably a hydrocarbon group (preferably a cycloalkyl group) or a hydrogen atom.
 Lは、2価の連結基を表す。
 Lが複数存在する場合、Lは、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
 2価の連結基としては、例えば、-O-CO-O-、-COO-、-CONH-、-CO-、-O-、-S-、-SO-、-SO-、アルキレン基(炭素数1~6が好ましい)、シクロアルキレン基(炭素数3~15が好ましい)、アルケニレン基(炭素数2~6が好ましい)、及び、これらの複数を組み合わせた2価の連結基が挙げられる。なかでも、2価の連結基としては、-O-CO-O-、-COO-、-CONH-、-CO-、-O-、-SO-、-O-CO-O-アルキレン基-、-COO-アルキレン基-、又は、-CONH-アルキレン基-が好ましく、-O-CO-O-、-O-CO-O-アルキレン基-、-COO-、-CONH-、-SO-、又は、-COO-アルキレン基-がより好ましい。
L represents a divalent linking group.
When there is a plurality of L's, each L may be the same or different.
Examples of the divalent linking group include -O-CO-O-, -COO-, -CONH-, -CO-, -O-, -S-, -SO-, -SO 2 -, alkylene group ( (preferably having 1 to 6 carbon atoms), a cycloalkylene group (preferably having 3 to 15 carbon atoms), an alkenylene group (preferably having 2 to 6 carbon atoms), and a divalent linking group that is a combination of a plurality of these. . Among them, divalent linking groups include -O-CO-O-, -COO-, -CONH-, -CO-, -O-, -SO 2 -, -O-CO-O-alkylene group- , -COO-alkylene group-, or -CONH-alkylene group- is preferred, -O-CO-O-, -O-CO-O-alkylene group-, -COO-, -CONH-, -SO 2 - , or -COO-alkylene group- is more preferred.
 Lとしては、例えば、下記式(AN1-1)で表される基が好ましい。
 *-(CR2a -Q-(CR2b -*   (AN1-1)
As L, for example, a group represented by the following formula (AN1-1) is preferable.
* a -(CR 2a 2 ) X -Q-(CR 2b 2 ) Y -* b (AN1-1)
 式(AN1-1)中、*は、式(AN1)におけるRとの結合位置を表す。
 *は、式(AN1)における-C(R)(R)-との結合位置を表す。
 X及びYは、それぞれ独立に、0~10の整数を表し、0~3の整数が好ましい。
 R2a及びR2bは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は置換基を表す。
 R2a及びR2bがそれぞれ複数存在する場合、複数存在するR2a及びR2bは、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
 ただし、Yが1以上の場合、式(AN1)における-C(R)(R)-と直接結合するCR2b におけるR2bは、フッ素原子以外である。
 Qは、*-O-CO-O-*、*-CO-*、*-CO-O-*、*-O-CO-*、*-O-*、*-S-*、又は、*-SO-*を表す。
 ただし、式(AN1-1)中のX+Yが1以上、かつ、式(AN1-1)中のR2a及びR2bのいずれもが全て水素原子である場合、Qは、*-O-CO-O-*、*-CO-*、*-O-CO-*、*-O-*、*-S-*、又は、*-SO-*を表す。
 *は、式(AN1)におけるR側の結合位置を表し、*は、式(AN1)における-SO 側の結合位置を表す。
In formula (AN1-1), * a represents the bonding position with R 3 in formula (AN1).
* b represents the bonding position with -C(R 1 )(R 2 )- in formula (AN1).
X and Y each independently represent an integer of 0 to 10, preferably an integer of 0 to 3.
R 2a and R 2b each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
When a plurality of R 2a and R 2b exist, the plurality of R 2a and R 2b may be the same or different.
However, when Y is 1 or more, R 2b in CR 2b 2 directly bonded to -C(R 1 )(R 2 )- in formula (AN1) is other than a fluorine atom.
Q is * A -O-CO-O-* B , * A -CO-* B , * A -CO-O-* B , * A -O-CO-* B , * A -O-* B , * A -S-* B , or * A - SO2- * B .
However, when X+Y in formula (AN1-1) is 1 or more and both R 2a and R 2b in formula (AN1-1) are hydrogen atoms, Q is * A -O-CO -O-* B , * A -CO-* B , * A -O-CO-* B , * A -O-* B , * A -S-* B , or * A -SO 2 -* B represents.
* A represents the bonding position on the R 3 side in formula (AN1), and * B represents the bonding position on the -SO 3 - side in formula (AN1).
 式(AN1)中、Rは、有機基を表す。
 上記有機基は、炭素原子を1以上有していれば特に制限はなく、直鎖状の基(例えば、直鎖状のアルキル基)でも、分岐鎖状の基(例えば、t-ブチル基等の分岐鎖状のアルキル基)でもよく、環状の基であってもよい。上記有機基は、置換基を有していても、有していなくてもよい。上記有機基は、ヘテロ原子(酸素原子、硫黄原子、及び/又は、窒素原子等)を有していても、有してなくてもよい。
In formula (AN1), R 3 represents an organic group.
The above organic group is not particularly limited as long as it has one or more carbon atoms, and may be a linear group (e.g., a linear alkyl group) or a branched group (e.g., t-butyl group, etc.). (branched alkyl group) or a cyclic group. The above organic group may or may not have a substituent. The above organic group may or may not have a hetero atom (oxygen atom, sulfur atom, and/or nitrogen atom, etc.).
 なかでも、Rは、環状構造を有する有機基であることが好ましい。上記環状構造は、単環でも多環でもよく、置換基を有していてもよい。環状構造を含む有機基における環は、式(AN1)中のLと直接結合していることが好ましい。
 上記環状構造を有する有機基は、例えば、ヘテロ原子(酸素原子、硫黄原子、及び/又は、窒素原子等)を有していても、有してなくてもよい。ヘテロ原子は、環状構造を形成する炭素原子の1つ以上と置換していてもよい。
 上記環状構造を有する有機基は、例えば、環状構造の炭化水素基、ラクトン環基、及び、スルトン環基が好ましい。なかでも、上記環状構造を有する有機基は、環状構造の炭化水素基が好ましい。
 上記環状構造の炭化水素基は、単環又は多環のシクロアルキル基が好ましい。これらの基は、置換基を有していてもよい。
 上記シクロアルキル基は、単環(シクロヘキシル基等)でも多環(アダマンチル基等)でもよく、炭素数は5~12が好ましい。
 上記ラクトン基及びスルトン基としては、例えば、上述した式(LC1-1)~(LC1-21)で表される構造、及び、式(SL1-1)~(SL1-3)で表される構造のいずれかにおいて、ラクトン構造又はスルトン構造を構成する環員原子から、水素原子を1つ除いてなる基が好ましい。
Among these, R 3 is preferably an organic group having a cyclic structure. The above-mentioned cyclic structure may be monocyclic or polycyclic, and may have a substituent. The ring in the organic group containing a cyclic structure is preferably directly bonded to L in formula (AN1).
The organic group having a cyclic structure may or may not have a hetero atom (oxygen atom, sulfur atom, and/or nitrogen atom, etc.), for example. Heteroatoms may be substituted for one or more of the carbon atoms forming the cyclic structure.
The organic group having a cyclic structure is preferably, for example, a hydrocarbon group having a cyclic structure, a lactone ring group, or a sultone ring group. Among these, the organic group having a cyclic structure is preferably a hydrocarbon group having a cyclic structure.
The hydrocarbon group having a cyclic structure is preferably a monocyclic or polycyclic cycloalkyl group. These groups may have a substituent.
The above cycloalkyl group may be monocyclic (such as a cyclohexyl group) or polycyclic (such as an adamantyl group), and preferably has 5 to 12 carbon atoms.
Examples of the lactone group and sultone group include structures represented by the above-mentioned formulas (LC1-1) to (LC1-21) and structures represented by the formulas (SL1-1) to (SL1-3). In either of these, a group formed by removing one hydrogen atom from the ring atoms constituting the lactone structure or sultone structure is preferable.
 非求核性アニオンとしては、ベンゼンスルホン酸アニオンであってもよく、分岐鎖状のアルキル基又はシクロアルキル基によって置換されたベンゼンスルホン酸アニオンであることが好ましい。 The non-nucleophilic anion may be a benzenesulfonic acid anion, preferably a benzenesulfonic acid anion substituted with a branched alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group.
 非求核性アニオンとしては、下記式(AN2)で表されるアニオンも好ましい。 As the non-nucleophilic anion, an anion represented by the following formula (AN2) is also preferred.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000040
 式(AN2)中、oは、1~3の整数を表す。pは、0~10の整数を表す。qは、0~10の整数を表す。 In formula (AN2), o represents an integer from 1 to 3. p represents an integer from 0 to 10. q represents an integer from 0 to 10.
 Xfは、水素原子、フッ素原子、少なくとも1つのフッ素原子で置換されたアルキル基、又はフッ素原子を有さない有機基を表す。このアルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~4がより好ましい。少なくとも1つのフッ素原子で置換されたアルキル基としては、パーフルオロアルキル基が好ましい。
 Xfは、フッ素原子又は炭素数1~4のパーフルオロアルキル基であることが好ましく、フッ素原子又はCFであることがより好ましく、双方のXfがフッ素原子であることが更に好ましい。
Xf represents a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, an alkyl group substituted with at least one fluorine atom, or an organic group having no fluorine atom. The number of carbon atoms in this alkyl group is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 4. The alkyl group substituted with at least one fluorine atom is preferably a perfluoroalkyl group.
Xf is preferably a fluorine atom or a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, more preferably a fluorine atom or CF 3 , and even more preferably both Xfs are fluorine atoms.
 R及びRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、フッ素原子、アルキル基、又は、少なくとも1つのフッ素原子で置換されたアルキル基を表す。R及びRが複数存在する場合、R及びRは、それぞれ同一でも異なっていてもよい。
 R及びRで表されるアルキル基は、炭素数1~4が好ましい。上記アルキル基は置換基を有していてもよい。R及びRとしては、水素原子が好ましい。
R 4 and R 5 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, an alkyl group, or an alkyl group substituted with at least one fluorine atom. When a plurality of R 4 and R 5 exist, each of R 4 and R 5 may be the same or different.
The alkyl group represented by R 4 and R 5 preferably has 1 to 4 carbon atoms. The above alkyl group may have a substituent. A hydrogen atom is preferable as R 4 and R 5 .
 Lは、2価の連結基を表す。Lの定義は、式(AN1)中のLと同義である。 L represents a divalent linking group. The definition of L is synonymous with L in formula (AN1).
 Wは、環状構造を含む有機基を表す。なかでも、環状の有機基であることが好ましい。
 環状の有機基としては、例えば、脂環基、アリール基、及び、複素環基が挙げられる。
 脂環基は、単環であってもよく、多環であってもよい。単環の脂環基としては、例えば、シクロペンチル基、シクロヘキシル基、及び、シクロオクチル基等の単環のシクロアルキル基が挙げられる。多環の脂環基としては、例えば、ノルボルニル基、トリシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロドデカニル基、及び、アダマンチル基等の多環のシクロアルキル基が挙げられる。なかでも、ノルボルニル基、トリシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロデカニル基、テトラシクロドデカニル基、及び、アダマンチル基等の炭素数7以上の嵩高い構造を有する脂環基が好ましい。
W represents an organic group containing a cyclic structure. Among these, a cyclic organic group is preferred.
Examples of the cyclic organic group include an alicyclic group, an aryl group, and a heterocyclic group.
The alicyclic group may be monocyclic or polycyclic. Examples of the monocyclic alicyclic group include monocyclic cycloalkyl groups such as a cyclopentyl group, a cyclohexyl group, and a cyclooctyl group. Examples of the polycyclic alicyclic group include polycyclic cycloalkyl groups such as norbornyl group, tricyclodecanyl group, tetracyclodecanyl group, tetracyclododecanyl group, and adamantyl group. Among these, alicyclic groups having a bulky structure having 7 or more carbon atoms, such as a norbornyl group, a tricyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclodecanyl group, a tetracyclododecanyl group, and an adamantyl group, are preferable.
 アリール基は、単環又は多環であってもよい。上記アリール基としては、例えば、フェニル基、ナフチル基、フェナントリル基、及び、アントリル基が挙げられる。
 複素環基は、単環又は多環であってもよい。なかでも、多環の複素環基である場合、より酸の拡散を抑制できる。複素環基は、芳香族性を有していてもよいし、芳香族性を有していなくてもよい。芳香族性を有している複素環としては、例えば、フラン環、チオフェン環、ベンゾフラン環、ベンゾチオフェン環、ジベンゾフラン環、ジベンゾチオフェン環、及び、ピリジン環が挙げられる。芳香族性を有していない複素環としては、例えば、テトラヒドロピラン環、ラクトン環、スルトン環、及び、デカヒドロイソキノリン環が挙げられる。複素環基における複素環としては、フラン環、チオフェン環、ピリジン環、又は、デカヒドロイソキノリン環が好ましい。
Aryl groups may be monocyclic or polycyclic. Examples of the aryl group include a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, a phenanthryl group, and an anthryl group.
The heterocyclic group may be monocyclic or polycyclic. Among these, when it is a polycyclic heterocyclic group, acid diffusion can be further suppressed. The heterocyclic group may or may not have aromaticity. Examples of the aromatic heterocycle include a furan ring, a thiophene ring, a benzofuran ring, a benzothiophene ring, a dibenzofuran ring, a dibenzothiophene ring, and a pyridine ring. Examples of the non-aromatic heterocycle include a tetrahydropyran ring, a lactone ring, a sultone ring, and a decahydroisoquinoline ring. The heterocycle in the heterocyclic group is preferably a furan ring, a thiophene ring, a pyridine ring, or a decahydroisoquinoline ring.
 上記環状の有機基は、置換基を有していてもよい。上記置換基としては、例えば、アルキル基(直鎖状及び分岐鎖状のいずれであってもよく、炭素数1~12が好ましい)、シクロアルキル基(単環、多環、及び、スピロ環のいずれであってもよく、炭素数3~20が好ましい)、アリール基(炭素数6~14が好ましい)、水酸基、アルコキシ基、エステル基、アミド基、ウレタン基、ウレイド基、チオエーテル基、スルホンアミド基、及び、スルホン酸エステル基が挙げられる。なお、環状の有機基を構成する炭素(環形成に寄与する炭素)はカルボニル炭素であってもよい。 The above cyclic organic group may have a substituent. Examples of the above substituents include alkyl groups (which may be linear or branched, preferably having 1 to 12 carbon atoms), cycloalkyl groups (monocyclic, polycyclic, and spirocyclic). any of them may be used, preferably 3 to 20 carbon atoms), aryl group (preferably 6 to 14 carbon atoms), hydroxyl group, alkoxy group, ester group, amide group, urethane group, ureido group, thioether group, sulfonamide group, and a sulfonic acid ester group. Note that the carbon constituting the cyclic organic group (carbon contributing to ring formation) may be carbonyl carbon.
 式(AN2)で表されるアニオンとしては、SO -CF-CH-OCO-(L)q’-W、SO -CF-CHF-CH-OCO-(L)q’-W、SO -CF-COO-(L)q’-W、SO -CF-CF-CH-CH-(L)-W、又は、SO -CF-CH(CF)-OCO-(L)q’-Wが好ましい。ここで、L、q及びWは、式(AN2)と同様である。q’は、0~10の整数を表す。 Examples of anions represented by formula (AN2) include SO 3 - -CF 2 -CH 2 -OCO-(L) q' -W, SO 3 - -CF 2 -CHF-CH 2 -OCO-(L) q ' -W, SO 3 - -CF 2 -COO- (L) q' -W, SO 3 - -CF 2 -CF 2 -CH 2 -CH 2 - (L) q -W, or SO 3 - - CF 2 -CH(CF 3 )-OCO-(L) q' -W is preferred. Here, L, q and W are the same as in formula (AN2). q' represents an integer from 0 to 10.
 非求核性アニオンとしては、下記式(AN3)で表される芳香族スルホン酸アニオンも好ましい。 As the non-nucleophilic anion, an aromatic sulfonic acid anion represented by the following formula (AN3) is also preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000041
 式(AN3)中、Arは、アリール基(フェニル基等)を表し、スルホン酸アニオン、及び、-(D-B)基以外の置換基を更に有していてもよい。更に有してもよい置換基としては、例えば、フッ素原子及び水酸基が挙げられる。
 nは、0以上の整数を表す。nとしては、1~4が好ましく、2~3がより好ましく、3が更に好ましい。
In formula (AN3), Ar represents an aryl group (such as a phenyl group), and may further have a sulfonic acid anion and a substituent other than the -(DB) group. Examples of further substituents that may be included include a fluorine atom and a hydroxyl group.
n represents an integer of 0 or more. n is preferably 1 to 4, more preferably 2 to 3, and even more preferably 3.
 Dは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。2価の連結基としては、エーテル基、チオエーテル基、カルボニル基、スルホキシド基、スルホン基、スルホン酸エステル基、エステル基、及び、これらの2種以上の組み合わせからなる基が挙げられる。 D represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Examples of the divalent linking group include an ether group, a thioether group, a carbonyl group, a sulfoxide group, a sulfone group, a sulfonic acid ester group, an ester group, and a group consisting of a combination of two or more thereof.
 Bは、炭化水素基を表す。
 Bとしては、脂肪族炭化水素基が好ましく、イソプロピル基、シクロヘキシル基、又は更に置換基を有してもよいアリール基(トリシクロヘキシルフェニル基等)がより好ましい。
B represents a hydrocarbon group.
B is preferably an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, more preferably an isopropyl group, a cyclohexyl group, or an aryl group that may further have a substituent (such as a tricyclohexylphenyl group).
 非求核性アニオンとしては、ジスルホンアミドアニオンも好ましい。
 ジスルホンアミドアニオンは、例えば、N(SO-Rで表されるアニオンである。
 ここで、Rは置換基を有していてもよいアルキル基を表し、フルオロアルキル基が好ましく、パーフルオロアルキル基がより好ましい。2個のRは互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。2個のRが互いに結合して形成される基は、置換基を有していてもよいアルキレン基が好ましく、フルオロアルキレン基が好ましく、パーフルオロアルキレン基が更に好ましい。上記アルキレン基の炭素数は2~4が好ましい。
As the non-nucleophilic anion, a disulfonamide anion is also preferred.
The disulfonamide anion is, for example, an anion represented by N - (SO 2 -R q ) 2 .
Here, R q represents an alkyl group that may have a substituent, preferably a fluoroalkyl group, and more preferably a perfluoroalkyl group. Two R q may be bonded to each other to form a ring. The group formed by bonding two R q's to each other is preferably an alkylene group which may have a substituent, preferably a fluoroalkylene group, and more preferably a perfluoroalkylene group. The alkylene group preferably has 2 to 4 carbon atoms.
 また、非求核性アニオンとしては、下記式(d1-1)~(d1-4)で表されるアニオンも挙げられる。 Further, examples of non-nucleophilic anions include anions represented by the following formulas (d1-1) to (d1-4).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000042
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000043
 式(d1-1)中、R51は置換基(例えば、水酸基)を有していてもよい炭化水素基(例えば、フェニル基等のアリール基)を表す。 In formula (d1-1), R 51 represents a hydrocarbon group (eg, an aryl group such as a phenyl group) which may have a substituent (eg, a hydroxyl group).
 式(d1-2)中、Z2cは置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~30の炭化水素基(ただし、Sに隣接する炭素原子にはフッ素原子が置換されない)を表す。
 Z2cにおける上記炭化水素基は、直鎖状でも分岐鎖状でもよく、環状構造を有していてもよい。また、上記炭化水素基における炭素原子(好ましくは、上記炭化水素基が環状構造を有する場合における、環員原子である炭素原子)は、カルボニル炭素(-CO-)であってもよい。上記炭化水素基としては、例えば、置換基を有していてもよいノルボルニル基を有する基が挙げられる。上記ノルボルニル基を形成する炭素原子は、カルボニル炭素であってもよい。
 式(d1-2)中の「Z2c-SO 」は、上述の式(AN1)~(AN3)で表されるアニオンとは異なることが好ましい。例えば、Z2cは、アリール基以外が好ましい。例えば、Z2cにおける、-SO に対してα位及びβ位の原子は、置換基としてフッ素原子を有する炭素原子以外の原子が好ましい。例えば、Z2cは、-SO に対してα位の原子及び/又はβ位の原子は環状基中の環員原子であることが好ましい。
In formula (d1-2), Z 2c represents a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms which may have a substituent (however, the carbon atom adjacent to S is not substituted with a fluorine atom).
The hydrocarbon group in Z 2c may be linear or branched, or may have a cyclic structure. Further, a carbon atom in the hydrocarbon group (preferably a carbon atom that is a ring member atom when the hydrocarbon group has a cyclic structure) may be a carbonyl carbon (-CO-). Examples of the hydrocarbon group include a group having a norbornyl group which may have a substituent. The carbon atom forming the norbornyl group may be a carbonyl carbon.
“Z 2c —SO 3 ” in formula (d1-2) is preferably different from the anions represented by formulas (AN1) to (AN3) above. For example, Z 2c is preferably other than an aryl group. For example, in Z 2c , atoms at the α-position and β-position with respect to -SO 3 - are preferably atoms other than carbon atoms having a fluorine atom as a substituent. For example, in Z 2c , the atom at the α-position and/or the atom at the β-position with respect to -SO 3 - is preferably a ring member atom in a cyclic group.
 式(d1-3)中、R52は有機基(好ましくはフッ素原子を有する炭化水素基)を表し、Yは直鎖状、分岐鎖状、若しくは、環状のアルキレン基、アリーレン基、又は、カルボニル基を表し、Rfは炭化水素基を表す。 In formula (d1-3), R 52 represents an organic group (preferably a hydrocarbon group having a fluorine atom), and Y 3 is a linear, branched, or cyclic alkylene group, arylene group, or It represents a carbonyl group, and Rf represents a hydrocarbon group.
 式(d1-4)中、R53及びR54は、それぞれ独立に、有機基(好ましくはフッ素原子を有する炭化水素基)を表す。R53及びR54は互いに結合して環を形成していてもよい。 In formula (d1-4), R 53 and R 54 each independently represent an organic group (preferably a hydrocarbon group having a fluorine atom). R 53 and R 54 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
 有機アニオンは、1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。 The organic anions may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 塩(C)は、酸の作用により分解する基を有することが好ましい。
 塩(C)は、下記一般式(U1)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。
It is preferable that the salt (C) has a group that is decomposed by the action of an acid.
The salt (C) is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (U1).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000044
 一般式(U1)中、Lは、単結合又は二価の連結基を表す。Lが複数存在するとき、複数のLは同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
 Aは、酸の作用により分解する基を表す。Aが複数存在するとき、複数のAは同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
 nは、1~5の整数を表す。
 Xは、n+1価の連結基を表す。
 Mは、スルホニウムイオン又はヨードニウムイオンを表す。
In general formula (U1), L represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. When a plurality of L's exist, the plurality of L's may be the same or different.
A represents a group that decomposes under the action of an acid. When a plurality of A's exist, the plural A's may be the same or different.
n represents an integer from 1 to 5.
X represents an n+1-valent linking group.
M + represents a sulfonium ion or an iodonium ion.
 一般式(U1)中、Xはn+1価の連結基を表す。
 Xが表す連結基としては、特に限定されないが、例えば、脂肪族基(直鎖状、分岐状、環状のいずれでもよい)、芳香族基、-O-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、及び、これらの2つ以上の基を組み合わせた基が挙げられる。
 上記脂肪族基としては、アルキル基(直鎖状でも分岐状でも良く、好ましくは炭素数1~20、より好ましくは炭素数1~10のアルキル基)のn個の水素原子を取り除いてなる基、及びシクロアルキル基(単環でも多環でもよく、好ましくは炭素数3~20、より好ましくは炭素数5~10のシクロアルキル基)のn個の水素原子を取り除いてなる基が好ましい。
 上記脂肪族基は置換基を有していても良く、置換基としては、例えば、上記置換基Tが挙げられる。
 上記脂肪族基は、炭素-炭素原子間にヘテロ原子(例えば、硫黄原子、酸素原子、窒素原子等)を有していても良い。
In the general formula (U1), X represents an n+1-valent linking group.
The linking group represented by Examples include OCO- and a combination of two or more of these groups.
The aliphatic group mentioned above is a group obtained by removing n hydrogen atoms from an alkyl group (which may be linear or branched, preferably having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms). , and a group obtained by removing n hydrogen atoms from a cycloalkyl group (which may be monocyclic or polycyclic, preferably having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 5 to 10 carbon atoms) is preferable.
The above aliphatic group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the above substituent T.
The aliphatic group may have a heteroatom (eg, sulfur atom, oxygen atom, nitrogen atom, etc.) between carbon atoms.
 上記芳香族基としては、アリール基(好ましくは炭素数6~20、より好ましくは炭素数6~18のアリール基である。また、上記アリール基は炭素数6~10のアリール基であることも好ましい。上記アリール基の具体例としては、例えばフェニル基、ターフェニル基などが挙げられる。)のn個の水素原子を取り除いてなる基が好ましい。
 上記芳香族基は置換基を有していても良く、置換基としては、例えば、上記置換基Tが挙げられる。
 上記芳香族基は、炭素-炭素原子間にヘテロ原子(例えば、硫黄原子、酸素原子、窒素原子等)を有していても良い。
The above aromatic group is an aryl group (preferably an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 18 carbon atoms).The aryl group may also be an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms. Preferred. Specific examples of the aryl group include phenyl group, terphenyl group, etc.) from which n hydrogen atoms have been removed.
The above aromatic group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the above substituent T.
The aromatic group may have a heteroatom (eg, sulfur atom, oxygen atom, nitrogen atom, etc.) between carbon atoms.
 Xは、n+1価の芳香族基であることが好ましい。 It is preferable that X is an n+1-valent aromatic group.
 一般式(U1)中、nは1~5の整数を表し、1~3の整数を表すことが好ましく、2又は3を表すことがより好ましく、3を表すことが更に好ましい。 In the general formula (U1), n represents an integer of 1 to 5, preferably an integer of 1 to 3, more preferably 2 or 3, and even more preferably 3.
 一般式(U1)中、Lは単結合又は二価の連結基を表す。
 Lが表す二価の連結基としては、特に限定されないが、例えば、脂肪族基(直鎖状、分岐状、環状のいずれでもよい)、芳香族基、-O-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、及び、これらの2つ以上の基を組み合わせた基が挙げられる。
 上記脂肪族基としては、アルキレン基(直鎖状でも分岐状でも良く、好ましくは炭素数1~20、より好ましくは炭素数1~10のアルキレン基)、及びシクロアルキレン基(単環でも多環でもよく、好ましくは炭素数3~20、より好ましくは炭素数5~10のシクロアルキレン基)が好ましい。
 上記脂肪族基は置換基を有していても良く、置換基としては、例えば、上記置換基Tが挙げられる。
 上記脂肪族基は、炭素-炭素原子間にヘテロ原子(例えば、硫黄原子、酸素原子、窒素原子等)を有していても良い。
In general formula (U1), L represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
The divalent linking group represented by L is not particularly limited, but includes, for example, an aliphatic group (which may be linear, branched, or cyclic), an aromatic group, -O-, -CO-, -COO -, -OCO-, and a combination of two or more of these groups.
The aliphatic groups mentioned above include alkylene groups (which may be linear or branched, preferably having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms), and cycloalkylene groups (monocyclic or polycyclic alkylene groups). A cycloalkylene group having preferably 3 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 5 to 10 carbon atoms is preferred.
The above aliphatic group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the above substituent T.
The aliphatic group may have a heteroatom (eg, sulfur atom, oxygen atom, nitrogen atom, etc.) between carbon atoms.
 上記芳香族基としては、アリーレン基(好ましくは炭素数6~20、より好ましくは炭素数6~10のアリーレン基)が好ましい。
 上記芳香族基は置換基を有していても良く、置換基としては、例えば、上記置換基Tが挙げられる。
 上記芳香族基は、炭素-炭素原子間にヘテロ原子(例えば、硫黄原子、酸素原子、窒素原子等)を有していても良い。
The aromatic group is preferably an arylene group (preferably an arylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms).
The above aromatic group may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the above substituent T.
The aromatic group may have a heteroatom (eg, sulfur atom, oxygen atom, nitrogen atom, etc.) between carbon atoms.
 Lは、アリーレン基であることが好ましい。 It is preferable that L is an arylene group.
 一般式(U1)中、Aは酸の作用により分解する基を表す。
 Aが表す酸の作用により分解する基(酸分解性基)としては、特に限定されず、例えば、上記樹脂(A)において記載した酸分解性基が挙げられる。酸分解性基は、極性基が酸の作用により分解し脱離する基(脱離基)で保護された構造を有することが好ましい。極性基としては、カルボキシ基、フェノール性水酸基、アルコール性水酸基が好ましい。
In the general formula (U1), A represents a group that decomposes under the action of an acid.
The group that is decomposed by the action of an acid (acid-decomposable group) represented by A is not particularly limited, and includes, for example, the acid-decomposable groups described in the resin (A) above. The acid-decomposable group preferably has a structure in which a polar group is protected with a group (leaving group) that decomposes and leaves under the action of an acid. As the polar group, a carboxy group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, and an alcoholic hydroxyl group are preferable.
 Mは、スルホニウムイオン又はヨードニウムイオンを表し、具体例及び好ましい範囲は、前述の一般式(T1)中のGm+がスルホニウムイオン又はヨードニウムイオンを表す場合の具体例及び好ましい範囲と同様である。 M + represents a sulfonium ion or an iodonium ion, and specific examples and preferred ranges are the same as those in the case where G m+ in general formula (T1) represents a sulfonium ion or an iodonium ion.
 塩(C)は、下記一般式(U2)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。 The salt (C) is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (U2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000045
 一般式(U2)中、L、A、n、及びMは、それぞれ、一般式(U1)中のL、A、n、及びMと同じ意味を表す。 In general formula (U2), L, A, n, and M + represent the same meanings as L, A, n, and M + in general formula (U1), respectively.
 塩(C)は、化合物(I)~(II)からなる群から選択される少なくとも1つであってもよい。 The salt (C) may be at least one selected from the group consisting of compounds (I) to (II).
(化合物(I))
 化合物(I)は、1つ以上の下記構造部位X及び1つ以上の下記構造部位Yを有する化合物であって、活性光線又は放射線の照射によって、下記構造部位Xに由来する下記第1の酸性部位と下記構造部位Yに由来する下記第2の酸性部位とを含む酸を発生する化合物である。
  構造部位X:アニオン部位A とカチオン部位M とからなり、且つ活性光線又は放射線の照射によって、HAで表される第1の酸性部位を形成する構造部位
  構造部位Y:アニオン部位A とカチオン部位M とからなり、且つ活性光線又は放射線の照射によって、HAで表される第2の酸性部位を形成する構造部位
 上記化合物(I)は、下記条件Iを満たす。
(Compound (I))
Compound (I) is a compound having one or more of the following structural moieties X and one or more of the following structural moieties Y, and the following first acidic acid derived from the following structural moiety This is a compound that generates an acid containing the following second acidic site derived from the structural site Y below.
Structural moiety _ _ _ A structural site consisting of A 2 - and a cationic site M 2 + , and which forms a second acidic site represented by HA 2 upon irradiation with actinic rays or radiation The above compound (I) satisfies the following condition I .
 条件I:上記化合物(I)において上記構造部位X中の上記カチオン部位M 及び上記構造部位Y中の上記カチオン部位M をHに置き換えてなる化合物PIが、上記構造部位X中の上記カチオン部位M をHに置き換えてなるHAで表される酸性部位に由来する酸解離定数a1と、上記構造部位Y中の上記カチオン部位M をHに置き換えてなるHAで表される酸性部位に由来する酸解離定数a2とを有し、且つ、上記酸解離定数a1よりも上記酸解離定数a2の方が大きい。 Condition I: A compound PI obtained by replacing the cation moiety M 1 + in the structural moiety X and the cation moiety M 2 + in the structural moiety Y with H + in the compound (I) is The acid dissociation constant a1 derived from the acidic site represented by HA 1 is obtained by replacing the cationic site M 1 + with H + , and the acid dissociation constant a1 derived from the acidic site represented by HA 1 is obtained by replacing the cationic site M 2 + in the structural site Y with H + It has an acid dissociation constant a2 derived from the acidic site represented by HA 2 , and the acid dissociation constant a2 is larger than the acid dissociation constant a1.
 以下において、条件Iをより具体的に説明する。
 化合物(I)が、例えば、上記構造部位Xに由来する上記第1の酸性部位を1つと、上記構造部位Yに由来する上記第2の酸性部位を1つ有する酸を発生する化合物である場合、化合物PIは「HAとHAとを有する化合物」に該当する。
 化合物PIの酸解離定数a1及び酸解離定数a2とは、より具体的に説明すると、化合物PIの酸解離定数を求めた場合において、化合物PIが「A とHAとを有する化合物」となる際のpKaが酸解離定数a1であり、上記「A とHAとを有する化合物」が「A とA とを有する化合物」となる際のpKaが酸解離定数a2である。
Condition I will be explained in more detail below.
When compound (I) is, for example, an acid-generating compound having one of the first acidic sites derived from the structural site X and one of the second acidic sites derived from the structural site Y. , compound PI corresponds to "a compound having HA 1 and HA 2 ".
To be more specific, the acid dissociation constant a1 and the acid dissociation constant a2 of the compound PI are defined as, when the acid dissociation constant of the compound PI is determined, the compound PI is a "compound having A 1 - and HA 2 ". The pKa when the above "compound having A 1 - and HA 2 " becomes "the compound having A 1 - and A 2 - " is the acid dissociation constant a2. be.
 化合物(I)が、例えば、上記構造部位Xに由来する上記第1の酸性部位を2つと、上記構造部位Yに由来する上記第2の酸性部位を1つと有する酸を発生する化合物である場合、化合物PIは「2つのHAと1つのHAとを有する化合物」に該当する。
 化合物PIの酸解離定数を求めた場合、化合物PIが「1つのA と1つのHAと1つのHAとを有する化合物」となる際の酸解離定数、及び「1つのA と1つのHAと1つのHAとを有する化合物」が「2つのA と1つのHAとを有する化合物」となる際の酸解離定数が、上述の酸解離定数a1に該当する。「2つのA と1つのHAとを有する化合物」が「2つのA とA を有する化合物」となる際の酸解離定数が酸解離定数a2に該当する。つまり、化合物PIの場合、上記構造部位X中の上記カチオン部位M をHに置き換えてなるHAで表される酸性部位に由来する酸解離定数を複数有する場合、複数の酸解離定数a1のうち最も大きい値よりも、酸解離定数a2の値の方が大きい。なお、化合物PIが「1つのA と1つのHAと1つのHAとを有する化合物」となる際の酸解離定数をaaとし、「1つのA と1つのHAと1つのHAとを有する化合物」が「2つのA と1つのHAとを有する化合物」となる際の酸解離定数をabとしたとき、aa及びabの関係は、aa<abを満たす。
When compound (I) is, for example, an acid-generating compound having two of the first acidic sites derived from the structural site X and one of the second acidic sites derived from the structural site Y. , compound PI corresponds to "a compound having two HA 1 and one HA 2 ".
When calculating the acid dissociation constant of compound PI, the acid dissociation constant when compound PI becomes "a compound having one A 1 - , one HA 1 and one HA 2 ", and "one A 1 - The acid dissociation constant when a compound having one HA 1 and one HA 2 becomes a compound having two A 1 - and one HA 2 corresponds to the acid dissociation constant a1 described above. . The acid dissociation constant when "a compound having two A 1 - and one HA 2 " becomes "a compound having two A 1 - and A 2 - " corresponds to the acid dissociation constant a2. In other words, in the case of compound PI, when it has a plurality of acid dissociation constants derived from the acidic site represented by HA 1 , which is obtained by replacing the cation site M 1 + in the structural site X with H + , it has a plurality of acid dissociation constants. The value of acid dissociation constant a2 is larger than the largest value of a1. Note that the acid dissociation constant when compound PI becomes "a compound having one A 1 - , one HA 1 , and one HA 2 " is aa, and "one A 1 - and one HA 1 and 1 When ab is the acid dissociation constant when a compound with one HA 2 becomes a compound with two A 1 - and one HA 2 , the relationship between aa and ab satisfies aa<ab. .
 酸解離定数a1及び酸解離定数a2は、上述した酸解離定数の測定方法により求められる。
 上記化合物PIとは、化合物(I)に活性光線又は放射線を照射した場合に、発生する酸に該当する。
 化合物(I)が2つ以上の構造部位Xを有する場合、構造部位Xは、それぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよい。また、2つ以上の上記A 、及び2つ以上の上記M は、それぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
 化合物(I)中、上記A 及び上記A 、並びに、上記M 及び上記M は、それぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよいが、上記A 及び上記A は、それぞれ異なっていることが好ましい。
The acid dissociation constant a1 and the acid dissociation constant a2 are determined by the acid dissociation constant measurement method described above.
The above-mentioned compound PI corresponds to an acid generated when compound (I) is irradiated with actinic rays or radiation.
When compound (I) has two or more structural sites X, the structural sites X may be the same or different. Further, two or more of the above A 1 and two or more of the above M 1 + may be the same or different.
In compound (I), the above A 1 - and the above A 2 - , and the above M 1 + and the above M 2 + may be the same or different, but the above A 1 - and the above A 2 - are preferably different from each other.
 上記化合物PIにおいて、酸解離定数a1(酸解離定数a1が複数存在する場合はその最大値)と酸解離定数a2との差(絶対値)は、0.1以上が好ましく、0.5以上がより好ましく、1.0以上が更に好ましい。なお、酸解離定数a1(酸解離定数a1が複数存在する場合はその最大値)と酸解離定数a2との差(絶対値)の上限値は特に制限されないが、例えば、16以下である。 In the above compound PI, the difference (absolute value) between the acid dissociation constant a1 (the maximum value when there are multiple acid dissociation constants a1) and the acid dissociation constant a2 is preferably 0.1 or more, and 0.5 or more. More preferably, 1.0 or more is even more preferable. Note that the upper limit of the difference (absolute value) between the acid dissociation constant a1 (the maximum value when there is a plurality of acid dissociation constants a1) and the acid dissociation constant a2 is not particularly limited, but is, for example, 16 or less.
 上記化合物PIにおいて、酸解離定数a2は、20以下が好ましく、15以下がより好ましい。酸解離定数a2の下限値としては、-4以上が好ましい。 In the above compound PI, the acid dissociation constant a2 is preferably 20 or less, more preferably 15 or less. The lower limit of the acid dissociation constant a2 is preferably −4 or more.
 上記化合物PIにおいて、酸解離定数a1は、塩(B)のアニオンの共役酸のpKaよりも小さいことが好ましい。酸解離定数a1と、塩(B)のアニオンの共役酸のpKaとの差の絶対値は、0.1以上20未満が好ましく、1以上15未満がより好ましく、2以上10未満が特に好ましい。 In the above compound PI, the acid dissociation constant a1 is preferably smaller than the pKa of the conjugate acid of the anion of the salt (B). The absolute value of the difference between the acid dissociation constant a1 and the pKa of the conjugate acid of the anion of the salt (B) is preferably 0.1 or more and less than 20, more preferably 1 or more and less than 15, particularly preferably 2 or more and less than 10.
 アニオン部位A 及びアニオン部位A は、負電荷を帯びた原子又は原子団を含む構造部位であり、例えば、以下に示す式(AA-1)~(AA-3)及び式(BB-1)~(BB-6)からなる群から選ばれる構造部位が挙げられる。
 アニオン部位A としては、酸解離定数の小さい酸性部位を形成し得るものが好ましく、なかでも、式(AA-1)~(AA-3)のいずれかであることがより好ましく、式(AA-1)及び(AA-3)のいずれかであることが更に好ましい。
 また、アニオン部位A としては、アニオン部位A よりも酸解離定数の大きい酸性部位を形成し得るものが好ましく、式(BB-1)~(BB-6)のいずれかであることがより好ましく、式(BB-1)及び(BB-4)のいずれかであることが更に好ましい。
 なお、以下の式(AA-1)~(AA-3)及び式(BB-1)~(BB-6)中、*は、結合位置を表す。
 式(AA-2)中、Rは、1価の有機基を表す。Rで表される1価の有機基は特に制限されないが、例えば、シアノ基、トリフルオロメチル基、及びメタンスルホニル基が挙げられる。
The anionic moiety A 1 - and the anionic moiety A 2 - are structural moieties containing negatively charged atoms or atomic groups, for example, the formulas (AA-1) to (AA-3) and the formula (BB Examples include structural sites selected from the group consisting of -1) to (BB-6).
The anion moiety A 1 - is preferably one that can form an acidic moiety with a small acid dissociation constant, and more preferably one of the formulas (AA-1) to (AA-3), and the formula ( More preferably, it is either AA-1) or (AA-3).
Furthermore, the anionic moiety A 2 - is preferably one that can form an acidic moiety with a larger acid dissociation constant than the anionic moiety A 1 - , and should be one of formulas (BB-1) to (BB-6). is more preferred, and one of formulas (BB-1) and (BB-4) is even more preferred.
Note that in the following formulas (AA-1) to (AA-3) and formulas (BB-1) to (BB-6), * represents the bonding position.
In formula (AA-2), R A represents a monovalent organic group. The monovalent organic group represented by R A is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a cyano group, a trifluoromethyl group, and a methanesulfonyl group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000046
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000047
 カチオン部位M 及びカチオン部位M は、正電荷を帯びた原子又は原子団を含む構造部位であり、例えば、電荷が1価の有機カチオンが挙げられる。なお、有機カチオンとしては、例えば、上述したG で表される有機カチオンが挙げられる。 The cationic site M 1 + and the cationic site M 2 + are structural sites containing positively charged atoms or atomic groups, such as monovalent organic cations. In addition, as an organic cation, the organic cation represented by G1 + mentioned above is mentioned, for example.
(化合物(II))
 化合物(II)は、2つ以上の上記構造部位X及び1つ以上の下記構造部位Zを有する化合物であって、活性光線又は放射線の照射によって、上記構造部位Xに由来する上記第1の酸性部位を2つ以上と上記構造部位Zとを含む酸を発生する化合物である。
 構造部位Z:酸を中和可能な非イオン性の部位
(Compound (II))
Compound (II) is a compound having two or more of the above structural sites It is a compound that generates an acid containing two or more sites and the above structural site Z.
Structural site Z: nonionic site capable of neutralizing acids
 化合物(II)中、構造部位Xの定義、並びに、A 及びM の定義は、上述した化合物(I)中の構造部位Xの定義、並びに、A 及びM の定義と同義であり、好適態様も同じである。 In compound (II), the definition of structural site X and the definitions of A 1 - and M 1 + are the same as the definitions of structural site X and A 1 - and M 1 + in compound (I) described above. It has the same meaning as , and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
 上記化合物(II)において上記構造部位X中の上記カチオン部位M をHに置き換えてなる化合物PIIにおいて、上記構造部位X中の上記カチオン部位M をHに置き換えてなるHAで表される酸性部位に由来する酸解離定数a1の好適範囲については、上記化合物PIにおける酸解離定数a1と同じである。
 なお、化合物(II)が、例えば、上記構造部位Xに由来する上記第1の酸性部位を2つと上記構造部位Zとを有する酸を発生する化合物である場合、化合物PIIは「2つのHAを有する化合物」に該当する。この化合物PIIの酸解離定数を求めた場合、化合物PIIが「1つのA と1つのHAとを有する化合物」となる際の酸解離定数、及び「1つのA と1つのHAとを有する化合物」が「2つのA を有する化合物」となる際の酸解離定数が、酸解離定数a1に該当する。
In the compound PII obtained by replacing the cationic site M 1 + in the structural site X with H + in the compound (II), HA 1 is obtained by replacing the cationic site M 1 + in the structural site X with H + . The preferred range of the acid dissociation constant a1 derived from the acidic site represented by is the same as the acid dissociation constant a1 in the above compound PI.
In addition, when compound (II) is, for example, a compound that generates an acid having two of the first acidic sites derived from the structural site X and the structural site Z, compound PII is a compound that generates an acid having two of the first acidic sites derived from the structural site X and the structural site Z. Compounds that have When calculating the acid dissociation constant of this compound PII, the acid dissociation constant when compound PII becomes "a compound having one A 1 - and one HA 1 " and "one A 1 - and one HA 1" are determined. The acid dissociation constant when a "compound having 1 " becomes "a compound having two A 1 - " corresponds to the acid dissociation constant a1.
 酸解離定数a1は、上述した酸解離定数の測定方法により求められる。
 上記化合物PIIとは、化合物(II)に活性光線又は放射線を照射した場合に、発生する酸に該当する。
 なお、上記2つ以上の構造部位Xは、それぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよい。2つ以上の上記A 、及び2つ以上の上記M は、それぞれ同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
The acid dissociation constant a1 is determined by the acid dissociation constant measurement method described above.
The above-mentioned compound PII corresponds to an acid generated when compound (II) is irradiated with actinic rays or radiation.
Note that the two or more structural sites X may be the same or different. The two or more A 1 and the two or more M 1 + may be the same or different.
 構造部位Z中の酸を中和可能な非イオン性の部位としては特に制限されず、例えば、プロトンと静電的に相互作用し得る基、又は、電子を有する官能基を含む部位であることが好ましい。
 プロトンと静電的に相互作用し得る基、又は、電子を有する官能基としては、環状ポリエーテル等のマクロサイクリック構造を有する官能基、又は、π共役に寄与しない非共有電子対をもった窒素原子を有する官能基が挙げられる。π共役に寄与しない非共有電子対を有する窒素原子とは、例えば、下記式に示す部分構造を有する窒素原子である。
The nonionic site that can neutralize the acid in the structural site Z is not particularly limited, and for example, it must be a site that contains a group that can electrostatically interact with protons or a functional group that has electrons. is preferred.
The group capable of electrostatic interaction with protons or the functional group having electrons is a functional group having a macrocyclic structure such as a cyclic polyether, or a functional group having a lone pair of electrons that does not contribute to π conjugation. Examples include functional groups having a nitrogen atom. A nitrogen atom having a lone pair of electrons that does not contribute to π conjugation is, for example, a nitrogen atom having a partial structure shown in the following formula.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000048
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000048
 プロトンと静電的に相互作用し得る基又は電子を有する官能基の部分構造としては、例えば、クラウンエーテル構造、アザクラウンエーテル構造、1~3級アミン構造、ピリジン構造、イミダゾール構造、及びピラジン構造が挙げられ、なかでも、1~3級アミン構造が好ましい。 Examples of partial structures of functional groups having groups or electrons that can electrostatically interact with protons include crown ether structures, aza crown ether structures, primary to tertiary amine structures, pyridine structures, imidazole structures, and pyrazine structures. Among these, primary to tertiary amine structures are preferred.
 化合物(I)及び化合物(II)が有し得る、カチオン以外の部位を例示するが、これらに限定されない。 The following are examples of moieties other than cations that compound (I) and compound (II) may have, but are not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000049
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000050
 以下に塩(C)の具体例を示すが、これに限定されない。 Specific examples of the salt (C) are shown below, but the salt (C) is not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000051
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000052
 本発明の組成物が塩(C)を含む場合、塩(C)の含有量は、本発明の組成物の全固形分に対して、0.5質量%以上が好ましく、1.0質量%以上がより好ましい。塩(B)の含有量は、本発明の組成物の全固形分に対して、50.0質量%以下が好ましく、30.0質量%以下がより好ましく、25.0質量%以下が更に好ましい。
 塩(C)は、1種で使用してもよいし、2種以上使用してもよい。2種以上使用する場合は、その合計含有量が、上記好適含有量の範囲内であるのが好ましい。
When the composition of the present invention contains a salt (C), the content of the salt (C) is preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and 1.0% by mass based on the total solid content of the composition of the present invention. The above is more preferable. The content of salt (B) is preferably 50.0% by mass or less, more preferably 30.0% by mass or less, and even more preferably 25.0% by mass or less, based on the total solid content of the composition of the present invention. .
Salt (C) may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total content is within the above-mentioned preferred content range.
[酸拡散制御剤]
 前述したように、塩(B)は酸拡散制御剤として機能することができるが、本発明の組成物は、塩(B)以外に、更に、酸拡散制御剤を含んでいてもよい。
 酸拡散制御剤は、露光時に光酸発生剤(例えば、塩(C)など)等から発生する酸をトラップし、余分な発生酸による、未露光部における酸分解性樹脂の反応を抑制するクエンチャーとして作用する。
 酸拡散制御剤の種類は特に制限されず、例えば、塩基性化合物(DA)、窒素原子を有し、酸の作用により脱離する基を有する低分子化合物(DB)、及び、活性光線又は放射線の照射により酸拡散制御能が低下又は消失する化合物(DC)が挙げられる。
 化合物(DC)としては、光酸発生剤(例えば、塩(C)など)から発生する酸に対して相対的に弱酸となる酸のオニウム塩化合物(DD)、及び、活性光線又は放射線の照射により塩基性が低下又は消失する塩基性化合物(DE)が挙げられる。
 塩基性化合物(DA)の具体例としては、例えば、国際公開第2020/066824号の段落[0132]~[0136]に記載のものが挙げられ、活性光線又は放射線の照射により塩基性が低下又は消失する塩基性化合物(DE)の具体例としては、国際公開第2020/066824号の段落[0137]~[0155]に記載のもの、及び国際公開第2020/066824号の段落[0164]に記載のものが挙げられ、窒素原子を有し、酸の作用により脱離する基を有する低分子化合物(DB)の具体例としては、国際公開第2020/066824号の段落[0156]~[0163]に記載のものが挙げられる。
 光酸発生剤に対して相対的に弱酸となるオニウム塩化合物(DD)の具体例としては、例えば、国際公開第2020/158337号の段落[0305]~[0314]に記載のものが挙げられる。
[Acid diffusion control agent]
As mentioned above, the salt (B) can function as an acid diffusion control agent, but the composition of the present invention may further contain an acid diffusion control agent in addition to the salt (B).
The acid diffusion control agent is a quenching agent that traps the acid generated from the photoacid generator (for example, salt (C), etc.) during exposure and suppresses the reaction of the acid-decomposable resin in the unexposed area due to the excess generated acid. Acts as a char.
The type of acid diffusion control agent is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a basic compound (DA), a low molecular compound (DB) having a nitrogen atom and a group that is eliminated by the action of an acid, and actinic rays or radiation. Examples include compounds (DC) whose ability to control acid diffusion decreases or disappears when irradiated with.
The compound (DC) is an onium salt compound (DD) of an acid that becomes a relatively weak acid with respect to the acid generated from a photoacid generator (for example, salt (C), etc.), and irradiation with actinic rays or radiation. Examples include basic compounds (DE) whose basicity decreases or disappears due to
Specific examples of basic compounds (DA) include those described in paragraphs [0132] to [0136] of International Publication No. 2020/066824; Specific examples of basic compounds (DE) that disappear include those described in paragraphs [0137] to [0155] of International Publication No. 2020/066824, and those described in paragraph [0164] of International Publication No. 2020/066824. Specific examples of low molecular weight compounds (DB) having a nitrogen atom and a group that is eliminated by the action of an acid include paragraphs [0156] to [0163] of International Publication No. 2020/066824. Examples include those described in .
Specific examples of onium salt compounds (DD) that are weak acids relative to photoacid generators include those described in paragraphs [0305] to [0314] of International Publication No. 2020/158337. .
 上記以外にも、例えば、米国特許出願公開2016/0070167A1号の段落[0627]~[0664]、米国特許出願公開2015/0004544A1号の段落[0095]~[0187]、米国特許出願公開2016/0237190A1号の段落[0403]~[0423]、及び米国特許出願公開2016/0274458A1号の段落[0259]~[0328]に開示された公知の化合物を酸拡散制御剤として好適に使用できる。 In addition to the above, for example, paragraphs [0627] to [0664] of US Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0070167A1, paragraphs [0095] to [0187] of US Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0004544A1, and US Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0237190A1. Known compounds disclosed in paragraphs [0403] to [0423] of No. 1, and paragraphs [0259] to [0328] of US Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0274458A1 can be suitably used as acid diffusion control agents.
 本発明の組成物に塩(B)以外の酸拡散制御剤が含まれる場合、上記酸拡散制御剤の含有量は、本発明の組成物の全固形分に対して、0.1~15.0質量%が好ましく、0.5~15.0質量%がより好ましい。
 塩(B)以外の酸拡散制御剤は、1種で使用してもよいし、2種以上使用してもよい。2種以上使用する場合は、その合計含有量が、上記好適含有量の範囲内であるのが好ましい。
When the composition of the present invention contains an acid diffusion control agent other than the salt (B), the content of the acid diffusion control agent is 0.1 to 15% based on the total solid content of the composition of the present invention. 0% by mass is preferred, and 0.5 to 15.0% by mass is more preferred.
Acid diffusion control agents other than the salt (B) may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total content is within the above-mentioned preferred content range.
[疎水性樹脂]
 本発明の組成物は、更に、樹脂(A)とは異なる疎水性樹脂を含んでいてもよい。
 疎水性樹脂はレジスト膜の表面に偏在するように設計されることが好ましいが、界面活性剤とは異なり、必ずしも分子内に親水基を有する必要はなく、極性物質及び非極性物質の均一な混合に寄与しなくてもよい。
 疎水性樹脂の添加による効果として、水に対するレジスト膜表面の静的及び動的な接触角の制御、並びに、アウトガスの抑制が挙げられる。
[Hydrophobic resin]
The composition of the present invention may further contain a hydrophobic resin different from the resin (A).
The hydrophobic resin is preferably designed so that it is unevenly distributed on the surface of the resist film, but unlike a surfactant, it does not necessarily have to have a hydrophilic group in the molecule, and it is necessary to uniformly mix polar and non-polar substances. does not have to contribute to
Effects of adding a hydrophobic resin include controlling the static and dynamic contact angle of the resist film surface with water and suppressing outgassing.
 疎水性樹脂は、膜表層への偏在化の点から、フッ素原子、珪素原子、及び、樹脂の側鎖部分に含まれたCH部分構造のいずれか1種以上を有するのが好ましく、2種以上を有することがより好ましい。上記疎水性樹脂は、炭素数5以上の炭化水素基を有することが好ましい。これらの基は樹脂の主鎖中に有していても、側鎖に置換していてもよい。
 疎水性樹脂としては、国際公開第2020/004306号の段落[0275]~[0279]に記載される化合物が挙げられる。
From the viewpoint of uneven distribution on the membrane surface layer, the hydrophobic resin preferably has one or more of a fluorine atom, a silicon atom, and a CH3 partial structure contained in the side chain portion of the resin, and preferably has two or more of them. It is more preferable to have the above. The hydrophobic resin preferably has a hydrocarbon group having 5 or more carbon atoms. These groups may be present in the main chain of the resin or may be substituted on the side chains.
Examples of the hydrophobic resin include compounds described in paragraphs [0275] to [0279] of International Publication No. 2020/004306.
 本発明の組成物が疎水性樹脂を含む場合、疎水性樹脂の含有量は、本発明の組成物の全固形分に対して、0.01~20.0質量%が好ましく、0.1~15.0質量%がより好ましい。
 疎水性樹脂は、1種で使用してもよいし、2種以上使用してもよい。2種以上使用する場合は、その合計含有量が、上記好適含有量の範囲内であるのが好ましい。
When the composition of the present invention contains a hydrophobic resin, the content of the hydrophobic resin is preferably 0.01 to 20.0% by mass, and 0.1 to 20.0% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition of the present invention. 15.0% by mass is more preferred.
The hydrophobic resins may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total content is within the above-mentioned preferred content range.
[界面活性剤]
 本発明の組成物は、界面活性剤を含んでいてもよい。界面活性剤を含むと、密着性により優れ、現像欠陥のより少ないパターンを形成することができる。
 界面活性剤は、フッ素系及び/又はシリコン系界面活性剤が好ましい。
 フッ素系及び/又はシリコン系界面活性剤としては、国際公開第2018/193954号の段落[0218]及び[0219]に開示された界面活性剤が挙げられる。
[Surfactant]
The composition of the invention may also contain a surfactant. When a surfactant is included, a pattern with better adhesion and fewer development defects can be formed.
The surfactant is preferably a fluorine-based and/or silicon-based surfactant.
Examples of the fluorine-based and/or silicon-based surfactants include the surfactants disclosed in paragraphs [0218] and [0219] of International Publication No. 2018/193954.
 本発明の組成物が界面活性剤を含む場合、界面活性剤の含有量は、本発明の組成物の全固形分に対して、0.0001~2.0質量%が好ましく、0.0005~1.0質量%がより好ましく、0.1~1.0質量%が更に好ましい。
 界面活性剤は、1種で使用してもよいし、2種以上使用してもよい。2種以上使用する場合は、その合計含有量が、上記好適含有量の範囲内であるのが好ましい。
When the composition of the present invention contains a surfactant, the content of the surfactant is preferably 0.0001 to 2.0% by mass, and 0.0005 to 2.0% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition of the present invention. It is more preferably 1.0% by mass, and even more preferably 0.1 to 1.0% by mass.
One kind of surfactant may be used, or two or more kinds of surfactants may be used. When two or more types are used, it is preferable that the total content is within the above-mentioned preferred content range.
[溶剤]
 本発明の組成物は、溶剤を含むことが好ましい。
 溶剤は、(M1)プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルカルボキシレート、並びに、(M2)プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル、乳酸エステル、酢酸エステル、アルコキシプロピオン酸エステル、鎖状ケトン、環状ケトン、ラクトン、及びアルキレンカーボネートからなる群より選択される少なくとも1つの少なくとも一方を含んでいることが好ましい。なお、上記溶剤は、成分(M1)及び(M2)以外の成分を更に含んでいてもよい。
[solvent]
Preferably, the composition of the present invention contains a solvent.
The solvent consists of (M1) propylene glycol monoalkyl ether carboxylate, and (M2) propylene glycol monoalkyl ether, lactic acid ester, acetate ester, alkoxypropionic acid ester, chain ketone, cyclic ketone, lactone, and alkylene carbonate. It is preferable that at least one selected from the group is included. Note that the above solvent may further contain components other than components (M1) and (M2).
 上述した溶剤と上述した樹脂とを組み合わせると、本発明の組成物の塗布性の向上、及び、パターンの現像欠陥数の低減の観点で好ましい。上述した溶剤は、上述した樹脂の溶解性、沸点及び粘度のバランスが良いため、レジスト膜の膜厚のムラ及びスピンコート中の析出物の発生等を抑制することができる。
 成分(M1)及び成分(M2)の詳細は、国際公開第2020/004306号の段落[0218]~[0226]に記載され、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
It is preferable to combine the above-mentioned solvent and the above-mentioned resin from the viewpoint of improving the coating properties of the composition of the present invention and reducing the number of pattern development defects. Since the above-mentioned solvent has a good balance between the solubility, boiling point, and viscosity of the above-mentioned resin, it is possible to suppress unevenness in the thickness of the resist film and the generation of precipitates during spin coating.
Details of component (M1) and component (M2) are described in paragraphs [0218] to [0226] of International Publication No. 2020/004306, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 溶剤が成分(M1)及び(M2)以外の成分を更に含む場合、成分(M1)及び(M2)以外の成分の含有量は、溶剤の全量に対して、5~30質量%が好ましい。 When the solvent further contains components other than components (M1) and (M2), the content of components other than components (M1) and (M2) is preferably 5 to 30% by mass based on the total amount of the solvent.
 本発明の組成物中の溶剤の含有量は、固形分濃度が0.5~30質量%となるように定めるのが好ましく、1~20質量%となるように定めることがより好ましい。こうすると、本発明の組成物の塗布性を更に向上させられる。 The content of the solvent in the composition of the present invention is preferably determined so that the solid content concentration is 0.5 to 30% by mass, more preferably 1 to 20% by mass. In this way, the applicability of the composition of the present invention can be further improved.
[その他の添加剤]
 本発明の組成物は、溶解阻止化合物、染料、可塑剤、光増感剤、光吸収剤、及び/又は、現像液に対する溶解性を促進させる化合物(例えば、分子量1000以下のフェノール化合物、又は、カルボキシル基を含んだ脂環族若しくは脂肪族化合物)を更に含んでいてもよい。
[Other additives]
The composition of the present invention includes a dissolution inhibiting compound, a dye, a plasticizer, a photosensitizer, a light absorber, and/or a compound that promotes solubility in a developer (for example, a phenol compound having a molecular weight of 1000 or less, or It may further contain an alicyclic or aliphatic compound containing a carboxyl group.
 上記「溶解阻止化合物」とは、酸の作用により分解して有機系現像液中での溶解度が減少する、分子量3000以下の化合物である。 The above-mentioned "dissolution-inhibiting compound" is a compound with a molecular weight of 3000 or less that decomposes under the action of an acid and reduces its solubility in an organic developer.
 本発明の組成物は、EUV露光用感光性組成物として好適に用いられる。
 EUV光は波長13.5nmであり、ArF(波長193nm)光等に比べて、より短波長であるため、同じ感度で露光された際の入射フォトン数が少ない。そのため、確率的にフォトンの数がばらつく“フォトンショットノイズ”の影響が大きく、ラインエッジラフネス(LER)の悪化及びブリッジ欠陥を招く。フォトンショットノイズを減らすには、露光量を大きくして入射フォトン数を増やす方法があるが、高感度化の要求とトレードオフとなる。
The composition of the present invention is suitably used as a photosensitive composition for EUV exposure.
EUV light has a wavelength of 13.5 nm, which is shorter than ArF (wavelength 193 nm) light, etc., so the number of incident photons when exposed with the same sensitivity is smaller. Therefore, the influence of "photon shot noise" in which the number of photons varies stochastically is large, leading to deterioration of line edge roughness (LER) and bridging defects. One way to reduce photon shot noise is to increase the number of incident photons by increasing the exposure amount, but this comes at a trade-off with the demand for higher sensitivity.
 下記式(1)で求められるA値が高い場合は、レジスト組成物より形成されるレジスト膜のEUV光及び電子線の吸収効率が高くなるなり、フォトンショットノイズの低減に有効である。A値は、レジスト膜の質量割合のEUV光及び電子線の吸収効率を表す。
 式(1):A=([H]×0.04+[C]×1.0+[N]×2.1+[O]×3.6+[F]×5.6+[S]×1.5+[I]×39.5)/([H]×1+[C]×12+[N]×14+[O]×16+[F]×19+[S]×32+[I]×127)
 A値は0.120以上が好ましい。上限は特に制限されないが、A値が大きすぎる場合、レジスト膜のEUV光及び電子線透過率が低下し、レジスト膜中の光学像プロファイルが劣化し、結果として良好なパターン形状が得られにくくなるため、0.240以下が好ましく、0.220以下がより好ましい。
When the A value determined by the following formula (1) is high, the absorption efficiency of EUV light and electron beams of the resist film formed from the resist composition becomes high, which is effective in reducing photon shot noise. The A value represents the EUV light and electron beam absorption efficiency of the mass percentage of the resist film.
Formula (1): A = ([H] x 0.04 + [C] x 1.0 + [N] x 2.1 + [O] x 3.6 + [F] x 5.6 + [S] x 1.5 + [I] x 39.5) / ([H] x 1 + [C] x 12 + [N] x 14 + [O] x 16 + [F] x 19 + [S] x 32 + [I] x 127)
The A value is preferably 0.120 or more. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but if the A value is too large, the EUV light and electron beam transmittance of the resist film will decrease, the optical image profile in the resist film will deteriorate, and as a result, it will be difficult to obtain a good pattern shape. Therefore, it is preferably 0.240 or less, more preferably 0.220 or less.
 なお、式(1)中、[H]は、感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物中の全固形分の全原子に対する、全固形分由来の水素原子のモル比率を表し、[C]は、感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物中の全固形分の全原子に対する、全固形分由来の炭素原子のモル比率を表し、[N]は、感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物中の全固形分の全原子に対する、全固形分由来の窒素原子のモル比率を表し、[O]は、感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物中の全固形分の全原子に対する、全固形分由来の酸素原子のモル比率を表し、[F]は、感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物中の全固形分の全原子に対する、全固形分由来のフッ素原子のモル比率を表し、[S]は、感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物中の全固形分の全原子に対する、全固形分由来の硫黄原子のモル比率を表し、[I]は、感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物中の全固形分の全原子に対する、全固形分由来のヨウ素原子のモル比率を表す。
 例えば、レジスト組成物が酸分解性樹脂、光酸発生剤、酸拡散制御剤、及び溶剤を含む場合、上記酸分解性樹脂、上記光酸発生剤、及び上記酸拡散制御剤が固形分に該当する。つまり、全固形分の全原子とは、上記樹脂由来の全原子、上記光酸発生剤由来の全原子、及び、上記酸拡散制御剤由来の全原子の合計に該当する。
 例えば、[H]は、全固形分の全原子に対する、全固形分由来の水素原子のモル比率を表し、上記例に基づいて説明すると、[H]は、上記酸分解性樹脂由来の全原子、上記光酸発生剤由来の全原子、及び、上記酸拡散制御剤由来の全原子の合計に対する、上記酸分解性樹脂由来の水素原子、上記光酸発生剤由来の水素原子、及び、上記酸拡散制御剤由来の水素原子の合計のモル比率を表すことになる。
In addition, in formula (1), [H] represents the molar ratio of hydrogen atoms derived from the total solid content to all atoms of the total solid content in the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, and [C] represents the molar ratio of carbon atoms derived from the total solid content to all atoms of the total solid content in the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, and [N] is the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition. Represents the molar ratio of nitrogen atoms derived from all solids to all atoms of all solids in the composition, and [O] is the molar ratio of nitrogen atoms derived from all solids to all atoms of all solids in the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition. , represents the molar ratio of oxygen atoms derived from the total solid content, and [F] is the molar ratio of fluorine atoms derived from the total solid content to all atoms of the total solid content in the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition. , [S] represents the molar ratio of sulfur atoms derived from the total solid content to all atoms of the total solid content in the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, and [I] represents the active ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition. It represents the molar ratio of iodine atoms derived from the total solid content to all atoms of the total solid content in a radiation-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition.
For example, when the resist composition includes an acid-decomposable resin, a photoacid generator, an acid diffusion control agent, and a solvent, the acid-decomposable resin, the photoacid generator, and the acid diffusion control agent correspond to the solid content. do. That is, all atoms in the total solid content correspond to the sum of all atoms derived from the resin, all atoms derived from the photoacid generator, and all atoms derived from the acid diffusion control agent.
For example, [H] represents the molar ratio of hydrogen atoms derived from the total solid content to all atoms derived from the total solid content, and to explain based on the above example, [H] represents all atoms derived from the acid-decomposable resin. , hydrogen atoms derived from the acid-decomposable resin, hydrogen atoms derived from the photoacid generator, and the acid with respect to the total of all atoms derived from the photoacid generator and all atoms derived from the acid diffusion control agent. It represents the total molar ratio of hydrogen atoms derived from the diffusion control agent.
 A値の算出は、レジスト組成物中の全固形分の構成成分の構造、及び、含有量が既知の場合には、含有される原子数比を計算し、算出できる。また、構成成分が未知の場合であっても、レジスト組成物の溶剤成分を蒸発させて得られたレジスト膜に対して、元素分析等の解析的な手法によって構成原子数比を算出可能である。 If the structure and content of the total solid components in the resist composition are known, the A value can be calculated by calculating the ratio of the number of atoms contained. Furthermore, even if the constituent components are unknown, it is possible to calculate the constituent atomic ratio using analytical methods such as elemental analysis for a resist film obtained by evaporating the solvent components of the resist composition. .
<感活性光線性又は感放射線性膜、パターン形成方法>
 本発明は、本発明の組成物により形成された感活性光線性又は感放射線性膜にも関する。本発明の感活性光線性又は感放射線性膜はレジスト膜であることが好ましい。
 本発明の組成物を用いたパターン形成方法の手順は特に制限されないが、以下の工程を有することが好ましい。
 工程1:本発明の組成物を用いて、基板上にレジスト膜を形成する工程
 工程2:レジスト膜を露光する工程
 工程3:露光されたレジスト膜を現像液を用いて現像する工程
 以下、上記それぞれの工程の手順について詳述する。
<Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, pattern forming method>
The invention also relates to actinic- or radiation-sensitive films formed with the compositions of the invention. The actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film of the present invention is preferably a resist film.
Although the procedure of the pattern forming method using the composition of the present invention is not particularly limited, it is preferable to include the following steps.
Step 1: Step of forming a resist film on a substrate using the composition of the present invention Step 2: Step of exposing the resist film Step 3: Step of developing the exposed resist film using a developer Hereinafter, the above-mentioned The procedure for each process will be explained in detail.
(工程1:レジスト膜形成工程)
 工程1は、本発明の組成物を用いて、基板上にレジスト膜を形成する工程である。
(Step 1: Resist film formation step)
Step 1 is a step of forming a resist film on a substrate using the composition of the present invention.
 本発明の組成物を用いて基板上にレジスト膜を形成する方法としては、例えば、本発明の組成物を基板上に塗布する方法が挙げられる。
 なお、塗布前に本発明の組成物を必要に応じてフィルター濾過することが好ましい。フィルターのポアサイズは、0.1μm以下が好ましく、0.05μm以下がより好ましく、0.03μm以下が更に好ましい。フィルターは、ポリテトラフルオロエチレン製、ポリエチレン製、又は、ナイロン製が好ましい。
Examples of the method for forming a resist film on a substrate using the composition of the present invention include a method of applying the composition of the present invention onto a substrate.
In addition, it is preferable to filter the composition of the present invention through a filter before application, if necessary. The pore size of the filter is preferably 0.1 μm or less, more preferably 0.05 μm or less, and even more preferably 0.03 μm or less. The filter is preferably made of polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene, or nylon.
 本発明の組成物は、集積回路素子の製造に使用されるような基板(例:シリコン、二酸化シリコン被覆)上に、スピナー又はコーター等の適当な塗布方法により塗布できる。塗布方法は、スピナーを用いたスピン塗布が好ましい。スピナーを用いたスピン塗布をする際の回転数は、1000~3000rpm(rotations per minute)が好ましい。
 本発明の組成物の塗布後、基板を乾燥し、レジスト膜を形成してもよい。なお、必要により、レジスト膜の下層に、各種下地膜(無機膜、有機膜、反射防止膜)を形成してもよい。
The compositions of the present invention can be applied by any suitable application method, such as a spinner or coater, onto substrates (eg, silicon, silicon dioxide coated) such as those used in the manufacture of integrated circuit devices. The coating method is preferably spin coating using a spinner. The rotation speed during spin coating using a spinner is preferably 1000 to 3000 rpm (rotations per minute).
After applying the composition of the present invention, the substrate may be dried to form a resist film. Note that, if necessary, various base films (inorganic film, organic film, antireflection film) may be formed under the resist film.
 乾燥方法としては、例えば、加熱して乾燥する方法が挙げられる。加熱は通常の露光機、及び/又は、現像機に備わっている手段で実施でき、ホットプレート等を用いて実施してもよい。加熱温度は80~150℃が好ましく、80~140℃がより好ましく、80~130℃が更に好ましい。加熱時間は30~1000秒が好ましく、60~800秒がより好ましく、60~600秒が更に好ましい。 Examples of the drying method include a method of drying by heating. Heating can be carried out using a means provided in an ordinary exposure machine and/or developing machine, or may be carried out using a hot plate or the like. The heating temperature is preferably 80 to 150°C, more preferably 80 to 140°C, even more preferably 80 to 130°C. The heating time is preferably 30 to 1000 seconds, more preferably 60 to 800 seconds, even more preferably 60 to 600 seconds.
 レジスト膜の膜厚は特に制限されないが、より高精度な微細パターンを形成できる点から、10~120nmが好ましい。なかでも、EUV露光とする場合、レジスト膜の膜厚としては、10~65nmがより好ましく、15~50nmが更に好ましい。ArF液浸露光とする場合、レジスト膜の膜厚としては、10~120nmがより好ましく、15~90nmが更に好ましい。 The thickness of the resist film is not particularly limited, but is preferably 10 to 120 nm from the standpoint of forming fine patterns with higher precision. Among these, in the case of EUV exposure, the thickness of the resist film is more preferably 10 to 65 nm, and even more preferably 15 to 50 nm. In the case of ArF immersion exposure, the thickness of the resist film is more preferably 10 to 120 nm, and even more preferably 15 to 90 nm.
 なお、レジスト膜の上層にトップコート組成物を用いてトップコートを形成してもよい。
 トップコート組成物は、レジスト膜と混合せず、更にレジスト膜上層に均一に塗布できることが好ましい。トップコートは、特に限定されず、従来公知のトップコートを、従来公知の方法によって形成でき、例えば、特開2014-059543号公報の段落[0072]~[0082]の記載に基づいてトップコートを形成できる。
 例えば、特開2013-61648号公報に記載されたような塩基性化合物を含むトップコートを、レジスト膜上に形成することが好ましい。トップコートが含み得る塩基性化合物の具体的な例は、本発明の組成物が含んでいてもよい塩基性化合物が挙げられる。
 トップコートは、エーテル結合、チオエーテル結合、水酸基、チオール基、カルボニル結合、及びエステル結合からなる群より選択される基又は結合を少なくとも1つ含む化合物を含むことも好ましい。
Note that a top coat may be formed on the upper layer of the resist film using a top coat composition.
It is preferable that the top coat composition is not mixed with the resist film and can be uniformly applied to the upper layer of the resist film. The top coat is not particularly limited, and a conventionally known top coat can be formed by a conventionally known method. Can be formed.
For example, it is preferable to form a top coat containing a basic compound as described in JP-A-2013-61648 on the resist film. Specific examples of basic compounds that may be included in the top coat include basic compounds that may be included in the composition of the present invention.
It is also preferable that the top coat contains a compound containing at least one group or bond selected from the group consisting of an ether bond, a thioether bond, a hydroxyl group, a thiol group, a carbonyl bond, and an ester bond.
(工程2:露光工程)
 工程2は、レジスト膜を露光する工程である。
 露光の方法としては、形成したレジスト膜に所定のマスクを通して活性光線又は放射線を照射する方法が挙げられる。
 活性光線又は放射線としては、赤外光、可視光、紫外光、遠紫外光、極紫外光、X線、及び電子線が挙げられ、250nm以下が好ましく、220nm以下がより好ましく、1~200nmの波長の遠紫外光、具体的には、KrFエキシマレーザー(248nm)、ArFエキシマレーザー(193nm)、Fエキシマレーザー(157nm)、EUV(13.5nm)、X線、及び電子ビームが特に好ましい。
(Step 2: Exposure step)
Step 2 is a step of exposing the resist film.
Examples of the exposure method include a method of irradiating the formed resist film with actinic rays or radiation through a predetermined mask.
Examples of active light or radiation include infrared light, visible light, ultraviolet light, far ultraviolet light, extreme ultraviolet light, X-rays, and electron beams, preferably 250 nm or less, more preferably 220 nm or less, and 1 to 200 nm. Particularly preferred are deep ultraviolet light of wavelengths, specifically KrF excimer laser (248 nm), ArF excimer laser (193 nm), F 2 excimer laser (157 nm), EUV (13.5 nm), X-rays, and electron beams.
 露光後、現像を行う前にベーク(加熱)を行うことが好ましい。ベークにより露光部の反応が促進され、感度及びパターン形状がより良好となる。
 加熱温度は80~150℃が好ましく、80~140℃がより好ましく、80~130℃が更に好ましい。
 加熱時間は10~1000秒が好ましく、10~180秒がより好ましく、30~120秒が更に好ましい。
 加熱は通常の露光機及び/又は現像機に備わっている手段で実施でき、ホットプレート等を用いて行ってもよい。
 この工程は露光後ベークともいう。
It is preferable to perform baking (heating) after exposure and before development. Baking accelerates the reaction in the exposed area, resulting in better sensitivity and pattern shape.
The heating temperature is preferably 80 to 150°C, more preferably 80 to 140°C, even more preferably 80 to 130°C.
The heating time is preferably 10 to 1000 seconds, more preferably 10 to 180 seconds, and even more preferably 30 to 120 seconds.
Heating can be carried out using means provided in a normal exposure machine and/or developing machine, and may be carried out using a hot plate or the like.
This step is also called post-exposure bake.
(工程3:現像工程)
 工程3は、現像液を用いて、露光されたレジスト膜を現像し、パターンを形成する工程である。
 現像液は、アルカリ現像液であっても、有機溶剤を含有する現像液(以下、有機系現像液ともいう)であってもよい。
(Process 3: Development process)
Step 3 is a step of developing the exposed resist film using a developer to form a pattern.
The developer may be an alkaline developer or a developer containing an organic solvent (hereinafter also referred to as an organic developer).
 現像方法としては、例えば、現像液が満たされた槽中に基板を一定時間浸漬する方法(ディップ法)、基板表面に現像液を表面張力によって盛り上げて一定時間静置して現像する方法(パドル法)、基板表面に現像液を噴霧する方法(スプレー法)、及び一定速度で回転している基板上に一定速度で現像液吐出ノズルをスキャンしながら現像液を吐出しつづける方法(ダイナミックディスペンス法)が挙げられる。
 また、現像を行う工程の後に、他の溶剤に置換しながら、現像を停止する工程を実施してもよい。
 現像時間は未露光部の樹脂が十分に溶解する時間であれば特に制限はなく、10~300秒が好ましく、20~120秒がより好ましい。
 現像液の温度は0~50℃が好ましく、15~35℃がより好ましい。
Development methods include, for example, a method in which the substrate is immersed in a tank filled with a developer for a certain period of time (dip method), a method in which the developer is raised on the surface of the substrate by surface tension and left to stand for a certain period of time (paddle method). method), a method in which the developer is sprayed onto the surface of the substrate (spray method), and a method in which the developer is continuously discharged while scanning a developer discharge nozzle at a constant speed onto a rotating substrate (dynamic dispensing method). ).
Furthermore, after the step of developing, a step of stopping the development may be carried out while substituting another solvent.
The development time is not particularly limited as long as the resin in the unexposed areas is sufficiently dissolved, and is preferably 10 to 300 seconds, more preferably 20 to 120 seconds.
The temperature of the developer is preferably 0 to 50°C, more preferably 15 to 35°C.
 アルカリ現像液は、アルカリを含むアルカリ水溶液を用いることが好ましい。アルカリ水溶液の種類は特に制限されないが、例えば、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシドに代表される4級アンモニウム塩、無機アルカリ、1級アミン、2級アミン、3級アミン、アルコールアミン、又は、環状アミン等を含むアルカリ水溶液が挙げられる。中でも、アルカリ現像液は、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド(TMAH)に代表される4級アンモニウム塩の水溶液であることが好ましい。アルカリ現像液には、アルコール類、界面活性剤等を適当量添加してもよい。アルカリ現像液のアルカリ濃度は、通常、0.1~20質量%であることが好ましい。アルカリ現像液のpHは、通常、10.0~15.0であることが好ましい。 As the alkaline developer, it is preferable to use an alkaline aqueous solution containing an alkali. The type of alkaline aqueous solution is not particularly limited, but examples include quaternary ammonium salts represented by tetramethylammonium hydroxide, inorganic alkalis, primary amines, secondary amines, tertiary amines, alcohol amines, or cyclic amines. Examples include alkaline aqueous solutions containing. Among these, the alkaline developer is preferably an aqueous solution of a quaternary ammonium salt typified by tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH). Appropriate amounts of alcohols, surfactants, etc. may be added to the alkaline developer. The alkaline concentration of the alkaline developer is usually preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass. The pH of the alkaline developer is usually preferably 10.0 to 15.0.
 有機系現像液は、ケトン系溶剤、エステル系溶剤、アルコール系溶剤、アミド系溶剤、エーテル系溶剤、及び炭化水素系溶剤からなる群より選択される少なくとも1種の有機溶剤を含有する現像液であることが好ましい。 The organic developer is a developer containing at least one organic solvent selected from the group consisting of ketone solvents, ester solvents, alcohol solvents, amide solvents, ether solvents, and hydrocarbon solvents. It is preferable that there be.
 上記の溶剤は、複数混合してもよいし、上記以外の溶剤又は水と混合してもよい。現像液全体としての含水率は、50質量%未満が好ましく、20質量%未満がより好ましく、10質量%未満が更に好ましく、実質的に水分を含有しないのが特に好ましい。
 有機系現像液に対する有機溶剤の含有量は、現像液の全量に対して、50質量%以上100質量%以下が好ましく、80質量%以上100質量%以下がより好ましく、90質量%以上100質量%以下が更に好ましく、95質量%以上100質量%以下が特に好ましい。
A plurality of the above-mentioned solvents may be mixed together, or may be mixed with a solvent other than the above-mentioned ones or water. The water content of the developer as a whole is preferably less than 50% by mass, more preferably less than 20% by mass, even more preferably less than 10% by mass, and particularly preferably substantially free of water.
The content of the organic solvent in the organic developer is preferably 50% by mass or more and 100% by mass or less, more preferably 80% by mass or more and 100% by mass or less, and 90% by mass or more and 100% by mass, based on the total amount of the developer. The following is more preferable, and 95% by mass or more and 100% by mass or less is particularly preferable.
(他の工程)
 上記パターン形成方法は、工程3の後に、リンス液を用いて洗浄する工程を含むことが好ましい。
(Other processes)
It is preferable that the pattern forming method includes a step of cleaning using a rinsing liquid after step 3.
 アルカリ現像液を用いて現像する工程の後のリンス工程に用いるリンス液としては、例えば、純水が挙げられる。なお、純水には、界面活性剤を適当量添加してもよい。
 リンス液には、界面活性剤を適当量添加してもよい。
Examples of the rinsing solution used in the rinsing step after the step of developing using an alkaline developer include pure water. Note that an appropriate amount of a surfactant may be added to the pure water.
An appropriate amount of surfactant may be added to the rinse solution.
 有機系現像液を用いた現像工程の後のリンス工程に用いるリンス液は、パターンを溶解しないものであれば特に制限はなく、一般的な有機溶剤を含む溶液を使用できる。リンス液は、炭化水素系溶剤、ケトン系溶剤、エステル系溶剤、アルコール系溶剤、アミド系溶剤、及びエーテル系溶剤からなる群より選択される少なくとも1種の有機溶剤を含有するリンス液を用いることが好ましい。 The rinsing solution used in the rinsing step after the development step using an organic developer is not particularly limited as long as it does not dissolve the pattern, and solutions containing common organic solvents can be used. The rinsing liquid should contain at least one organic solvent selected from the group consisting of hydrocarbon solvents, ketone solvents, ester solvents, alcohol solvents, amide solvents, and ether solvents. is preferred.
 リンス工程の方法は特に限定されず、例えば、一定速度で回転している基板上にリンス液を吐出しつづける方法(回転塗布法)、リンス液が満たされた槽中に基板を一定時間浸漬する方法(ディップ法)、及び基板表面にリンス液を噴霧する方法(スプレー法)が挙げられる。
 また、パターン形成方法は、リンス工程の後に加熱工程(Post Bake)を含んでいてもよい。本工程により、ベークによりパターン間及びパターン内部に残留した現像液及びリンス液が除去される。また、本工程により、レジストパターンがなまされ、パターンの表面荒れが改善される効果もある。リンス工程の後の加熱工程は、通常40~250℃(好ましくは90~200℃)で、通常10秒間~3分間(好ましくは30秒間~120秒間)行う。
The method of the rinsing process is not particularly limited, and examples include a method in which the rinsing liquid is continuously discharged onto the substrate rotating at a constant speed (rotary coating method), and a method in which the substrate is immersed in a tank filled with the rinsing liquid for a certain period of time. (dip method) and a method of spraying a rinsing liquid onto the substrate surface (spray method).
Further, the pattern forming method may include a heating step (Post Bake) after the rinsing step. In this step, the developer and rinse solution remaining between patterns and inside the patterns due to baking are removed. This step also has the effect of smoothing the resist pattern and improving surface roughness of the pattern. The heating step after the rinsing step is usually carried out at 40 to 250°C (preferably 90 to 200°C) for 10 seconds to 3 minutes (preferably 30 seconds to 120 seconds).
 また、形成されたパターンをマスクとして、基板のエッチング処理を実施してもよい。つまり、工程3にて形成されたパターンをマスクとして、基板(又は、下層膜及び基板)を加工して、基板にパターンを形成してもよい。
 基板(又は、下層膜及び基板)の加工方法は特に限定されないが、工程3で形成されたパターンをマスクとして、基板(又は、下層膜及び基板)に対してドライエッチングを行うことにより、基板にパターンを形成する方法が好ましい。ドライエッチングは、酸素プラズマエッチングが好ましい。
Further, the substrate may be etched using the formed pattern as a mask. That is, the pattern formed in step 3 may be used as a mask to process the substrate (or the lower film and the substrate) to form a pattern on the substrate.
The method of processing the substrate (or the lower layer film and the substrate) is not particularly limited, but by performing dry etching on the substrate (or the lower layer film and the substrate) using the pattern formed in step 3 as a mask, the substrate is processed. A method of forming a pattern is preferred. The dry etching is preferably oxygen plasma etching.
 本発明の組成物、及びパターン形成方法において使用される各種材料(例えば、溶剤、現像液、リンス液、反射防止膜形成用組成物、トップコート形成用組成物等)は、金属等の不純物を含まないことが好ましい。これら材料に含まれる不純物の含有量は、1質量ppm(parts per million)以下が好ましく、10質量ppb(parts per billion)以下がより好ましく、100質量ppt(parts per trillion)以下が更に好ましく、10質量ppt以下が特に好ましく、1質量ppt以下が最も好ましい。下限は特に制限させず、0質量ppt以上が好ましい。ここで、金属不純物としては、例えば、Na、K、Ca、Fe、Cu、Mg、Al、Li、Cr、Ni、Sn、Ag、As、Au、Ba、Cd、Co、Pb、Ti、V、W、及びZnが挙げられる。 The composition of the present invention and various materials used in the pattern forming method (e.g., solvent, developer, rinsing liquid, composition for forming an antireflective film, composition for forming a top coat, etc.) do not contain impurities such as metals. It is preferable not to include it. The content of impurities contained in these materials is preferably 1 mass ppm (parts per million) or less, more preferably 10 mass ppb (parts per billion) or less, even more preferably 100 mass ppt (parts per trillion) or less, and 10 mass ppm (parts per million) or less. A mass ppt or less is particularly preferred, and a mass ppt or less is most preferred. The lower limit is not particularly limited, and is preferably 0 mass ppt or more. Here, examples of metal impurities include Na, K, Ca, Fe, Cu, Mg, Al, Li, Cr, Ni, Sn, Ag, As, Au, Ba, Cd, Co, Pb, Ti, V, Examples include W and Zn.
 各種材料から金属等の不純物を除去する方法としては、例えば、フィルターを用いた濾過が挙げられる。フィルターを用いた濾過の詳細は、国際公開第2020/004306号の段落[0321]に記載される。 Examples of methods for removing impurities such as metals from various materials include filtration using a filter. Details of filtration using a filter are described in paragraph [0321] of International Publication No. 2020/004306.
 各種材料に含まれる金属等の不純物を低減する方法としては、例えば、各種材料を構成する原料として金属含有量が少ない原料を選択する方法、各種材料を構成する原料に対してフィルター濾過を行う方法、及び装置内をテフロン(登録商標)でライニングする等してコンタミネーションを可能な限り抑制した条件下で蒸留を行う方法が挙げられる。 Methods for reducing impurities such as metals contained in various materials include, for example, methods of selecting raw materials with low metal content as raw materials constituting various materials, and methods of filtering raw materials constituting various materials. and a method in which distillation is carried out under conditions where contamination is suppressed as much as possible by lining the inside of the apparatus with Teflon (registered trademark).
 フィルター濾過の他、吸着材による不純物の除去を行ってもよく、フィルター濾過と吸着材とを組み合わせて使用してもよい。吸着材としては、公知の吸着材を使用でき、例えば、シリカゲル及びゼオライト等の無機系吸着材、並びに、活性炭等の有機系吸着材を使用できる。上記各種材料に含まれる金属等の不純物を低減するためには、製造工程における金属不純物の混入を防止する必要がある。製造装置から金属不純物が十分に除去されたかどうかは、製造装置の洗浄に使用された洗浄液中に含まれる金属成分の含有量を測定して確認できる。使用後の洗浄液に含まれる金属成分の含有量は、100質量ppt以下が好ましく、10質量ppt以下がより好ましく、1質量ppt以下が更に好ましい。下限は特に制限させず、0質量ppt以上が好ましい。 In addition to filter filtration, impurities may be removed using an adsorbent, or a combination of filter filtration and an adsorbent may be used. As the adsorbent, known adsorbents can be used, such as inorganic adsorbents such as silica gel and zeolite, and organic adsorbents such as activated carbon. In order to reduce impurities such as metals contained in the various materials mentioned above, it is necessary to prevent metal impurities from being mixed in during the manufacturing process. Whether metal impurities have been sufficiently removed from the manufacturing equipment can be confirmed by measuring the content of metal components contained in the cleaning liquid used to clean the manufacturing equipment. The content of metal components contained in the cleaning liquid after use is preferably 100 mass ppt or less, more preferably 10 mass ppt or less, and even more preferably 1 mass ppt or less. The lower limit is not particularly limited, and is preferably 0 mass ppt or more.
 リンス液等の有機系処理液には、静電気の帯電、引き続き生じる静電気放電に伴う、薬液配管及び各種パーツ(フィルター、O-リング、及び、チューブ等)の故障を防止するため、導電性の化合物を添加してもよい。導電性の化合物は特に制限されないが、例えば、メタノールが挙げられる。添加量は特に制限されないが、好ましい現像特性又はリンス特性を維持する点で、10質量%以下が好ましく、5質量%以下がより好ましい。下限は特に制限させず、0.01質量%以上が好ましい。
 薬液配管としては、例えば、SUS(ステンレス鋼)、又は、帯電防止処理の施されたポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン、若しくは、フッ素樹脂(ポリテトラフルオロエチレン、又は、パーフルオロアルコキシ樹脂等)で被膜された各種配管を使用できる。フィルター及びO-リングに関しても同様に、帯電防止処理の施されたポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン、又は、フッ素樹脂(ポリテトラフルオロエチレン、又は、パーフルオロアルコキシ樹脂等)を使用できる。
Organic processing liquids such as rinsing liquids contain conductive compounds to prevent damage to chemical piping and various parts (filters, O-rings, tubes, etc.) due to static electricity charging and subsequent electrostatic discharge. may be added. The conductive compound is not particularly limited, and for example, methanol may be mentioned. The amount added is not particularly limited, but is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 5% by mass or less in terms of maintaining favorable development characteristics or rinsing characteristics. The lower limit is not particularly limited, and is preferably 0.01% by mass or more.
Examples of chemical liquid piping include SUS (stainless steel), polyethylene or polypropylene treated with antistatic treatment, or various types of piping coated with fluororesin (polytetrafluoroethylene, perfluoroalkoxy resin, etc.). can be used. Similarly, for the filter and O-ring, antistatically treated polyethylene, polypropylene, or fluororesin (polytetrafluoroethylene, perfluoroalkoxy resin, etc.) can be used.
<電子デバイスの製造方法>
 本明細書は、上記したパターン形成方法を含む、電子デバイスの製造方法、及びこの製造方法により製造された電子デバイスにも関する。
 本明細書の電子デバイスの好適態様としては、電気電子機器(家電、OA(Office Automation)、メディア関連機器、光学用機器及び通信機器等)に搭載される態様が挙げられる。
<Method for manufacturing electronic devices>
The present specification also relates to an electronic device manufacturing method including the above-described pattern forming method, and an electronic device manufactured by this manufacturing method.
Preferred embodiments of the electronic device of this specification include embodiments in which it is installed in electrical and electronic equipment (home appliances, office automation (OA), media-related equipment, optical equipment, communication equipment, etc.).
 以下に実施例に基づいて本発明を更に詳細に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、及び、処理手順は、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない限り適宜変更することができる。従って、本発明の範囲は以下に示す実施例により限定的に解釈されるべきものではない。 The present invention will be described in more detail below based on Examples. The materials, usage amounts, proportions, processing details, and processing procedures shown in the following examples can be changed as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the present invention should not be construed as being limited by the Examples shown below.
 実施例及び比較例のレジスト組成物に用いた各種成分について以下に示す。 Various components used in the resist compositions of Examples and Comparative Examples are shown below.
<樹脂(A)>
 樹脂(A)として、A-1~A-15を用いた。また、樹脂(A)ではない樹脂として、AX-1~AX-4を用いた。便宜的に、下記表1ではAX-1~AX-4も樹脂(A)の欄に記載する。
 A-1~A-15、AX-1~AX-4の構造を以下に示す。下記繰り返し単位の含有比率(樹脂中の全繰り返し単位に対する含有量)はモル比率である。
 樹脂の重量平均分子量(Mw)及び分散度(Pd=Mw/Mn)はGPC(キャリア:テトラヒドロフラン(THF))により測定した(ポリスチレン換算量である)。また、繰り返し単位の含有量は、13C-NMR(nuclear magnetic resonance)により測定した。
 A-1~A-15、AX-1~AX-4は酸分解性樹脂である。
<Resin (A)>
As the resin (A), A-1 to A-15 were used. Furthermore, AX-1 to AX-4 were used as resins other than resin (A). For convenience, AX-1 to AX-4 are also listed in the resin (A) column in Table 1 below.
The structures of A-1 to A-15 and AX-1 to AX-4 are shown below. The content ratio of the following repeating units (content relative to all repeating units in the resin) is a molar ratio.
The weight average molecular weight (Mw) and degree of dispersion (Pd=Mw/Mn) of the resin were measured by GPC (carrier: tetrahydrofuran (THF)) (the amount is equivalent to polystyrene). Further, the content of repeating units was measured by 13 C-NMR (nuclear magnetic resonance).
A-1 to A-15 and AX-1 to AX-4 are acid-decomposable resins.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000053
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000054
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000054
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000055
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000055
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000056
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000056
 A-1の合成例を以下に示す。その他の樹脂(A)も同様に合成した。 A synthesis example of A-1 is shown below. Other resins (A) were also synthesized in the same manner.
(A-1の合成) (Synthesis of A-1)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000057
(A-1の合成)
 シクロヘキサノン(59g)を窒素気流下にて85℃に加熱した。この液に攪拌しながら、AS-1(63.3g)、4-ビニルフェノール(27.0g)、シクロヘキサノン(109.3g)、及び、2,2’-アゾビスイソ酪酸ジメチル〔V-601、富士フイルム和光純薬社製〕(7.14g)の混合溶液を3時間かけて滴下し、反応液を得た。滴下終了後、反応液を85℃にて更に3時間攪拌した。得られた反応液を放冷後、4200gの酢酸エチル/ヘプタン(質量比1:9)で再沈殿した後、ろ過し、得られた固体を真空乾燥することで、A-1(75.9g)を得た。
(Synthesis of A-1)
Cyclohexanone (59 g) was heated to 85° C. under a nitrogen stream. While stirring, add AS-1 (63.3 g), 4-vinylphenol (27.0 g), cyclohexanone (109.3 g), and dimethyl 2,2'-azobisisobutyrate [V-601, Fujifilm [manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.] (7.14 g) was added dropwise over 3 hours to obtain a reaction solution. After the dropwise addition was completed, the reaction solution was further stirred at 85° C. for 3 hours. After cooling the obtained reaction solution, reprecipitation was performed with 4200 g of ethyl acetate/heptane (mass ratio 1:9), followed by filtration, and the obtained solid was vacuum-dried to obtain A-1 (75.9 g). ) was obtained.
<塩(B)>
 塩(B)として、B-1~B-10を用いた。B-1~B-10の構造を以下に示す。
<Salt (B)>
B-1 to B-10 were used as salts (B). The structures of B-1 to B-10 are shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000058
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000058
 下記B-1H~B-10Hは、B-1~B-10から発生する酸(B-1~B-10のアニオンの共役酸)である。B-1H~B-10Hの構造とpKaを以下に示す。 The following B-1H to B-10H are acids generated from B-1 to B-10 (conjugate acids of the anions of B-1 to B-10). The structures and pKa of B-1H to B-10H are shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000059
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000059
<塩(C)>
 塩(C)として、C-1~C-6を用いた。C-1~C-6の構造を以下に示す。
<Salt (C)>
As the salt (C), C-1 to C-6 were used. The structures of C-1 to C-6 are shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000060
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000060
 下記C-1H~C-6Hは、C-1~C-6から発生する酸である。C-1H~C-6Hの構造とpKaを以下に示す。 C-1H to C-6H below are acids generated from C-1 to C-6. The structures and pKa of C-1H to C-6H are shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000061
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000061
<酸拡散制御剤>
 酸拡散制御剤として、D-1~D-4を用いた。
<Acid diffusion control agent>
D-1 to D-4 were used as acid diffusion control agents.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000062
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000062
<疎水性樹脂>
 疎水性樹脂として、P-1を用いた。
<Hydrophobic resin>
P-1 was used as the hydrophobic resin.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000063
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000063
<界面活性剤>
 使用した界面活性剤を以下に示す。
 W-1: メガファックF176(大日本インキ化学工業(株)製;フッ素系)
 W-2: メガファックR08(大日本インキ化学工業(株)製;フッ素及びシリコン系)
 W-3: ポリシロキサンポリマーKP-341(信越化学工業(株)製;シリコン系)
 W-4: トロイゾルS-366(トロイケミカル(株)製)
 W-5: KH-20(AGC(株)製)
 W-6: PolyFox PF-6320(OMNOVA Solutions Inc.製;フッ素系)
<Surfactant>
The surfactants used are shown below.
W-1: Megafac F176 (manufactured by Dainippon Ink & Chemicals Co., Ltd.; fluorine-based)
W-2: Megafac R08 (manufactured by Dainippon Ink and Chemicals Co., Ltd.; fluorine and silicone-based)
W-3: Polysiloxane polymer KP-341 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.; silicone-based)
W-4: Troysol S-366 (manufactured by Troy Chemical Co., Ltd.)
W-5: KH-20 (manufactured by AGC Co., Ltd.)
W-6: PolyFox PF-6320 (manufactured by OMNOVA Solutions Inc.; fluorine-based)
<溶剤>
 使用した溶剤を以下に示す。
 SL-1: プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)
 SL-2: プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルプロピオネート
 SL-3: 2-ヘプタノン
 SL-4: 乳酸エチル
 SL-5: プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル(PGME)
 SL-6: シクロヘキサノン
 SL-7: γ-ブチロラクトン
 SL-8: プロピレンカーボネート
<Solvent>
The solvents used are shown below.
SL-1: Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA)
SL-2: Propylene glycol monomethyl ether propionate SL-3: 2-heptanone SL-4: Ethyl lactate SL-5: Propylene glycol monomethyl ether (PGME)
SL-6: Cyclohexanone SL-7: γ-butyrolactone SL-8: Propylene carbonate
<レジスト組成物の調製>
 表1に示す成分を表1に示す質量(g)用い、表1に示す溶剤に溶解させ、固形分濃度2.5質量%の溶液を調製し、これを0.02μmのポアサイズを有するポリエチレンフィルターでろ過して、レジスト組成物Re-1~Re-19、Re-1R~Re-5Rを得た。溶剤については使用した化合物の種類とその質量比を表1に記載した。
 表1において、各成分を2種以上使用した場合は、それぞれの種類と使用量を「/」で区切って表した。例えば、レジスト組成物Re-16で「A-6/A-12」は、樹脂(A)としてA-6とA-12の2種を使用したことを表し、「5/5」はA-6とA-12をそれぞれ5gずつ使用したことを表す。
<Preparation of resist composition>
Using the components shown in Table 1 in the mass (g) shown in Table 1, they were dissolved in the solvent shown in Table 1 to prepare a solution with a solid content concentration of 2.5% by mass, and this was applied to a polyethylene filter having a pore size of 0.02 μm. filtration to obtain resist compositions Re-1 to Re-19 and Re-1R to Re-5R. Regarding the solvent, the types of compounds used and their mass ratios are listed in Table 1.
In Table 1, when two or more types of each component were used, each type and amount used are shown separated by "/". For example, in resist composition Re-16, "A-6/A-12" indicates that two types of resin (A), A-6 and A-12, were used, and "5/5" indicates that A-6 and A-12 were used as the resin (A). This indicates that 5g of each of A-6 and A-12 were used.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000064
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000064
<レジスト組成物の塗設>
 調製したレジスト組成物を、予めヘキサメチルジシラザン(HMDS)処理を施した6インチSi(シリコン)ウェハ上に東京エレクトロン製スピンコーターMark8を用いて塗布し、130℃、300秒間ホットプレート上で乾燥して、膜厚100nmのレジスト膜を得た。
 ここで、1インチは、0.0254mである。
 なお、上記Siウェハをクロム基板に変更しても、同様の結果が得られるものである。
<Coating of resist composition>
The prepared resist composition was applied onto a 6-inch Si (silicon) wafer that had been previously treated with hexamethyldisilazane (HMDS) using a spin coater Mark 8 manufactured by Tokyo Electron, and dried on a hot plate at 130° C. for 300 seconds. As a result, a resist film having a thickness of 100 nm was obtained.
Here, 1 inch is 0.0254 m.
Note that similar results can be obtained even if the Si wafer is replaced with a chromium substrate.
<パターン形成方法(1):EB露光、アルカリ現像(ポジ)>
 上記で得られたレジスト膜が塗布されたウェハを、電子線描画装置((株)アドバンテスト製;F7000S、加速電圧50keV)を用いて、パターン照射を行った。電子線描画後、100℃、60秒ホットプレート上で加熱し、2.38質量%テトラメチルアンモニウムハイドロオキサイド(TMAH)水溶液を用いて60秒間浸漬した後、30秒間、水でリンスして乾燥した。その後、4000rpmの回転数で30秒間ウェハを回転させた後、95℃で60秒間ベークを行い乾燥した。
<Pattern formation method (1): EB exposure, alkaline development (positive)>
The wafer coated with the resist film obtained above was subjected to pattern irradiation using an electron beam drawing device (manufactured by Advantest Corporation; F7000S, acceleration voltage 50 keV). After electron beam drawing, it was heated on a hot plate at 100°C for 60 seconds, immersed in a 2.38% by mass tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH) aqueous solution for 60 seconds, rinsed with water for 30 seconds, and dried. . Thereafter, the wafer was rotated at a rotation speed of 4000 rpm for 30 seconds, and then baked at 95° C. for 60 seconds to dry it.
[評価]
〔感度〕
 得られたパターンの断面形状を走査型電子顕微鏡(日立製作所社製S-9380II)を用いて観察した。線幅50nmの1:1ラインアンドスペースのレジストパターンを解像するときの露光量を感度(Eop)とした。この値が小さいほど、感度が高い。
[evaluation]
〔sensitivity〕
The cross-sectional shape of the obtained pattern was observed using a scanning electron microscope (S-9380II manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd.). The exposure amount when resolving a 1:1 line-and-space resist pattern with a line width of 50 nm was defined as the sensitivity (Eop). The smaller this value, the higher the sensitivity.
〔LWR性能〕
 上記感度(Eop)を示す露光量にて解像した線幅50nm(1:1)のラインアンドスペースのパターンに対して、測長走査型電子顕微鏡(SEM((株)日立製作所製S-9380II))を使用してパターン上部から観察した。パターンの線幅を任意のポイントで観測し、その標準偏差(σ)を求めた。線幅の測定ばらつきを3σで評価し、3σの値をLWR(nm)とした。LWRの値が小さいほどLWR性能が良好である。
[LWR performance]
A line-and-space pattern with a line width of 50 nm (1:1) resolved at the exposure amount showing the sensitivity (Eop) above was analyzed using a length-measuring scanning electron microscope (SEM (S-9380II manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd.). )) was used to observe from the top of the pattern. The line width of the pattern was observed at arbitrary points, and its standard deviation (σ) was determined. Measurement variations in line width were evaluated using 3σ, and the value of 3σ was defined as LWR (nm). The smaller the LWR value, the better the LWR performance.
〔欠陥抑制性能〕
 上記感度(Eop)で形成した線幅50nmの1:1ラインアンドスペースパターンに対して、ケー・エル・エー・テンコール社製の欠陥検査装置KLA2360を用い、欠陥検査装置のピクセルサイズを0.16μmに、また閾値を20に設定して、ランダムモードで測定し、比較イメージとピクセル単位の重ね合わせによって生じる差異から抽出される現像欠陥を検出して、単位面積(1cm)あたりの現像欠陥数を算出した。値が0.5未満のものをA、0.5以上0.7未満のものをB、0.7以上1.0未満のものをC、1.0以上のものをDとした。値が小さいほど良好な性能であることを示す。
[Defect suppression performance]
For a 1:1 line and space pattern with a line width of 50 nm formed at the above sensitivity (Eop), a defect inspection device KLA2360 manufactured by KLA-Tencor was used, and the pixel size of the defect inspection device was set to 0.16 μm. In addition, the threshold value was set to 20, and the measurement was performed in random mode, and the development defects extracted from the differences caused by overlapping the comparison image and pixel by pixel were detected, and the number of development defects per unit area (1 cm 2 ) was calculated. was calculated. Those with a value of less than 0.5 were designated as A, those with a value of 0.5 or more and less than 0.7 were designated as B, those with a value of 0.7 or more and less than 1.0 were designated as C, and those with a value of 1.0 or more were designated as D. The smaller the value, the better the performance.
〔疎密依存性〕
 図1の10μm四方の領域1に、線幅50nmの1:1ラインアンドスペースのパターンを電子線描画し、100℃、60秒ホットプレート上で加熱し、現像した後に、線幅50nmの1:1ラインアンドスペースが形成される感度をDとした。
 図2の10μm四方の領域2に、線幅50nmの1:1ラインアンドスペースのパターンを電子線描画し、更に、領域2の周囲の40μm四方の領域3の全面に電子線描画し、100℃、60秒ホットプレート上で加熱し、現像した後に、領域2に線幅50nmの1:1ラインアンドスペースが形成される感度をBとした。
 感度の比であるD/Bを疎密依存性の評価指標とした。D/Bの値が小さいほど疎密依存性が少なく、良好な性能であることを示す。
[Dense dependence]
A 1:1 line-and-space pattern with a line width of 50 nm is drawn with an electron beam on a 10 μm square area 1 in FIG. 1, heated on a hot plate at 100° C. for 60 seconds, and developed. The sensitivity at which one line and space was formed was designated as D.
A 1:1 line-and-space pattern with a line width of 50 nm is drawn with an electron beam on a 10 μm square region 2 in FIG. The sensitivity at which a 1:1 line and space with a line width of 50 nm is formed in region 2 after heating on a hot plate for 60 seconds and developing is defined as B.
The sensitivity ratio D/B was used as an evaluation index of density dependence. The smaller the value of D/B, the less the density dependence, and the better the performance.
 下記表2に、各実施例及び比較例で使用したレジスト組成物と、各実施例及び比較例の結果を示す。 Table 2 below shows the resist compositions used in each Example and Comparative Example and the results of each Example and Comparative Example.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000065
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000065
 表2の結果から、実施例で用いたレジスト組成物は、疎密依存性、LWR性能、及び欠陥抑制性能に優れることが分かった。比較例5は疎密依存性が実施例よりも劣っていたが、これは、使用したAX-4の現像液への溶解性が高いこと、及びAX-4が脱保護した後の樹脂の現像液への溶解性が高すぎることが原因であると推定される。 From the results in Table 2, it was found that the resist compositions used in the examples were excellent in density dependence, LWR performance, and defect suppression performance. Comparative Example 5 had poorer density dependence than the Examples, but this was due to the high solubility of the AX-4 used in the developer, and the high solubility of the resin in the developer after AX-4 was deprotected. This is presumed to be due to too high solubility in
 本発明により、疎密依存性、LWR性能、及び欠陥抑制性能に優れる感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物を提供することができる。
 また、本発明により、上記感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物を用いた感活性光線性又は感放射線性膜、パターン形成方法、及び電子デバイスの製造方法を提供することができる。
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition that is excellent in density dependence, LWR performance, and defect suppression performance.
Further, the present invention can provide an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, a pattern forming method, and an electronic device manufacturing method using the above-mentioned actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition.
 本発明を詳細にまた特定の実施態様を参照して説明したが、本発明の精神と範囲を逸脱することなく様々な変更や修正を加えることができることは当業者にとって明らかである。
 本出願は、2022年7月29日出願の日本特許出願(特願2022-122351)に基づくものであり、その内容はここに参照として取り込まれる。
Although the invention has been described in detail and with reference to specific embodiments, it will be apparent to those skilled in the art that various changes and modifications can be made without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention.
This application is based on a Japanese patent application (Japanese Patent Application No. 2022-122351) filed on July 29, 2022, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
 1 領域1
 2 領域2
 3 領域3
 
  
1 area 1
2 area 2
3 area 3

Claims (11)

  1.  酸の作用により分解し極性が増大する基を含む樹脂(A)と、塩(B)とを含有する感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物であって、
     前記樹脂(A)は、下記一般式(S1)で表される繰り返し単位及び下記一般式(S2)で表される繰り返し単位からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1つの繰り返し単位と、極性基を有する繰り返し単位とを含み、
     前記塩(B)は、下記一般式(T1)で表される化合物である、感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001

     一般式(S1)中、Ra~Raは、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、又は、アルコキシカルボニル基を表す。
     Laは単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
     Ra~Raは、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、芳香族複素環式基、アラルキル基、又は、アルケニル基を表す。Ra~Raのうち2つが互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。
     Raは、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、芳香族複素環式基、アルコキシ基、アシルオキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、ハロゲン原子、又は、シアノ基を表す。Raが複数存在する場合、複数のRaは同一でも異なっていてもよい。
     Ra~Ra、La、及びRaのうち2つが互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。
     naは0~4の整数を表す。maは0~2の整数を表す。
     一般式(S2)中、Ra~Raは、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、又は、アルコキシカルボニル基を表す。
     Laは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
     Araは、芳香環基を表す。
     Ra10~Ra12は、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、芳香族複素環式基、アラルキル基、アルコキシ基、シクロアルキルオキシ基、又は、アルケニル基を表す。
     Ra10~Ra12のうち少なくとも2つが互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。
     Ra~Ra12のうち少なくとも1つがAraと結合してもよい。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002

     一般式(T1)中、Arbは、芳香環を表す。前記芳香環は置換基を有してもよい。
     Qは、酸の残基を表す。
     一般式(T1)中のアニオンは、pKaが-1~9の酸の共役塩基である。
     Rbは、-OH、-ORb、-NRbRb、-SH、又は-SRbを表し、複数のRbは同一でも異なっていてもよい。
     Rbは、アルキル基、アリール基、又はアシル基を表す。
     Rb及びRbは、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基、又はアシル基を表す。
     Rbは、アルキル基、アリール基、又はアシル基を表す。
     Rb~Rbのうち少なくとも2つが互いに結合し環を形成してもよい。Arbが置換基を有する場合、前記置換基とRb~Rbの少なくとも1つが結合して環を形成してもよい。
     Lbは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。Lbは、Rbに含まれる水素原子を置換する形でRbと結合して環を形成してもよい。Lbは、Rb~Rbの少なくとも1つと結合して環を形成してもよい。Arbが置換基を有する場合、前記置換基とLbは結合して環を形成してもよい。
     pは2~5の整数を表す。
     Gm+は、m価の有機カチオンを表す。mは1以上の整数を表す。
    An actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition containing a resin (A) containing a group that decomposes and increases polarity by the action of an acid, and a salt (B),
    The resin (A) includes at least one repeating unit selected from the group consisting of a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (S1) and a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (S2), and a repeating unit having a polar group. including units,
    The salt (B) is an actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, which is a compound represented by the following general formula (T1).
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001

    In the general formula (S1), Ra 1 to Ra 3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group.
    La 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
    Ra 4 to Ra 6 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aromatic heterocyclic group, an aralkyl group, or an alkenyl group. Two of Ra 4 to Ra 6 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
    Ra 0 represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aromatic heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a halogen atom, or a cyano group. When a plurality of Ra 0s exist, the plurality of Ra 0s may be the same or different.
    Two of Ra 1 to Ra 3 , La 1 and Ra 0 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
    na represents an integer from 0 to 4. ma represents an integer from 0 to 2.
    In general formula (S2), Ra 7 to Ra 9 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group.
    La 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
    Ara represents an aromatic ring group.
    Ra 10 to Ra 12 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an aromatic heterocyclic group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkyloxy group, or an alkenyl group.
    At least two of Ra 10 to Ra 12 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
    At least one of Ra 9 to Ra 12 may bind to Ara.
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002

    In general formula (T1), Arb represents an aromatic ring. The aromatic ring may have a substituent.
    Q represents an acid residue.
    The anion in general formula (T1) is a conjugate base of an acid with a pKa of -1 to 9.
    Rb 1 represents -OH, -ORb 2 , -NRb 3 Rb 4 , -SH, or -SRb 5 , and multiple Rb 1 's may be the same or different.
    Rb 2 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or an acyl group.
    Rb 3 and Rb 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or an acyl group.
    Rb 5 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or an acyl group.
    At least two of Rb 2 to Rb 5 may be bonded to each other to form a ring. When Arb has a substituent, the substituent and at least one of Rb 2 to Rb 5 may be bonded to form a ring.
    Lb 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Lb 1 may be combined with Rb 1 to form a ring by substituting a hydrogen atom contained in Rb 1 . Lb 1 may be bonded to at least one of Rb 2 to Rb 5 to form a ring. When Arb has a substituent, the substituent and Lb 1 may be combined to form a ring.
    p represents an integer from 2 to 5.
    G m+ represents an m-valent organic cation. m represents an integer of 1 or more.
  2.  前記極性基を有する繰り返し単位が、下記一般式(S3)で表される繰り返し単位である、請求項1に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003

     一般式(S3)中、R101、R102及びR103は、各々独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、シクロアルキル基、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、又は、アルコキシカルボニル基を表す。R102はArと結合して環を形成してもよく、その場合のR102は単結合又はアルキレン基を表す。
     Lは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
     Arは、芳香環基を表す。
     kは、1~5の整数を表す。
    The actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to claim 1, wherein the repeating unit having a polar group is a repeating unit represented by the following general formula (S3).
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003

    In general formula (S3), R 101 , R 102 and R 103 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an alkoxycarbonyl group. R 102 may combine with Ar A to form a ring, in which case R 102 represents a single bond or an alkylene group.
    L A represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
    Ar A represents an aromatic ring group.
    k represents an integer from 1 to 5.
  3.  前記一般式(T1)中のアニオンが、pKaが0~7の酸の共役塩基である、請求項1に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。 The actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to claim 1, wherein the anion in the general formula (T1) is a conjugate base of an acid having a pKa of 0 to 7.
  4.  前記一般式(T1)中のRbのうち少なくとも1つが、-OHである、請求項1に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。 The actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to claim 1, wherein at least one of Rb 1 in the general formula (T1) is -OH.
  5.  前記一般式(T1)中のQが、カルボキシレートアニオン基である、請求項1に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。 The actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to claim 1, wherein Q in the general formula (T1) is a carboxylate anion group.
  6.  さらに、前記塩(B)とは異なる化合物であり、活性光線又は放射線の照射により酸を発生する塩(C)を含有し、前記塩(C)が、酸の作用により分解する基を有する、請求項1に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。 Furthermore, the salt (C) is a compound different from the salt (B) and contains a salt (C) that generates an acid upon irradiation with actinic rays or radiation, and the salt (C) has a group that is decomposed by the action of the acid. The actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to claim 1.
  7.  前記塩(C)が、下記一般式(U1)で表される化合物である、請求項6に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004

     一般式(U1)中、Lは、単結合又は二価の連結基を表す。Lが複数存在するとき、複数のLは同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
     Aは、酸の作用により分解する基を表す。Aが複数存在するとき、複数のAは同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
     nは、1~5の整数を表す。
     Xは、n+1価の連結基を表す。
     Mは、スルホニウムイオン又はヨードニウムイオンを表す。
    The actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to claim 6, wherein the salt (C) is a compound represented by the following general formula (U1).
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004

    In general formula (U1), L represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. When a plurality of L's exist, the plurality of L's may be the same or different.
    A represents a group that decomposes under the action of an acid. When a plurality of A's exist, the plural A's may be the same or different.
    n represents an integer from 1 to 5.
    X represents an n+1-valent linking group.
    M + represents a sulfonium ion or an iodonium ion.
  8.  前記塩(C)が、下記一般式(U2)で表される化合物である、請求項7に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005

     一般式(U2)中、L、A、n、及びMは、それぞれ、一般式(U1)中のL、A、n、及びMと同じ意味を表す。
    The actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to claim 7, wherein the salt (C) is a compound represented by the following general formula (U2).
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005

    In general formula (U2), L, A, n, and M + represent the same meanings as L, A, n, and M + in general formula (U1), respectively.
  9.  請求項1~8のいずれか一項に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物を用いて形成された感活性光線性又は感放射線性膜。 An actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film formed using the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 8.
  10.  請求項1~8のいずれか一項に記載の感活性光線性又は感放射線性樹脂組成物を用いてレジスト膜を形成するレジスト膜形成工程と、
     前記レジスト膜を露光する露光工程と、
     露光された前記レジスト膜を現像液を用いて現像する現像工程とを含むパターン形成方法。
    A resist film forming step of forming a resist film using the actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition according to any one of claims 1 to 8;
    an exposure step of exposing the resist film;
    A pattern forming method comprising a developing step of developing the exposed resist film using a developer.
  11.  請求項10に記載のパターン形成方法を含む電子デバイスの製造方法。
     
      
    A method for manufacturing an electronic device, comprising the pattern forming method according to claim 10.

PCT/JP2023/026881 2022-07-29 2023-07-21 Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, pattern-forming method, and production method for electronic device WO2024024691A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2022122351 2022-07-29
JP2022-122351 2022-07-29

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024024691A1 true WO2024024691A1 (en) 2024-02-01

Family

ID=89706574

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2023/026881 WO2024024691A1 (en) 2022-07-29 2023-07-21 Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, pattern-forming method, and production method for electronic device

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2024024691A1 (en)

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2011048142A (en) * 2009-08-27 2011-03-10 Sumitomo Chemical Co Ltd Resist composition and pattern forming method
JP2017219836A (en) * 2016-06-07 2017-12-14 信越化学工業株式会社 Resist material and pattern forming method
WO2020095641A1 (en) * 2018-11-07 2020-05-14 富士フイルム株式会社 Radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern forming method, and electronic device production method
JP2022007909A (en) * 2020-03-11 2022-01-13 Jsr株式会社 Radiation-sensitive resin composition, patterning method and method for producing monomer compound
WO2022064863A1 (en) * 2020-09-28 2022-03-31 Jsr株式会社 Radiation-sensitive resin composition and pattern formation method
JP2022066864A (en) * 2020-10-19 2022-05-02 東京応化工業株式会社 Resist composition and resist pattern forming method
JP2023002462A (en) * 2021-06-22 2023-01-10 信越化学工業株式会社 Resist material, and method of forming pattern

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2011048142A (en) * 2009-08-27 2011-03-10 Sumitomo Chemical Co Ltd Resist composition and pattern forming method
JP2017219836A (en) * 2016-06-07 2017-12-14 信越化学工業株式会社 Resist material and pattern forming method
WO2020095641A1 (en) * 2018-11-07 2020-05-14 富士フイルム株式会社 Radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern forming method, and electronic device production method
JP2022007909A (en) * 2020-03-11 2022-01-13 Jsr株式会社 Radiation-sensitive resin composition, patterning method and method for producing monomer compound
WO2022064863A1 (en) * 2020-09-28 2022-03-31 Jsr株式会社 Radiation-sensitive resin composition and pattern formation method
JP2022066864A (en) * 2020-10-19 2022-05-02 東京応化工業株式会社 Resist composition and resist pattern forming method
JP2023002462A (en) * 2021-06-22 2023-01-10 信越化学工業株式会社 Resist material, and method of forming pattern

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2020066824A1 (en) Actinic light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern formation method, and electronic device manufacturing method
WO2015080048A1 (en) Active light sensitive or radiation sensitive resin composition and pattern forming method
WO2017110352A1 (en) Active light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, active light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, pattern forming method, and electronic device production method
EP4293054A1 (en) Active ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern forming method, and electronic device manufacturing method
WO2023145488A1 (en) Active light sensitive or radiation sensitive resin composition, resist film, method for forming pattern, and method for producing electronic device
WO2023145564A1 (en) Active light–sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, active light–sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, pattern formation method, and production method for electronic device
JP7434592B2 (en) Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern forming method, electronic device manufacturing method
WO2023032794A1 (en) Actinic ray sensitive or radiation sensitive resin composition, actinic ray sensitive or radiation sensitive film, pattern forming method, electronic device manufacturing method, and compound
WO2023054127A1 (en) Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern formation method, and electronic device manufacturing method
WO2023002869A1 (en) Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, method for producing actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, pattern forming method, method for manufacturing electronic device, resin, and method for producing resin
WO2022158323A1 (en) Pattern formation method and method for producing electronic device
WO2024024691A1 (en) Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, pattern-forming method, and production method for electronic device
KR102503368B1 (en) Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern formation method, electronic device manufacturing method
WO2024024669A1 (en) Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, pattern forming method, and electronic device manufacturing method
WO2024048464A1 (en) Actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, actinic ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, pattern formation method, and electronic device manufacturing method
TW202414090A (en) Actinic radiation or radiation-sensitive resin composition, actinic radiation or radiation-sensitive film, pattern forming method, and method for manufacturing electronic device
WO2023243521A1 (en) Actinic light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, actinic light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, method for forming pattern, and method for producing electronic device
WO2023218970A1 (en) Active-ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, active-ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, pattern formation method, and method for manufacturing electronic device
WO2024048397A1 (en) Actinic-ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, actinic-ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, pattern formation method, and electronic device manufacturing method
WO2023047992A1 (en) Active light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, active light-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, pattern forming method, and method for producing electronic device
WO2024048282A1 (en) Active-ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, active-ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, pattern formation method, and electronic device manufacturing method
WO2023140191A1 (en) Active-ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, active-ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, pattern formation method, and electronic device manufacturing method
WO2024080200A1 (en) Active-ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, active-ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, pattern formation method, and electronic device manufacturing method
WO2024004598A1 (en) Active-ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, active-ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive film, pattern formation method, and electronic device production method
WO2023162762A1 (en) Actinic-ray-sensitive or radiation-sensitive resin composition, resist film, pattern forming method, and electronic device manufacturing method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23846421

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1